26
Hydrocolloids Contents: 1. Introduction. 2. History. 3. Ideal requirements. 4. Classification of impression materials. 5. Impression materials. Hydrocolloids: a). Alginate. b). Agar. 7. Recent advances. 8. References. Page 1

Hydroco Llo Ids / orthodontic courses by Indian dental academy

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: Hydroco Llo Ids / orthodontic courses by Indian dental academy

Hydrocolloids

Contents

1 Introduction

2 History

3 Ideal requirements

4 Classification of impression materials

5 Impression materials

Hydrocolloids

a) Alginate

b) Agar

7 Recent advances

8 References

Page 1

Hydrocolloids

INTRODUCTION

Constructing a model or cast is an important step in numerous dental procedures Various

types of cast amp models can be made from gypsum products using an impression mold or

negative likeness of a dental structure An impression is a negative replica of the tissue of the

oral cavity It is used to register or reproduce the form and relation of the teeth amp surrounding

tissue

HISTORY

1558 - Celline described a wax model to make impression in his book MEMORIES

1700 - Matheus G Purenam suggested that wax models can be used in prosthetic

work

1728 ndash Pierre Fauchard described various impression materials in his book LE

CHIRURGEEN DENTISTE

1756 ndash Persian Phillip Pfaff first used plaster models prepared from sectional wax

impression of the mouth

1810 ndash R C Skinner describe about many materials and techniques in his first

American book

1928 ndash ADA developed specification No 19 for impression material

1930 ndash Zinc Oxide Eugenol a rigid impression was introduced

1930 ndash Polysulfide was first used as a commercial synthetic rubber as a copolymer of

Ethylene Chloride amp sodium

1937 ndash Agar was introduced by Sears

1949 ndash Alginate was developed during World war II

Page 2

Hydrocolloids

1950 ndash Polysulfide was used in dentistry

1955 ndash Condensation Silicone was introduced in Germany

1975 ndash Addition Silicone was introduced

1977 ndash Costell introduced Dual tray technique

1980 ndash A Visible light cure Polyether Urethane Dimethacrylate rubber impression

material was introduced

1996 ndash Blare amp Wassed considered a no of solution used to disinfecting impression

material

IDEAL REQUIREMENTS OF IMPRESSION MATERIAL

1 Pleasant taste amp odor

2 Not contain any toxic amp irritating ingredients

3 Adequate shelf life

4 Satisfactory consistency and texture

5 Easy to disinfect with out loss of accuracy

6 Compatible with die and cast material

7 Dimensional stability

8 Good elastic properties

9 Easy manipulation

10 Adequate setting characteristics

11 High degree of reproduction details

12 Adequate strength

13 Should not release any gas

14 Economical

15 Should not be technique sensitive

Classification of impression materials

Impression materials can be classified into various types based on the following

characters

Page 3

Hydrocolloids

1 Based on rigidityelasticity -

a Rigid (non-elastic)

b Elastic

2 Based on viscosity -

a Mucostatic

b Mucocompressive

c Pseudoplastic

3 Based on setting of material -

1 a chemical reaction

b Physical change of state

2 a reversible

b Irreversible

4Based on interaction with salivawater -

1 Hydrophobic

2 Hydrophilic

5Based on chemistry-

1 Impression Plaster

2 Impression compound

3 Metal oxide (zinc oxide eugenol)

4 Reversible hydrocolloid

5 Irreversible hydrocolloid

6 Poly sulfides

7 Condensation silicones

8 Addition silicones

9 Polyether

10 Visible light curing polyether urethane dimethacrylate

Page 4

Hydrocolloids

6Based on use -

1 Primary impression materials

2 Secondary impression materials

3 Duplicating materials

HYDROCOLLOIDS

Colloids are often classified as fourth state of matter the Colloidal state In a solution

of sugar in water the sugar molecules are uniformly dispersed in the water amp there is

no visible physical separation between the solute amp the solvent molecules If sugar

molecules replaced with large amp visible particles such as sand the system is

Suspension or if molecules are liquid such vegetable oil then system is Emulsion

True solution exists as a single phase However both the colloid amp the suspension

have to phase- The dispersed amp Dispersion phase In the colloid the particles in the

dispersed phase consist of molecules held together either by primary or secondary

force The size of the particles range is 1 ndash 200nm

Gels

Colloids with a liquid as the dispersion medium can exist in two different forms

known as Sol amp Gel

A sol has the appearance amp many characteristic of a various liquid

A gel on the contrary is a semi solid amp produced from a soldering process of gelation

by the formation of fibrils or chains called Micelles

Gelation is the conversion of a sol to gel amp the temperature at which this occurs is

called Gelation Temperature

Gelation may be brought about in one of these ways

Page 5

Hydrocolloids

Lowering the temperature- It is done by reducing the thermal energy of effectively

These forces are secondary molecular forces The bond between the fibrils is weak amp they

break at slightly elevated temperature Gelation temp is 37-50degree centigrade

Liquefaction temperature- It is considerable higher than gelation temp amp this

property is known as Hysteresis This temp is between 70 -100 degree centigrade

Chemical reaction- Gelation may also induced by chemical reaction where in the

dispersed phase of soil is allowed to react with a substance to give a different type of

dispersed phase The process is not reversed by an increased temperature

Types of Hydrocolloids

REVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS - Reversible hydrocolloids are those sol can be

changed to gel but gel canrsquot be reversed back to the solution

Eg Alginate impression material

IRREVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS - Irreversible hydrocolloids are those materials

where the change from the sol to gel can be brought by lowering the temp of the sol amp the

gel can be converted back to sol condition by heating

Eg Agar ndash Agar

ALGINATE IRREVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOID

bull The word alginate comes from Algin amp named by a chemist of Scotland It was identified

as a liner polymer with numerous carboxyl acid groups It is called as irreversible

hydrocolloids because gelation is induced by chemical reaction amp transformation is not

possible It is the most widely used dental materials

bull The principal factors responsible for the success of this type of impression materials are-

bull Easy to manipulate

bull Comfortable for the patients

bull Relatively inexpensive

Page 6

Hydrocolloids

Composition

Potassium or Sodium Alginate- 15 It is the chief active ingredient

Calcium Sulfate- 16 It is used as a reactor

Zinc Oxide amp Diatomaceous Earth- Zinc oxide ndash 4 amp Diatomaceous

earth 60

Potassium Titanium Fluoride - 3

Sodium Phosphate - 2

Gelation Process

The typical sol-gel reaction is a soluble alginate with calcium sulfate amp the formation

of an insoluble calcium alginate gel Calcium sulfate reacts rapidly to produce the in soluble

Ca alginate from the potassium or sodium alginate in a aqueous solution The production of

calcium alginate is rapid that it does not allow sufficient working time Thus third water

soluble salt such as a trisodium phosphate is added to the solution to prolong the working

time Thus the reaction between the calcium sulfate amp the soluble alginate is prevented as

long as there is uncreated trisodium phosphate

2Na3Po4 +n CaSo4 rarrnKaSo4 +Ca alginate

When the supply of the trisodium phosphate is exhausted the ca ions begin to react

with the potassium alginate to produce calcium alginate

Kzn Alg +n CaSo4rarr n KaSo4 + Cal alginate

The added salt is retarder

Controlling of gelation time-

An increase in the temp of water used for mixing shorten the working amp setting

time

The proportion of powder amp water also effect the setting time

PROPERTIES

Page 7

Hydrocolloids

Alginate is of two types

Type I - Fast setting

Type II - Normal setting

According to ADA Specification No 18 properties are-

1 Mixing time- Creamy consistency come in 45 ndash 60 sec

2 Working time-

- Fast setting material - 12 ndash 2 min

- Normal set material - 2 ndash 45 min

3 Setting or gelation time-

- Optimum gelation time - 3-4 min at room temp

- For fast setting material - 1 -2 min

- For normal setting material - 2 ndash 45min

4 Permanent deformation - ADA specification requires 97 recovery amp where 3 is

permanent deformation Alginate has 988 recovery amp 15 permanent deformation

5 Flexibility- ADA specification permits10 ndash 20 at the stress of 1000gm cm2 Hard

material has value of 5-8

6 Strength-

The compressive strength- 5000-8000gmcm2

Tear strength - 350-700gmcm2

7Viscoelasticity

Usually an alginate impression material does not adhere to the oral tissue as strongly as some

of the non aqueous elastomers so it is easy to remove the alginate impression rapidly

8Accuracy Most

alginate is not capable of reproducing the finer details that are absorbed in impression with

Agar amp other elastomeric impression material

9 Dimensional effects - The gel may loss water by evaporation from its surface amp it shrinks

- If the gel placed in the water it absorbed water amp gel swells

- Thermal change also contributes to dimensional change The alginate shrinks slightly due to

difference in temp between mouth temp(30c) amp room temp(23c)

10 Biocompatibility -

Page 8

Hydrocolloids

No chemical or allergic reaction associated with alginate

11 Shelf life -

Alginate impressions have shorter shelf life Strong temp amp moisture contamination are two

factor which effect the self life of alginate

MANIPULATION OF ALGINATE

PREPARING THE MIX

A measured powder is shifted into pre measured water that has been placed in a clean

rubber bowl Care should be taken to avoid whipping air into the mix A vigorous figure 8

motion is best with the mix being swiped or stropped against the side of the mixing rubber

bowl with intermittent rotation ie180 degree of the spatula to press out air bubbles The

mixing time is 45sec -1 min

A variety of mechanical devices are also available for mixing impression material

There benefits are convenience speed amp elimination of human error

MAKING THE IMPRESSION

Before setting the impression the material should have developed sufficient body so

that it doesnrsquot flow out of the try A perforated tray is generally used If plastic try or metal

rim lock try is selected a thin layer of adhesive should be applied amp allowed to dry before

mixing and loading the try The thickness of the alginate between the tray amp tissue should

be at least 3mm

Recent developments

1 Dust-free alginates

Inhaling fine airborne particles from alginate impression material can cause

silicosis and pulmonary hypersensitivity

Page 9

Hydrocolloids

Dustless alginates were introduced which give off or no dust particles so avoiding

dust inhalation This can be achieved by coating the material with glycerine or

glycol This causes the powder to become more denser than in uncoated state

2 Siliconised alginates

It is a two component system in the form of two pastes one containing the

alginate sol and the second containing the calcium reactor

The components incorporate a silicone polymer component which makes material

tear resistant compared to unmodified alginates However the dimensional

stability is reported to be poor

3 Low dust alginate impression material

Introduced by Schunichi Nobutakwatanate in 1997

This composition comprises an alginate a gelation regulator and a filler as major

components which further comprises sepiolite and a tetraflouroethylene resin

having a true specific gravity of from 2-3

The material generates less dust has a mean particle size of 1-40microns

4 Antiseptic alginate impression material

Introduced by Tameyuki Yamamoto Maso Abinu patented in 1990

An antiseptic containing alginate impression material contains 001 to 7 parts by weight

of an antiseptic such as glutaraldehyde and chlohexidine gluconate per 100 parts by

weight of a cured product of an alginate impression material

The antiseptic may be encapsulated in a microcapsule or clathrated in a cyclodextrin

5 CAVEX Color change

Page 10

Hydrocolloids

The alginate impression material with color indications avoiding confusion about setting

time

Color changes are visualizing the major decision points in impression making

end of mixing time

end of setting time ( tray can be removed from mouth)

it indicates two color changes

Violet to pink indicates the end of mixing time

Pink to white indicates end of setting time

Other advantages of this material are

-improved dimensional stability (upto 5 days)

Good tear and deformation resistance

Dust free

Smooth surface optimum gypsum compatibility

ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES

Advantages

1 Easy to mix and manipulate

2 Minimum requirement of equipment

3 Accuracy (if properly handled)

4 Low cost

5 Comfortable to the patient

6 Hygienic (as fresh material is used for each impression)

Disadvantages

1 Cannot be electroplated

2 Distortion occurs easily

3 Poor dimensional stability (poured within 15 min)

4 Poor tear strength

AGAR ndash REVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS

Page 11

Hydrocolloids

When agar hydrocolloids heated they liquefy or go into the sol state amp on cooling they

return to the gel state Because this process can be repeated a gel of this type is

described as Reversible hydrocolloid The preparation of the agar hydrocolloids for

clinical use requires care full control amp yields accurate impression It has been largely

replaced by alginate hydrocolloids amp rubber impression materials

COMPOSITION

Borates - 02 ndash 05 Its works as retarder

water - 855 It is reaction medium

Agar- 13-17 It is main active constituent of reversible

hydrocolloid impression material

Sulfates - 1 ndash 2 Accelerators

Fillers - 05 -1 Diatomaceous earth silica wax rubber etc

used as filler

Bactericide - Thymol amp glycerin are used

Color amp flavor

GELATION PROCESS

The setting of the reversible hydrocolloid is called gelation The reaction can be

expressed a sol- gel reaction The physical changes from to gel does not return to the sol at

the same temp at which it solidified The gel must be heated at the liquefaction temp ie 70 -

100c to form sol Sol transform into a gel at 37-50c the exact gelation temp depended on

several factor including the molecular wt the purity of the material amp the ratio of agar to

other ingredients

The gelation is critical If the temp is high the heat from sol may injury to the soft

tissue or if the surface of the sol transforms to a gel as soon as the sol may injure the oral

tissues a high surface stress may develop If the gelation temp is too far below the oral

temp it will be difficulty or even impossible to chill the material sufficiently to obtain a firm

Page 12

Hydrocolloids

gel to adjacent to the oral tissue The temp lag between the gelation amp liquefaction temp of

the gel makes it possible to use as a dental impression material

PROPERTIES

Gelation temperature -

After tempering the sol should be homogenous and should set to a gel between 37

ndash 500c when cooled

Viscoelastic properties -

It demonstrates the necessity of deforming the impression rapidly when it removed

from the mouth which reduces the amount of the permanent deformation The elastic

recovery of the hydrocolloid is never complete amp it does not return entirely to its original

dimension after deformation The amount of permanent deformation in clinical is

negligible provided that -

a) The material has adequately gelled

b) The impression has been removed rapidly

c) The under cuts present in the cavity preparation are minimal

Permanent deformation -

The ADA specification requires that the permanent deformation should be less than

15 after the material compressed 10 for 30sec This impression material readily meets

this requirement with the value of about 1

Distortion during gelation -

If the material is held rigidly to the tray then the impression material shrinks

toward the center of its mass Rapid cooling may cause a concentration of stress near the

tray where gelation first takes place

Flexibility -

The ADA specification requirement for flexibility allows a range of 4-14 amp most

agar materials meet this requirement

Strength -

The compressive strength of Agar impression material is 8000gmcm2

The tear strength of Agar is 7000gmcm2

Page 13

Hydrocolloids

Flow -

Agar is sufficiently fluid to allow detailed reproduction of hard amp soft tissue

Compatibility with gypsum -

Not all the agar impression materials are equally compatible with all gypsum

products The impression should be washed of saliva amp any trace of blood which

retarded the setting of gypsum

Manipulation of agar impression

The use of agar hydrocolloid involves special equipment called conditioning

unit for agar The hydrocolloid is usually supplied In two forms syringe and tray

materials The only difference between the materials is the color and the greater fluidity of

the syringe material

Impression tray

It is rim locked trays with water circulating device This types of trays should

allow a space of 3mm occlusally and laterally and extend distally to cover all the teeth

After the tray has been properly positioned water is circulated at 13 degrees through the

tray until gelation occurs

Preparation of material

Proper equipment of liquefying and storing the agar impression material is essential

At first reverse the hydrocolloid gel to the sol stage Boiling water is a convenient

way of liquefying the material The material must be held at this temperature for a

minimum of 10mins Propylene glycol can be added to the water to obtain 100 degrees

After it has been liquefied the material must be stored in the tray The material can be

stored for several days Usually there are three compartments in the conditioning unit

making it possible to liquefy store and temper the material

Page 14

Hydrocolloids

Conditioning and tempering

Because 55 degree is the maximum tolerable temperature the storage temperature

of 65 degrees would be too hot for the oral tissues especially given the bulk of the tray

material Therefore the material that is used to fill the tray must be cooled and tempered

Eliminating the effect of imbibition is the purpose of placing the gauze pad over the

tempering tray materials When the tray material is placed into the tempering bath the

gauze is removed and the contaminating surface layer of material clings to the gauze and is

removed as well

Making the impression

The syringe material is taken directly from the storage compartment and applied to

the prepared cavities It is first applied to the base of the preparation and then the reminder

of the tooth is covered By the time the cavity preparation and adjoining teeth have been

covered the tray material has been properly tempered and is now ready to be placed

immediately in the mouth to form the bulk of impression Gelation is accelerated by

circulating cool water approximately 18 ndash 21 degrees through the tray for 3 ndash 5 minutes

Disinfection of hydrocolloid impression

As the hydrocolloid impression material must be poured within short time after

removal from the mouth The disinfection procedure should be relatively rapid to prevent

the dimensional change Most manufacturers recommended a specific disinfectant The

agent may be iodophor bleach or gluteraldehyde The distortion is minimal if the

recommended immersion time is followed and if the impression is poured properly The

irreversible hydrocolloid may be disinfected by 10 minute immersion inor spraying with

the antimicrobial agent such as NaOCl and glutaraldehyde without sufficient dimensional

change The current protocol for disinfecting hydrocolloid impression is to use household

bleach iodophor and synthetic phenols as disinfectants After the immersion it is

thoroughly rinsed The disinfectant is sprayed liberally o the exposed surface The

immersion should not be submerged or soaked in the disinfectant solution

Page 15

Hydrocolloids

Recent techniques

Laminate technique

A recent modification of the conventional procedure is the combined agar alginate

technique The hydrocolloid in the tray is replaced with a mix of chilled alginate

that bonds with the agar expressed from a syringe

The alginate gels by a chemical reaction whereas the agar gels by means of

contact with cool alginate rather than with the water circulating through the tray

Since the agar not the alginate is in contact with the prepared teeth maximum

detail is reproduced

Advantages

syringe agar records tissues more accurately

Water cooled tray is not required

Sets faster

Disadvantages

Agar ndash alginate bond failure can occur

Viscous alginate may displace agar

Technique sensitive

Wet field technique

This is a recent technique

The oral tissues are flooded with warm water The syringe material is then

injected in to the surface to be recorded

Before syringe material gels tray material is seated

Page 16

Hydrocolloids

The hydraulic pressure of the viscous tray material forces the fluid syringe

material down in to the areas to be recorded

The motion displaces the syringe material as well as blood and debris through out

the sulcus

ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES

Advantages

1 Hydrophilic Impression material

2 Good elastic properties Good recovery from distortion

3 Can be re-used as a duplicating material

4 Long working time and low material cost

5 No mixing technique

6 High accuracy and fine detail recording

Disadvantages

1 Only one model can be used

2 Extensive and expensive equipment required

3 It can not be electroplated

4 Impossible to sterilize for reuse

5 Low dimensional stability amp tear resistance

TYPES OF FAILURES

1 Distortion- due to

Delayed pouring of impression

Movement of tray during setting

Removal from mouth too early

2 Grainy impression- due to

Inadequate mixing

Page 17

Hydrocolloids

Prolonged mixing

Less water in mix

3 Tearing - due to

Inadequate bulk

Moisture contamination

Removal from mouth too early

Prolonged mixing

4 Bubbles- due to

Early gelation preventing flow

Air incorporated during mixing

5 Irregular voids- due to

Excess moisture ampdebris on

REFERENCES

1 Anusavice ldquoSkinners science of dental materialsrdquo Tenth Edition

2 Dental materials and their selection-willian jorsquo brien

3 Restorative dental materials-craig

4 Removable prosthodintics- stewart

Page 18

  • Constructing a model or cast is an important step in numerous dental procedures Various types of cast amp models can be made from gypsum products using an impression mold or negative likeness of a dental structure An impression is a negative replica of the tissue of the oral cavity It is used to register or reproduce the form and relation of the teeth amp surrounding tissue
  • HISTORY
    • 1558 - Celline described a wax model to make impression in his book MEMORIES
    • 1700 - Matheus G Purenam suggested that wax models can be used in prosthetic work
    • 1728 ndash Pierre Fauchard described various impression materials in his book LE CHIRURGEEN DENTISTE
    • 1756 ndash Persian Phillip Pfaff first used plaster models prepared from sectional wax impression of the mouth
    • 1810 ndash R C Skinner describe about many materials and techniques in his first American book
    • 1928 ndash ADA developed specification No 19 for impression material
    • 1930 ndash Zinc Oxide Eugenol a rigid impression was introduced
    • 1930 ndash Polysulfide was first used as a commercial synthetic rubber as a copolymer of Ethylene Chloride amp sodium
    • 1937 ndash Agar was introduced by Sears
    • 1949 ndash Alginate was developed during World war II
    • 1950 ndash Polysulfide was used in dentistry
    • 1955 ndash Condensation Silicone was introduced in Germany
    • 1975 ndash Addition Silicone was introduced
    • 1977 ndash Costell introduced Dual tray technique
    • 1980 ndash A Visible light cure Polyether Urethane Dimethacrylate rubber impression material was introduced
    • 1996 ndash Blare amp Wassed considered a no of solution used to disinfecting impression material
      • IDEAL REQUIREMENTS OF IMPRESSION MATERIAL
        • 1 Pleasant taste amp odor
        • 2 Not contain any toxic amp irritating ingredients
        • 3 Adequate shelf life
        • 4 Satisfactory consistency and texture
        • 5 Easy to disinfect with out loss of accuracy
        • 6 Compatible with die and cast material
        • 7 Dimensional stability
        • 8 Good elastic properties
        • 9 Easy manipulation
        • 10 Adequate setting characteristics
        • 11 High degree of reproduction details
        • 12 Adequate strength
        • 13 Should not release any gas
        • 14 Economical
        • 15 Should not be technique sensitive
        • 1 Based on rigidityelasticity -
        • a Rigid (non-elastic)
        • b Elastic
        • 2 Based on viscosity -
        • a Mucostatic
        • b Mucocompressive
        • c Pseudoplastic
          • 3 Based on setting of material -
            • 1 a chemical reaction
            • b Physical change of state
            • 2 a reversible
            • b Irreversible
            • 4Based on interaction with salivawater -
            • 1 Hydrophobic
            • 2 Hydrophilic
              • 5Based on chemistry-
                • 1 Impression Plaster
                • 2 Impression compound
                • 3 Metal oxide (zinc oxide eugenol)
                • 4 Reversible hydrocolloid
                • 5 Irreversible hydrocolloid
                • 6 Poly sulfides
                • 7 Condensation silicones
                • 8 Addition silicones
                • 9 Polyether
                • 10 Visible light curing polyether urethane dimethacrylate
                  • 6Based on use -
                    • 1 Primary impression materials
                    • 2 Secondary impression materials
                    • 3 Duplicating materials
                      • HYDROCOLLOIDS
                        • Colloids are often classified as fourth state of matter the Colloidal state In a solution of sugar in water the sugar molecules are uniformly dispersed in the water amp there is no visible physical separation between the solute amp the solvent molecules If sugar molecules replaced with large amp visible particles such as sand the system is Suspension or if molecules are liquid such vegetable oil then system is Emulsion
                        • True solution exists as a single phase However both the colloid amp the suspension have to phase- The dispersed amp Dispersion phase In the colloid the particles in the dispersed phase consist of molecules held together either by primary or secondary force The size of the particles range is 1 ndash 200nm
                          • Gels
                            • Colloids with a liquid as the dispersion medium can exist in two different forms known as Sol amp Gel
                            • A sol has the appearance amp many characteristic of a various liquid
                            • A gel on the contrary is a semi solid amp produced from a soldering process of gelation by the formation of fibrils or chains called Micelles
                            • Gelation is the conversion of a sol to gel amp the temperature at which this occurs is called Gelation Temperature
                              • Gelation may be brought about in one of these ways
                                • Lowering the temperature- It is done by reducing the thermal energy of effectively These forces are secondary molecular forces The bond between the fibrils is weak amp they break at slightly elevated temperature Gelation temp is 37-50degree centigrade
                                • Liquefaction temperature- It is considerable higher than gelation temp amp this property is known as Hysteresis This temp is between 70 -100 degree centigrade
                                • Chemical reaction- Gelation may also induced by chemical reaction where in the dispersed phase of soil is allowed to react with a substance to give a different type of dispersed phase The process is not reversed by an increased temperature
                                  • Types of Hydrocolloids
                                    • REVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS - Reversible hydrocolloids are those sol can be changed to gel but gel canrsquot be reversed back to the solution
                                    • Eg Alginate impression material
                                    • IRREVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS - Irreversible hydrocolloids are those materials where the change from the sol to gel can be brought by lowering the temp of the sol amp the gel can be converted back to sol condition by heating
                                    • Eg Agar ndash Agar
                                      • ALGINATE IRREVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOID
                                        • The word alginate comes from Algin amp named by a chemist of Scotland It was identified as a liner polymer with numerous carboxyl acid groups It is called as irreversible hydrocolloids because gelation is induced by chemical reaction amp transformation is not possible It is the most widely used dental materials
                                        • The principal factors responsible for the success of this type of impression materials are-
                                        • Easy to manipulate
                                        • Comfortable for the patients
                                        • Relatively inexpensive
                                        • Composition
                                        • Potassium or Sodium Alginate- 15 It is the chief active ingredient
                                        • Calcium Sulfate- 16 It is used as a reactor
                                        • Zinc Oxide amp Diatomaceous Earth- Zinc oxide ndash 4 amp Diatomaceous
                                        • earth 60
                                        • Potassium Titanium Fluoride - 3
                                        • Sodium Phosphate - 2
                                          • Gelation Process
                                            • The typical sol-gel reaction is a soluble alginate with calcium sulfate amp the formation of an insoluble calcium alginate gel Calcium sulfate reacts rapidly to produce the in soluble Ca alginate from the potassium or sodium alginate in a aqueous solution The production of calcium alginate is rapid that it does not allow sufficient working time Thus third water soluble salt such as a trisodium phosphate is added to the solution to prolong the working time Thus the reaction between the calcium sulfate amp the soluble alginate is prevented as long as there is uncreated trisodium phosphate
                                            • 2Na3Po4 +n CaSo4 rarrnKaSo4 +Ca alginate
                                            • When the supply of the trisodium phosphate is exhausted the ca ions begin to react with the potassium alginate to produce calcium alginate Kzn Alg +n CaSo4rarr n KaSo4 + Cal alginate
                                            • The added salt is retarder
                                            • Controlling of gelation time-
                                            • An increase in the temp of water used for mixing shorten the working amp setting time
                                            • The proportion of powder amp water also effect the setting time
                                              • PROPERTIES
                                                • Alginate is of two types
                                                • Type I - Fast setting
                                                • Type II - Normal setting
                                                • According to ADA Specification No 18 properties are-
                                                • 1 Mixing time- Creamy consistency come in 45 ndash 60 sec
                                                • 2 Working time-
                                                • - Fast setting material - 12 ndash 2 min
                                                • - Normal set material - 2 ndash 45 min
                                                • 3 Setting or gelation time-
                                                • - Optimum gelation time - 3-4 min at room temp
                                                • - For fast setting material - 1 -2 min
                                                • - For normal setting material - 2 ndash 45min
                                                • 4 Permanent deformation - ADA specification requires 97 recovery amp where 3 is permanent deformation Alginate has 988 recovery amp 15 permanent deformation
                                                • 5 Flexibility- ADA specification permits10 ndash 20 at the stress of 1000gm cm2 Hard material has value of 5-8
                                                • 6 Strength-
                                                • The compressive strength- 5000-8000gmcm2
                                                • Tear strength - 350-700gmcm2
                                                • 7Viscoelasticity Usually an alginate impression material does not adhere to the oral tissue as strongly as some of the non aqueous elastomers so it is easy to remove the alginate impression rapidly
                                                • 8Accuracy Most alginate is not capable of reproducing the finer details that are absorbed in impression with Agar amp other elastomeric impression material
                                                • 9 Dimensional effects - The gel may loss water by evaporation from its surface amp it shrinks
                                                • - If the gel placed in the water it absorbed water amp gel swells
                                                • - Thermal change also contributes to dimensional change The alginate shrinks slightly due to difference in temp between mouth temp(30c) amp room temp(23c)
                                                • 10 Biocompatibility -
                                                • No chemical or allergic reaction associated with alginate
                                                • 11 Shelf life -
                                                • Alginate impressions have shorter shelf life Strong temp amp moisture contamination are two factor which effect the self life of alginate
                                                  • MANIPULATION OF ALGINATE
                                                    • PREPARING THE MIX
                                                    • A measured powder is shifted into pre measured water that has been placed in a clean rubber bowl Care should be taken to avoid whipping air into the mix A vigorous figure 8 motion is best with the mix being swiped or stropped against the side of the mixing rubber bowl with intermittent rotation ie180 degree of the spatula to press out air bubbles The mixing time is 45sec -1 min
                                                    • A variety of mechanical devices are also available for mixing impression material There benefits are convenience speed amp elimination of human error
                                                    • MAKING THE IMPRESSION
                                                    • Before setting the impression the material should have developed sufficient body so that it doesnrsquot flow out of the try A perforated tray is generally used If plastic try or metal rim lock try is selected a thin layer of adhesive should be applied amp allowed to dry before mixing and loading the try The thickness of the alginate between the tray amp tissue should be at least 3mm
                                                    • ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES
                                                    • Advantages
                                                    • 1 Cannot be electroplated
                                                    • 2 Distortion occurs easily
                                                    • 3 Poor dimensional stability (poured within 15 min)
                                                    • 4 Poor tear strength
                                                    • AGAR ndash REVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS
                                                    • When agar hydrocolloids heated they liquefy or go into the sol state amp on cooling they return to the gel state Because this process can be repeated a gel of this type is described as Reversible hydrocolloid The preparation of the agar hydrocolloids for clinical use requires care full control amp yields accurate impression It has been largely replaced by alginate hydrocolloids amp rubber impression materials
                                                      • COMPOSITION
                                                        • Borates - 02 ndash 05 Its works as retarder
                                                        • water - 855 It is reaction medium
                                                        • Agar- 13-17 It is main active constituent of reversible hydrocolloid impression material
                                                        • Sulfates - 1 ndash 2 Accelerators
                                                        • Fillers - 05 -1 Diatomaceous earth silica wax rubber etc used as filler
                                                        • Bactericide - Thymol amp glycerin are used
                                                        • Color amp flavor
                                                          • GELATION PROCESS
                                                            • The setting of the reversible hydrocolloid is called gelation The reaction can be expressed a sol- gel reaction The physical changes from to gel does not return to the sol at the same temp at which it solidified The gel must be heated at the liquefaction temp ie 70 - 100c to form sol Sol transform into a gel at 37-50c the exact gelation temp depended on several factor including the molecular wt the purity of the material amp the ratio of agar to other ingredients
                                                            • The gelation is critical If the temp is high the heat from sol may injury to the soft tissue or if the surface of the sol transforms to a gel as soon as the sol may injure the oral tissues a high surface stress may develop If the gelation temp is too far below the oral temp it will be difficulty or even impossible to chill the material sufficiently to obtain a firm gel to adjacent to the oral tissue The temp lag between the gelation amp liquefaction temp of the gel makes it possible to use as a dental impression material
                                                              • PROPERTIES
                                                                • Gelation temperature -
                                                                • After tempering the sol should be homogenous and should set to a gel between 37 ndash 500c when cooled
                                                                • Viscoelastic properties -
                                                                • It demonstrates the necessity of deforming the impression rapidly when it removed from the mouth which reduces the amount of the permanent deformation The elastic recovery of the hydrocolloid is never complete amp it does not return entirely to its original dimension after deformation The amount of permanent deformation in clinical is negligible provided that -
                                                                • a) The material has adequately gelled
                                                                • b) The impression has been removed rapidly
                                                                • c) The under cuts present in the cavity preparation are minimal
                                                                • Permanent deformation -
                                                                • The ADA specification requires that the permanent deformation should be less than 15 after the material compressed 10 for 30sec This impression material readily meets this requirement with the value of about 1
                                                                • Distortion during gelation -
                                                                • If the material is held rigidly to the tray then the impression material shrinks toward the center of its mass Rapid cooling may cause a concentration of stress near the tray where gelation first takes place
                                                                • Flexibility -
                                                                • The ADA specification requirement for flexibility allows a range of 4-14 amp most agar materials meet this requirement
                                                                • Strength -
                                                                • The compressive strength of Agar impression material is 8000gmcm2
                                                                • The tear strength of Agar is 7000gmcm2
                                                                • Flow -
                                                                • Agar is sufficiently fluid to allow detailed reproduction of hard amp soft tissue
                                                                • Compatibility with gypsum -
                                                                • Not all the agar impression materials are equally compatible with all gypsum products The impression should be washed of saliva amp any trace of blood which retarded the setting of gypsum
                                                                  • Manipulation of agar impression
                                                                    • The use of agar hydrocolloid involves special equipment called conditioning unit for agar The hydrocolloid is usually supplied In two forms syringe and tray materials The only difference between the materials is the color and the greater fluidity of the syringe material
                                                                      • Impression tray
                                                                        • It is rim locked trays with water circulating device This types of trays should allow a space of 3mm occlusally and laterally and extend distally to cover all the teeth After the tray has been properly positioned water is circulated at 13 degrees through the tray until gelation occurs
                                                                          • Preparation of material
                                                                            • Proper equipment of liquefying and storing the agar impression material is essential
                                                                            • At first reverse the hydrocolloid gel to the sol stage Boiling water is a convenient way of liquefying the material The material must be held at this temperature for a minimum of 10mins Propylene glycol can be added to the water to obtain 100 degrees After it has been liquefied the material must be stored in the tray The material can be stored for several days Usually there are three compartments in the conditioning unit making it possible to liquefy store and temper the material
                                                                              • Conditioning and tempering
                                                                                • Because 55 degree is the maximum tolerable temperature the storage temperature of 65 degrees would be too hot for the oral tissues especially given the bulk of the tray material Therefore the material that is used to fill the tray must be cooled and tempered Eliminating the effect of imbibition is the purpose of placing the gauze pad over the tempering tray materials When the tray material is placed into the tempering bath the gauze is removed and the contaminating surface layer of material clings to the gauze and is removed as well
                                                                                  • Making the impression
                                                                                    • The syringe material is taken directly from the storage compartment and applied to the prepared cavities It is first applied to the base of the preparation and then the reminder of the tooth is covered By the time the cavity preparation and adjoining teeth have been covered the tray material has been properly tempered and is now ready to be placed immediately in the mouth to form the bulk of impression Gelation is accelerated by circulating cool water approximately 18 ndash 21 degrees through the tray for 3 ndash 5 minutes
                                                                                      • Disinfection of hydrocolloid impression
                                                                                        • As the hydrocolloid impression material must be poured within short time after removal from the mouth The disinfection procedure should be relatively rapid to prevent the dimensional change Most manufacturers recommended a specific disinfectant The agent may be iodophor bleach or gluteraldehyde The distortion is minimal if the recommended immersion time is followed and if the impression is poured properly The irreversible hydrocolloid may be disinfected by 10 minute immersion inor spraying with the antimicrobial agent such as NaOCl and glutaraldehyde without sufficient dimensional change The current protocol for disinfecting hydrocolloid impression is to use household bleach iodophor and synthetic phenols as disinfectants After the immersion it is thoroughly rinsed The disinfectant is sprayed liberally o the exposed surface The immersion should not be submerged or soaked in the disinfectant solution
                                                                                          • ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES
                                                                                          • TYPES OF FAILURES
                                                                                            • 1 Distortion- due to
                                                                                            • Delayed pouring of impression
                                                                                            • Movement of tray during setting
                                                                                            • Removal from mouth too early
                                                                                            • 2 Grainy impression- due to
                                                                                            • Inadequate mixing
                                                                                            • Prolonged mixing
                                                                                            • Less water in mix
                                                                                            • 3 Tearing - due to
                                                                                            • Inadequate bulk
                                                                                            • Moisture contamination
                                                                                            • Removal from mouth too early
                                                                                            • Prolonged mixing
                                                                                            • 4 Bubbles- due to
                                                                                            • Early gelation preventing flow
                                                                                            • Air incorporated during mixing
                                                                                            • 5 Irregular voids- due to
                                                                                            • Excess moisture ampdebris on
                                                                                              • 1 Anusavice ldquoSkinners science of dental materialsrdquo Tenth Edition
Page 2: Hydroco Llo Ids / orthodontic courses by Indian dental academy

Hydrocolloids

INTRODUCTION

Constructing a model or cast is an important step in numerous dental procedures Various

types of cast amp models can be made from gypsum products using an impression mold or

negative likeness of a dental structure An impression is a negative replica of the tissue of the

oral cavity It is used to register or reproduce the form and relation of the teeth amp surrounding

tissue

HISTORY

1558 - Celline described a wax model to make impression in his book MEMORIES

1700 - Matheus G Purenam suggested that wax models can be used in prosthetic

work

1728 ndash Pierre Fauchard described various impression materials in his book LE

CHIRURGEEN DENTISTE

1756 ndash Persian Phillip Pfaff first used plaster models prepared from sectional wax

impression of the mouth

1810 ndash R C Skinner describe about many materials and techniques in his first

American book

1928 ndash ADA developed specification No 19 for impression material

1930 ndash Zinc Oxide Eugenol a rigid impression was introduced

1930 ndash Polysulfide was first used as a commercial synthetic rubber as a copolymer of

Ethylene Chloride amp sodium

1937 ndash Agar was introduced by Sears

1949 ndash Alginate was developed during World war II

Page 2

Hydrocolloids

1950 ndash Polysulfide was used in dentistry

1955 ndash Condensation Silicone was introduced in Germany

1975 ndash Addition Silicone was introduced

1977 ndash Costell introduced Dual tray technique

1980 ndash A Visible light cure Polyether Urethane Dimethacrylate rubber impression

material was introduced

1996 ndash Blare amp Wassed considered a no of solution used to disinfecting impression

material

IDEAL REQUIREMENTS OF IMPRESSION MATERIAL

1 Pleasant taste amp odor

2 Not contain any toxic amp irritating ingredients

3 Adequate shelf life

4 Satisfactory consistency and texture

5 Easy to disinfect with out loss of accuracy

6 Compatible with die and cast material

7 Dimensional stability

8 Good elastic properties

9 Easy manipulation

10 Adequate setting characteristics

11 High degree of reproduction details

12 Adequate strength

13 Should not release any gas

14 Economical

15 Should not be technique sensitive

Classification of impression materials

Impression materials can be classified into various types based on the following

characters

Page 3

Hydrocolloids

1 Based on rigidityelasticity -

a Rigid (non-elastic)

b Elastic

2 Based on viscosity -

a Mucostatic

b Mucocompressive

c Pseudoplastic

3 Based on setting of material -

1 a chemical reaction

b Physical change of state

2 a reversible

b Irreversible

4Based on interaction with salivawater -

1 Hydrophobic

2 Hydrophilic

5Based on chemistry-

1 Impression Plaster

2 Impression compound

3 Metal oxide (zinc oxide eugenol)

4 Reversible hydrocolloid

5 Irreversible hydrocolloid

6 Poly sulfides

7 Condensation silicones

8 Addition silicones

9 Polyether

10 Visible light curing polyether urethane dimethacrylate

Page 4

Hydrocolloids

6Based on use -

1 Primary impression materials

2 Secondary impression materials

3 Duplicating materials

HYDROCOLLOIDS

Colloids are often classified as fourth state of matter the Colloidal state In a solution

of sugar in water the sugar molecules are uniformly dispersed in the water amp there is

no visible physical separation between the solute amp the solvent molecules If sugar

molecules replaced with large amp visible particles such as sand the system is

Suspension or if molecules are liquid such vegetable oil then system is Emulsion

True solution exists as a single phase However both the colloid amp the suspension

have to phase- The dispersed amp Dispersion phase In the colloid the particles in the

dispersed phase consist of molecules held together either by primary or secondary

force The size of the particles range is 1 ndash 200nm

Gels

Colloids with a liquid as the dispersion medium can exist in two different forms

known as Sol amp Gel

A sol has the appearance amp many characteristic of a various liquid

A gel on the contrary is a semi solid amp produced from a soldering process of gelation

by the formation of fibrils or chains called Micelles

Gelation is the conversion of a sol to gel amp the temperature at which this occurs is

called Gelation Temperature

Gelation may be brought about in one of these ways

Page 5

Hydrocolloids

Lowering the temperature- It is done by reducing the thermal energy of effectively

These forces are secondary molecular forces The bond between the fibrils is weak amp they

break at slightly elevated temperature Gelation temp is 37-50degree centigrade

Liquefaction temperature- It is considerable higher than gelation temp amp this

property is known as Hysteresis This temp is between 70 -100 degree centigrade

Chemical reaction- Gelation may also induced by chemical reaction where in the

dispersed phase of soil is allowed to react with a substance to give a different type of

dispersed phase The process is not reversed by an increased temperature

Types of Hydrocolloids

REVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS - Reversible hydrocolloids are those sol can be

changed to gel but gel canrsquot be reversed back to the solution

Eg Alginate impression material

IRREVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS - Irreversible hydrocolloids are those materials

where the change from the sol to gel can be brought by lowering the temp of the sol amp the

gel can be converted back to sol condition by heating

Eg Agar ndash Agar

ALGINATE IRREVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOID

bull The word alginate comes from Algin amp named by a chemist of Scotland It was identified

as a liner polymer with numerous carboxyl acid groups It is called as irreversible

hydrocolloids because gelation is induced by chemical reaction amp transformation is not

possible It is the most widely used dental materials

bull The principal factors responsible for the success of this type of impression materials are-

bull Easy to manipulate

bull Comfortable for the patients

bull Relatively inexpensive

Page 6

Hydrocolloids

Composition

Potassium or Sodium Alginate- 15 It is the chief active ingredient

Calcium Sulfate- 16 It is used as a reactor

Zinc Oxide amp Diatomaceous Earth- Zinc oxide ndash 4 amp Diatomaceous

earth 60

Potassium Titanium Fluoride - 3

Sodium Phosphate - 2

Gelation Process

The typical sol-gel reaction is a soluble alginate with calcium sulfate amp the formation

of an insoluble calcium alginate gel Calcium sulfate reacts rapidly to produce the in soluble

Ca alginate from the potassium or sodium alginate in a aqueous solution The production of

calcium alginate is rapid that it does not allow sufficient working time Thus third water

soluble salt such as a trisodium phosphate is added to the solution to prolong the working

time Thus the reaction between the calcium sulfate amp the soluble alginate is prevented as

long as there is uncreated trisodium phosphate

2Na3Po4 +n CaSo4 rarrnKaSo4 +Ca alginate

When the supply of the trisodium phosphate is exhausted the ca ions begin to react

with the potassium alginate to produce calcium alginate

Kzn Alg +n CaSo4rarr n KaSo4 + Cal alginate

The added salt is retarder

Controlling of gelation time-

An increase in the temp of water used for mixing shorten the working amp setting

time

The proportion of powder amp water also effect the setting time

PROPERTIES

Page 7

Hydrocolloids

Alginate is of two types

Type I - Fast setting

Type II - Normal setting

According to ADA Specification No 18 properties are-

1 Mixing time- Creamy consistency come in 45 ndash 60 sec

2 Working time-

- Fast setting material - 12 ndash 2 min

- Normal set material - 2 ndash 45 min

3 Setting or gelation time-

- Optimum gelation time - 3-4 min at room temp

- For fast setting material - 1 -2 min

- For normal setting material - 2 ndash 45min

4 Permanent deformation - ADA specification requires 97 recovery amp where 3 is

permanent deformation Alginate has 988 recovery amp 15 permanent deformation

5 Flexibility- ADA specification permits10 ndash 20 at the stress of 1000gm cm2 Hard

material has value of 5-8

6 Strength-

The compressive strength- 5000-8000gmcm2

Tear strength - 350-700gmcm2

7Viscoelasticity

Usually an alginate impression material does not adhere to the oral tissue as strongly as some

of the non aqueous elastomers so it is easy to remove the alginate impression rapidly

8Accuracy Most

alginate is not capable of reproducing the finer details that are absorbed in impression with

Agar amp other elastomeric impression material

9 Dimensional effects - The gel may loss water by evaporation from its surface amp it shrinks

- If the gel placed in the water it absorbed water amp gel swells

- Thermal change also contributes to dimensional change The alginate shrinks slightly due to

difference in temp between mouth temp(30c) amp room temp(23c)

10 Biocompatibility -

Page 8

Hydrocolloids

No chemical or allergic reaction associated with alginate

11 Shelf life -

Alginate impressions have shorter shelf life Strong temp amp moisture contamination are two

factor which effect the self life of alginate

MANIPULATION OF ALGINATE

PREPARING THE MIX

A measured powder is shifted into pre measured water that has been placed in a clean

rubber bowl Care should be taken to avoid whipping air into the mix A vigorous figure 8

motion is best with the mix being swiped or stropped against the side of the mixing rubber

bowl with intermittent rotation ie180 degree of the spatula to press out air bubbles The

mixing time is 45sec -1 min

A variety of mechanical devices are also available for mixing impression material

There benefits are convenience speed amp elimination of human error

MAKING THE IMPRESSION

Before setting the impression the material should have developed sufficient body so

that it doesnrsquot flow out of the try A perforated tray is generally used If plastic try or metal

rim lock try is selected a thin layer of adhesive should be applied amp allowed to dry before

mixing and loading the try The thickness of the alginate between the tray amp tissue should

be at least 3mm

Recent developments

1 Dust-free alginates

Inhaling fine airborne particles from alginate impression material can cause

silicosis and pulmonary hypersensitivity

Page 9

Hydrocolloids

Dustless alginates were introduced which give off or no dust particles so avoiding

dust inhalation This can be achieved by coating the material with glycerine or

glycol This causes the powder to become more denser than in uncoated state

2 Siliconised alginates

It is a two component system in the form of two pastes one containing the

alginate sol and the second containing the calcium reactor

The components incorporate a silicone polymer component which makes material

tear resistant compared to unmodified alginates However the dimensional

stability is reported to be poor

3 Low dust alginate impression material

Introduced by Schunichi Nobutakwatanate in 1997

This composition comprises an alginate a gelation regulator and a filler as major

components which further comprises sepiolite and a tetraflouroethylene resin

having a true specific gravity of from 2-3

The material generates less dust has a mean particle size of 1-40microns

4 Antiseptic alginate impression material

Introduced by Tameyuki Yamamoto Maso Abinu patented in 1990

An antiseptic containing alginate impression material contains 001 to 7 parts by weight

of an antiseptic such as glutaraldehyde and chlohexidine gluconate per 100 parts by

weight of a cured product of an alginate impression material

The antiseptic may be encapsulated in a microcapsule or clathrated in a cyclodextrin

5 CAVEX Color change

Page 10

Hydrocolloids

The alginate impression material with color indications avoiding confusion about setting

time

Color changes are visualizing the major decision points in impression making

end of mixing time

end of setting time ( tray can be removed from mouth)

it indicates two color changes

Violet to pink indicates the end of mixing time

Pink to white indicates end of setting time

Other advantages of this material are

-improved dimensional stability (upto 5 days)

Good tear and deformation resistance

Dust free

Smooth surface optimum gypsum compatibility

ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES

Advantages

1 Easy to mix and manipulate

2 Minimum requirement of equipment

3 Accuracy (if properly handled)

4 Low cost

5 Comfortable to the patient

6 Hygienic (as fresh material is used for each impression)

Disadvantages

1 Cannot be electroplated

2 Distortion occurs easily

3 Poor dimensional stability (poured within 15 min)

4 Poor tear strength

AGAR ndash REVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS

Page 11

Hydrocolloids

When agar hydrocolloids heated they liquefy or go into the sol state amp on cooling they

return to the gel state Because this process can be repeated a gel of this type is

described as Reversible hydrocolloid The preparation of the agar hydrocolloids for

clinical use requires care full control amp yields accurate impression It has been largely

replaced by alginate hydrocolloids amp rubber impression materials

COMPOSITION

Borates - 02 ndash 05 Its works as retarder

water - 855 It is reaction medium

Agar- 13-17 It is main active constituent of reversible

hydrocolloid impression material

Sulfates - 1 ndash 2 Accelerators

Fillers - 05 -1 Diatomaceous earth silica wax rubber etc

used as filler

Bactericide - Thymol amp glycerin are used

Color amp flavor

GELATION PROCESS

The setting of the reversible hydrocolloid is called gelation The reaction can be

expressed a sol- gel reaction The physical changes from to gel does not return to the sol at

the same temp at which it solidified The gel must be heated at the liquefaction temp ie 70 -

100c to form sol Sol transform into a gel at 37-50c the exact gelation temp depended on

several factor including the molecular wt the purity of the material amp the ratio of agar to

other ingredients

The gelation is critical If the temp is high the heat from sol may injury to the soft

tissue or if the surface of the sol transforms to a gel as soon as the sol may injure the oral

tissues a high surface stress may develop If the gelation temp is too far below the oral

temp it will be difficulty or even impossible to chill the material sufficiently to obtain a firm

Page 12

Hydrocolloids

gel to adjacent to the oral tissue The temp lag between the gelation amp liquefaction temp of

the gel makes it possible to use as a dental impression material

PROPERTIES

Gelation temperature -

After tempering the sol should be homogenous and should set to a gel between 37

ndash 500c when cooled

Viscoelastic properties -

It demonstrates the necessity of deforming the impression rapidly when it removed

from the mouth which reduces the amount of the permanent deformation The elastic

recovery of the hydrocolloid is never complete amp it does not return entirely to its original

dimension after deformation The amount of permanent deformation in clinical is

negligible provided that -

a) The material has adequately gelled

b) The impression has been removed rapidly

c) The under cuts present in the cavity preparation are minimal

Permanent deformation -

The ADA specification requires that the permanent deformation should be less than

15 after the material compressed 10 for 30sec This impression material readily meets

this requirement with the value of about 1

Distortion during gelation -

If the material is held rigidly to the tray then the impression material shrinks

toward the center of its mass Rapid cooling may cause a concentration of stress near the

tray where gelation first takes place

Flexibility -

The ADA specification requirement for flexibility allows a range of 4-14 amp most

agar materials meet this requirement

Strength -

The compressive strength of Agar impression material is 8000gmcm2

The tear strength of Agar is 7000gmcm2

Page 13

Hydrocolloids

Flow -

Agar is sufficiently fluid to allow detailed reproduction of hard amp soft tissue

Compatibility with gypsum -

Not all the agar impression materials are equally compatible with all gypsum

products The impression should be washed of saliva amp any trace of blood which

retarded the setting of gypsum

Manipulation of agar impression

The use of agar hydrocolloid involves special equipment called conditioning

unit for agar The hydrocolloid is usually supplied In two forms syringe and tray

materials The only difference between the materials is the color and the greater fluidity of

the syringe material

Impression tray

It is rim locked trays with water circulating device This types of trays should

allow a space of 3mm occlusally and laterally and extend distally to cover all the teeth

After the tray has been properly positioned water is circulated at 13 degrees through the

tray until gelation occurs

Preparation of material

Proper equipment of liquefying and storing the agar impression material is essential

At first reverse the hydrocolloid gel to the sol stage Boiling water is a convenient

way of liquefying the material The material must be held at this temperature for a

minimum of 10mins Propylene glycol can be added to the water to obtain 100 degrees

After it has been liquefied the material must be stored in the tray The material can be

stored for several days Usually there are three compartments in the conditioning unit

making it possible to liquefy store and temper the material

Page 14

Hydrocolloids

Conditioning and tempering

Because 55 degree is the maximum tolerable temperature the storage temperature

of 65 degrees would be too hot for the oral tissues especially given the bulk of the tray

material Therefore the material that is used to fill the tray must be cooled and tempered

Eliminating the effect of imbibition is the purpose of placing the gauze pad over the

tempering tray materials When the tray material is placed into the tempering bath the

gauze is removed and the contaminating surface layer of material clings to the gauze and is

removed as well

Making the impression

The syringe material is taken directly from the storage compartment and applied to

the prepared cavities It is first applied to the base of the preparation and then the reminder

of the tooth is covered By the time the cavity preparation and adjoining teeth have been

covered the tray material has been properly tempered and is now ready to be placed

immediately in the mouth to form the bulk of impression Gelation is accelerated by

circulating cool water approximately 18 ndash 21 degrees through the tray for 3 ndash 5 minutes

Disinfection of hydrocolloid impression

As the hydrocolloid impression material must be poured within short time after

removal from the mouth The disinfection procedure should be relatively rapid to prevent

the dimensional change Most manufacturers recommended a specific disinfectant The

agent may be iodophor bleach or gluteraldehyde The distortion is minimal if the

recommended immersion time is followed and if the impression is poured properly The

irreversible hydrocolloid may be disinfected by 10 minute immersion inor spraying with

the antimicrobial agent such as NaOCl and glutaraldehyde without sufficient dimensional

change The current protocol for disinfecting hydrocolloid impression is to use household

bleach iodophor and synthetic phenols as disinfectants After the immersion it is

thoroughly rinsed The disinfectant is sprayed liberally o the exposed surface The

immersion should not be submerged or soaked in the disinfectant solution

Page 15

Hydrocolloids

Recent techniques

Laminate technique

A recent modification of the conventional procedure is the combined agar alginate

technique The hydrocolloid in the tray is replaced with a mix of chilled alginate

that bonds with the agar expressed from a syringe

The alginate gels by a chemical reaction whereas the agar gels by means of

contact with cool alginate rather than with the water circulating through the tray

Since the agar not the alginate is in contact with the prepared teeth maximum

detail is reproduced

Advantages

syringe agar records tissues more accurately

Water cooled tray is not required

Sets faster

Disadvantages

Agar ndash alginate bond failure can occur

Viscous alginate may displace agar

Technique sensitive

Wet field technique

This is a recent technique

The oral tissues are flooded with warm water The syringe material is then

injected in to the surface to be recorded

Before syringe material gels tray material is seated

Page 16

Hydrocolloids

The hydraulic pressure of the viscous tray material forces the fluid syringe

material down in to the areas to be recorded

The motion displaces the syringe material as well as blood and debris through out

the sulcus

ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES

Advantages

1 Hydrophilic Impression material

2 Good elastic properties Good recovery from distortion

3 Can be re-used as a duplicating material

4 Long working time and low material cost

5 No mixing technique

6 High accuracy and fine detail recording

Disadvantages

1 Only one model can be used

2 Extensive and expensive equipment required

3 It can not be electroplated

4 Impossible to sterilize for reuse

5 Low dimensional stability amp tear resistance

TYPES OF FAILURES

1 Distortion- due to

Delayed pouring of impression

Movement of tray during setting

Removal from mouth too early

2 Grainy impression- due to

Inadequate mixing

Page 17

Hydrocolloids

Prolonged mixing

Less water in mix

3 Tearing - due to

Inadequate bulk

Moisture contamination

Removal from mouth too early

Prolonged mixing

4 Bubbles- due to

Early gelation preventing flow

Air incorporated during mixing

5 Irregular voids- due to

Excess moisture ampdebris on

REFERENCES

1 Anusavice ldquoSkinners science of dental materialsrdquo Tenth Edition

2 Dental materials and their selection-willian jorsquo brien

3 Restorative dental materials-craig

4 Removable prosthodintics- stewart

Page 18

  • Constructing a model or cast is an important step in numerous dental procedures Various types of cast amp models can be made from gypsum products using an impression mold or negative likeness of a dental structure An impression is a negative replica of the tissue of the oral cavity It is used to register or reproduce the form and relation of the teeth amp surrounding tissue
  • HISTORY
    • 1558 - Celline described a wax model to make impression in his book MEMORIES
    • 1700 - Matheus G Purenam suggested that wax models can be used in prosthetic work
    • 1728 ndash Pierre Fauchard described various impression materials in his book LE CHIRURGEEN DENTISTE
    • 1756 ndash Persian Phillip Pfaff first used plaster models prepared from sectional wax impression of the mouth
    • 1810 ndash R C Skinner describe about many materials and techniques in his first American book
    • 1928 ndash ADA developed specification No 19 for impression material
    • 1930 ndash Zinc Oxide Eugenol a rigid impression was introduced
    • 1930 ndash Polysulfide was first used as a commercial synthetic rubber as a copolymer of Ethylene Chloride amp sodium
    • 1937 ndash Agar was introduced by Sears
    • 1949 ndash Alginate was developed during World war II
    • 1950 ndash Polysulfide was used in dentistry
    • 1955 ndash Condensation Silicone was introduced in Germany
    • 1975 ndash Addition Silicone was introduced
    • 1977 ndash Costell introduced Dual tray technique
    • 1980 ndash A Visible light cure Polyether Urethane Dimethacrylate rubber impression material was introduced
    • 1996 ndash Blare amp Wassed considered a no of solution used to disinfecting impression material
      • IDEAL REQUIREMENTS OF IMPRESSION MATERIAL
        • 1 Pleasant taste amp odor
        • 2 Not contain any toxic amp irritating ingredients
        • 3 Adequate shelf life
        • 4 Satisfactory consistency and texture
        • 5 Easy to disinfect with out loss of accuracy
        • 6 Compatible with die and cast material
        • 7 Dimensional stability
        • 8 Good elastic properties
        • 9 Easy manipulation
        • 10 Adequate setting characteristics
        • 11 High degree of reproduction details
        • 12 Adequate strength
        • 13 Should not release any gas
        • 14 Economical
        • 15 Should not be technique sensitive
        • 1 Based on rigidityelasticity -
        • a Rigid (non-elastic)
        • b Elastic
        • 2 Based on viscosity -
        • a Mucostatic
        • b Mucocompressive
        • c Pseudoplastic
          • 3 Based on setting of material -
            • 1 a chemical reaction
            • b Physical change of state
            • 2 a reversible
            • b Irreversible
            • 4Based on interaction with salivawater -
            • 1 Hydrophobic
            • 2 Hydrophilic
              • 5Based on chemistry-
                • 1 Impression Plaster
                • 2 Impression compound
                • 3 Metal oxide (zinc oxide eugenol)
                • 4 Reversible hydrocolloid
                • 5 Irreversible hydrocolloid
                • 6 Poly sulfides
                • 7 Condensation silicones
                • 8 Addition silicones
                • 9 Polyether
                • 10 Visible light curing polyether urethane dimethacrylate
                  • 6Based on use -
                    • 1 Primary impression materials
                    • 2 Secondary impression materials
                    • 3 Duplicating materials
                      • HYDROCOLLOIDS
                        • Colloids are often classified as fourth state of matter the Colloidal state In a solution of sugar in water the sugar molecules are uniformly dispersed in the water amp there is no visible physical separation between the solute amp the solvent molecules If sugar molecules replaced with large amp visible particles such as sand the system is Suspension or if molecules are liquid such vegetable oil then system is Emulsion
                        • True solution exists as a single phase However both the colloid amp the suspension have to phase- The dispersed amp Dispersion phase In the colloid the particles in the dispersed phase consist of molecules held together either by primary or secondary force The size of the particles range is 1 ndash 200nm
                          • Gels
                            • Colloids with a liquid as the dispersion medium can exist in two different forms known as Sol amp Gel
                            • A sol has the appearance amp many characteristic of a various liquid
                            • A gel on the contrary is a semi solid amp produced from a soldering process of gelation by the formation of fibrils or chains called Micelles
                            • Gelation is the conversion of a sol to gel amp the temperature at which this occurs is called Gelation Temperature
                              • Gelation may be brought about in one of these ways
                                • Lowering the temperature- It is done by reducing the thermal energy of effectively These forces are secondary molecular forces The bond between the fibrils is weak amp they break at slightly elevated temperature Gelation temp is 37-50degree centigrade
                                • Liquefaction temperature- It is considerable higher than gelation temp amp this property is known as Hysteresis This temp is between 70 -100 degree centigrade
                                • Chemical reaction- Gelation may also induced by chemical reaction where in the dispersed phase of soil is allowed to react with a substance to give a different type of dispersed phase The process is not reversed by an increased temperature
                                  • Types of Hydrocolloids
                                    • REVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS - Reversible hydrocolloids are those sol can be changed to gel but gel canrsquot be reversed back to the solution
                                    • Eg Alginate impression material
                                    • IRREVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS - Irreversible hydrocolloids are those materials where the change from the sol to gel can be brought by lowering the temp of the sol amp the gel can be converted back to sol condition by heating
                                    • Eg Agar ndash Agar
                                      • ALGINATE IRREVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOID
                                        • The word alginate comes from Algin amp named by a chemist of Scotland It was identified as a liner polymer with numerous carboxyl acid groups It is called as irreversible hydrocolloids because gelation is induced by chemical reaction amp transformation is not possible It is the most widely used dental materials
                                        • The principal factors responsible for the success of this type of impression materials are-
                                        • Easy to manipulate
                                        • Comfortable for the patients
                                        • Relatively inexpensive
                                        • Composition
                                        • Potassium or Sodium Alginate- 15 It is the chief active ingredient
                                        • Calcium Sulfate- 16 It is used as a reactor
                                        • Zinc Oxide amp Diatomaceous Earth- Zinc oxide ndash 4 amp Diatomaceous
                                        • earth 60
                                        • Potassium Titanium Fluoride - 3
                                        • Sodium Phosphate - 2
                                          • Gelation Process
                                            • The typical sol-gel reaction is a soluble alginate with calcium sulfate amp the formation of an insoluble calcium alginate gel Calcium sulfate reacts rapidly to produce the in soluble Ca alginate from the potassium or sodium alginate in a aqueous solution The production of calcium alginate is rapid that it does not allow sufficient working time Thus third water soluble salt such as a trisodium phosphate is added to the solution to prolong the working time Thus the reaction between the calcium sulfate amp the soluble alginate is prevented as long as there is uncreated trisodium phosphate
                                            • 2Na3Po4 +n CaSo4 rarrnKaSo4 +Ca alginate
                                            • When the supply of the trisodium phosphate is exhausted the ca ions begin to react with the potassium alginate to produce calcium alginate Kzn Alg +n CaSo4rarr n KaSo4 + Cal alginate
                                            • The added salt is retarder
                                            • Controlling of gelation time-
                                            • An increase in the temp of water used for mixing shorten the working amp setting time
                                            • The proportion of powder amp water also effect the setting time
                                              • PROPERTIES
                                                • Alginate is of two types
                                                • Type I - Fast setting
                                                • Type II - Normal setting
                                                • According to ADA Specification No 18 properties are-
                                                • 1 Mixing time- Creamy consistency come in 45 ndash 60 sec
                                                • 2 Working time-
                                                • - Fast setting material - 12 ndash 2 min
                                                • - Normal set material - 2 ndash 45 min
                                                • 3 Setting or gelation time-
                                                • - Optimum gelation time - 3-4 min at room temp
                                                • - For fast setting material - 1 -2 min
                                                • - For normal setting material - 2 ndash 45min
                                                • 4 Permanent deformation - ADA specification requires 97 recovery amp where 3 is permanent deformation Alginate has 988 recovery amp 15 permanent deformation
                                                • 5 Flexibility- ADA specification permits10 ndash 20 at the stress of 1000gm cm2 Hard material has value of 5-8
                                                • 6 Strength-
                                                • The compressive strength- 5000-8000gmcm2
                                                • Tear strength - 350-700gmcm2
                                                • 7Viscoelasticity Usually an alginate impression material does not adhere to the oral tissue as strongly as some of the non aqueous elastomers so it is easy to remove the alginate impression rapidly
                                                • 8Accuracy Most alginate is not capable of reproducing the finer details that are absorbed in impression with Agar amp other elastomeric impression material
                                                • 9 Dimensional effects - The gel may loss water by evaporation from its surface amp it shrinks
                                                • - If the gel placed in the water it absorbed water amp gel swells
                                                • - Thermal change also contributes to dimensional change The alginate shrinks slightly due to difference in temp between mouth temp(30c) amp room temp(23c)
                                                • 10 Biocompatibility -
                                                • No chemical or allergic reaction associated with alginate
                                                • 11 Shelf life -
                                                • Alginate impressions have shorter shelf life Strong temp amp moisture contamination are two factor which effect the self life of alginate
                                                  • MANIPULATION OF ALGINATE
                                                    • PREPARING THE MIX
                                                    • A measured powder is shifted into pre measured water that has been placed in a clean rubber bowl Care should be taken to avoid whipping air into the mix A vigorous figure 8 motion is best with the mix being swiped or stropped against the side of the mixing rubber bowl with intermittent rotation ie180 degree of the spatula to press out air bubbles The mixing time is 45sec -1 min
                                                    • A variety of mechanical devices are also available for mixing impression material There benefits are convenience speed amp elimination of human error
                                                    • MAKING THE IMPRESSION
                                                    • Before setting the impression the material should have developed sufficient body so that it doesnrsquot flow out of the try A perforated tray is generally used If plastic try or metal rim lock try is selected a thin layer of adhesive should be applied amp allowed to dry before mixing and loading the try The thickness of the alginate between the tray amp tissue should be at least 3mm
                                                    • ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES
                                                    • Advantages
                                                    • 1 Cannot be electroplated
                                                    • 2 Distortion occurs easily
                                                    • 3 Poor dimensional stability (poured within 15 min)
                                                    • 4 Poor tear strength
                                                    • AGAR ndash REVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS
                                                    • When agar hydrocolloids heated they liquefy or go into the sol state amp on cooling they return to the gel state Because this process can be repeated a gel of this type is described as Reversible hydrocolloid The preparation of the agar hydrocolloids for clinical use requires care full control amp yields accurate impression It has been largely replaced by alginate hydrocolloids amp rubber impression materials
                                                      • COMPOSITION
                                                        • Borates - 02 ndash 05 Its works as retarder
                                                        • water - 855 It is reaction medium
                                                        • Agar- 13-17 It is main active constituent of reversible hydrocolloid impression material
                                                        • Sulfates - 1 ndash 2 Accelerators
                                                        • Fillers - 05 -1 Diatomaceous earth silica wax rubber etc used as filler
                                                        • Bactericide - Thymol amp glycerin are used
                                                        • Color amp flavor
                                                          • GELATION PROCESS
                                                            • The setting of the reversible hydrocolloid is called gelation The reaction can be expressed a sol- gel reaction The physical changes from to gel does not return to the sol at the same temp at which it solidified The gel must be heated at the liquefaction temp ie 70 - 100c to form sol Sol transform into a gel at 37-50c the exact gelation temp depended on several factor including the molecular wt the purity of the material amp the ratio of agar to other ingredients
                                                            • The gelation is critical If the temp is high the heat from sol may injury to the soft tissue or if the surface of the sol transforms to a gel as soon as the sol may injure the oral tissues a high surface stress may develop If the gelation temp is too far below the oral temp it will be difficulty or even impossible to chill the material sufficiently to obtain a firm gel to adjacent to the oral tissue The temp lag between the gelation amp liquefaction temp of the gel makes it possible to use as a dental impression material
                                                              • PROPERTIES
                                                                • Gelation temperature -
                                                                • After tempering the sol should be homogenous and should set to a gel between 37 ndash 500c when cooled
                                                                • Viscoelastic properties -
                                                                • It demonstrates the necessity of deforming the impression rapidly when it removed from the mouth which reduces the amount of the permanent deformation The elastic recovery of the hydrocolloid is never complete amp it does not return entirely to its original dimension after deformation The amount of permanent deformation in clinical is negligible provided that -
                                                                • a) The material has adequately gelled
                                                                • b) The impression has been removed rapidly
                                                                • c) The under cuts present in the cavity preparation are minimal
                                                                • Permanent deformation -
                                                                • The ADA specification requires that the permanent deformation should be less than 15 after the material compressed 10 for 30sec This impression material readily meets this requirement with the value of about 1
                                                                • Distortion during gelation -
                                                                • If the material is held rigidly to the tray then the impression material shrinks toward the center of its mass Rapid cooling may cause a concentration of stress near the tray where gelation first takes place
                                                                • Flexibility -
                                                                • The ADA specification requirement for flexibility allows a range of 4-14 amp most agar materials meet this requirement
                                                                • Strength -
                                                                • The compressive strength of Agar impression material is 8000gmcm2
                                                                • The tear strength of Agar is 7000gmcm2
                                                                • Flow -
                                                                • Agar is sufficiently fluid to allow detailed reproduction of hard amp soft tissue
                                                                • Compatibility with gypsum -
                                                                • Not all the agar impression materials are equally compatible with all gypsum products The impression should be washed of saliva amp any trace of blood which retarded the setting of gypsum
                                                                  • Manipulation of agar impression
                                                                    • The use of agar hydrocolloid involves special equipment called conditioning unit for agar The hydrocolloid is usually supplied In two forms syringe and tray materials The only difference between the materials is the color and the greater fluidity of the syringe material
                                                                      • Impression tray
                                                                        • It is rim locked trays with water circulating device This types of trays should allow a space of 3mm occlusally and laterally and extend distally to cover all the teeth After the tray has been properly positioned water is circulated at 13 degrees through the tray until gelation occurs
                                                                          • Preparation of material
                                                                            • Proper equipment of liquefying and storing the agar impression material is essential
                                                                            • At first reverse the hydrocolloid gel to the sol stage Boiling water is a convenient way of liquefying the material The material must be held at this temperature for a minimum of 10mins Propylene glycol can be added to the water to obtain 100 degrees After it has been liquefied the material must be stored in the tray The material can be stored for several days Usually there are three compartments in the conditioning unit making it possible to liquefy store and temper the material
                                                                              • Conditioning and tempering
                                                                                • Because 55 degree is the maximum tolerable temperature the storage temperature of 65 degrees would be too hot for the oral tissues especially given the bulk of the tray material Therefore the material that is used to fill the tray must be cooled and tempered Eliminating the effect of imbibition is the purpose of placing the gauze pad over the tempering tray materials When the tray material is placed into the tempering bath the gauze is removed and the contaminating surface layer of material clings to the gauze and is removed as well
                                                                                  • Making the impression
                                                                                    • The syringe material is taken directly from the storage compartment and applied to the prepared cavities It is first applied to the base of the preparation and then the reminder of the tooth is covered By the time the cavity preparation and adjoining teeth have been covered the tray material has been properly tempered and is now ready to be placed immediately in the mouth to form the bulk of impression Gelation is accelerated by circulating cool water approximately 18 ndash 21 degrees through the tray for 3 ndash 5 minutes
                                                                                      • Disinfection of hydrocolloid impression
                                                                                        • As the hydrocolloid impression material must be poured within short time after removal from the mouth The disinfection procedure should be relatively rapid to prevent the dimensional change Most manufacturers recommended a specific disinfectant The agent may be iodophor bleach or gluteraldehyde The distortion is minimal if the recommended immersion time is followed and if the impression is poured properly The irreversible hydrocolloid may be disinfected by 10 minute immersion inor spraying with the antimicrobial agent such as NaOCl and glutaraldehyde without sufficient dimensional change The current protocol for disinfecting hydrocolloid impression is to use household bleach iodophor and synthetic phenols as disinfectants After the immersion it is thoroughly rinsed The disinfectant is sprayed liberally o the exposed surface The immersion should not be submerged or soaked in the disinfectant solution
                                                                                          • ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES
                                                                                          • TYPES OF FAILURES
                                                                                            • 1 Distortion- due to
                                                                                            • Delayed pouring of impression
                                                                                            • Movement of tray during setting
                                                                                            • Removal from mouth too early
                                                                                            • 2 Grainy impression- due to
                                                                                            • Inadequate mixing
                                                                                            • Prolonged mixing
                                                                                            • Less water in mix
                                                                                            • 3 Tearing - due to
                                                                                            • Inadequate bulk
                                                                                            • Moisture contamination
                                                                                            • Removal from mouth too early
                                                                                            • Prolonged mixing
                                                                                            • 4 Bubbles- due to
                                                                                            • Early gelation preventing flow
                                                                                            • Air incorporated during mixing
                                                                                            • 5 Irregular voids- due to
                                                                                            • Excess moisture ampdebris on
                                                                                              • 1 Anusavice ldquoSkinners science of dental materialsrdquo Tenth Edition
Page 3: Hydroco Llo Ids / orthodontic courses by Indian dental academy

Hydrocolloids

1950 ndash Polysulfide was used in dentistry

1955 ndash Condensation Silicone was introduced in Germany

1975 ndash Addition Silicone was introduced

1977 ndash Costell introduced Dual tray technique

1980 ndash A Visible light cure Polyether Urethane Dimethacrylate rubber impression

material was introduced

1996 ndash Blare amp Wassed considered a no of solution used to disinfecting impression

material

IDEAL REQUIREMENTS OF IMPRESSION MATERIAL

1 Pleasant taste amp odor

2 Not contain any toxic amp irritating ingredients

3 Adequate shelf life

4 Satisfactory consistency and texture

5 Easy to disinfect with out loss of accuracy

6 Compatible with die and cast material

7 Dimensional stability

8 Good elastic properties

9 Easy manipulation

10 Adequate setting characteristics

11 High degree of reproduction details

12 Adequate strength

13 Should not release any gas

14 Economical

15 Should not be technique sensitive

Classification of impression materials

Impression materials can be classified into various types based on the following

characters

Page 3

Hydrocolloids

1 Based on rigidityelasticity -

a Rigid (non-elastic)

b Elastic

2 Based on viscosity -

a Mucostatic

b Mucocompressive

c Pseudoplastic

3 Based on setting of material -

1 a chemical reaction

b Physical change of state

2 a reversible

b Irreversible

4Based on interaction with salivawater -

1 Hydrophobic

2 Hydrophilic

5Based on chemistry-

1 Impression Plaster

2 Impression compound

3 Metal oxide (zinc oxide eugenol)

4 Reversible hydrocolloid

5 Irreversible hydrocolloid

6 Poly sulfides

7 Condensation silicones

8 Addition silicones

9 Polyether

10 Visible light curing polyether urethane dimethacrylate

Page 4

Hydrocolloids

6Based on use -

1 Primary impression materials

2 Secondary impression materials

3 Duplicating materials

HYDROCOLLOIDS

Colloids are often classified as fourth state of matter the Colloidal state In a solution

of sugar in water the sugar molecules are uniformly dispersed in the water amp there is

no visible physical separation between the solute amp the solvent molecules If sugar

molecules replaced with large amp visible particles such as sand the system is

Suspension or if molecules are liquid such vegetable oil then system is Emulsion

True solution exists as a single phase However both the colloid amp the suspension

have to phase- The dispersed amp Dispersion phase In the colloid the particles in the

dispersed phase consist of molecules held together either by primary or secondary

force The size of the particles range is 1 ndash 200nm

Gels

Colloids with a liquid as the dispersion medium can exist in two different forms

known as Sol amp Gel

A sol has the appearance amp many characteristic of a various liquid

A gel on the contrary is a semi solid amp produced from a soldering process of gelation

by the formation of fibrils or chains called Micelles

Gelation is the conversion of a sol to gel amp the temperature at which this occurs is

called Gelation Temperature

Gelation may be brought about in one of these ways

Page 5

Hydrocolloids

Lowering the temperature- It is done by reducing the thermal energy of effectively

These forces are secondary molecular forces The bond between the fibrils is weak amp they

break at slightly elevated temperature Gelation temp is 37-50degree centigrade

Liquefaction temperature- It is considerable higher than gelation temp amp this

property is known as Hysteresis This temp is between 70 -100 degree centigrade

Chemical reaction- Gelation may also induced by chemical reaction where in the

dispersed phase of soil is allowed to react with a substance to give a different type of

dispersed phase The process is not reversed by an increased temperature

Types of Hydrocolloids

REVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS - Reversible hydrocolloids are those sol can be

changed to gel but gel canrsquot be reversed back to the solution

Eg Alginate impression material

IRREVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS - Irreversible hydrocolloids are those materials

where the change from the sol to gel can be brought by lowering the temp of the sol amp the

gel can be converted back to sol condition by heating

Eg Agar ndash Agar

ALGINATE IRREVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOID

bull The word alginate comes from Algin amp named by a chemist of Scotland It was identified

as a liner polymer with numerous carboxyl acid groups It is called as irreversible

hydrocolloids because gelation is induced by chemical reaction amp transformation is not

possible It is the most widely used dental materials

bull The principal factors responsible for the success of this type of impression materials are-

bull Easy to manipulate

bull Comfortable for the patients

bull Relatively inexpensive

Page 6

Hydrocolloids

Composition

Potassium or Sodium Alginate- 15 It is the chief active ingredient

Calcium Sulfate- 16 It is used as a reactor

Zinc Oxide amp Diatomaceous Earth- Zinc oxide ndash 4 amp Diatomaceous

earth 60

Potassium Titanium Fluoride - 3

Sodium Phosphate - 2

Gelation Process

The typical sol-gel reaction is a soluble alginate with calcium sulfate amp the formation

of an insoluble calcium alginate gel Calcium sulfate reacts rapidly to produce the in soluble

Ca alginate from the potassium or sodium alginate in a aqueous solution The production of

calcium alginate is rapid that it does not allow sufficient working time Thus third water

soluble salt such as a trisodium phosphate is added to the solution to prolong the working

time Thus the reaction between the calcium sulfate amp the soluble alginate is prevented as

long as there is uncreated trisodium phosphate

2Na3Po4 +n CaSo4 rarrnKaSo4 +Ca alginate

When the supply of the trisodium phosphate is exhausted the ca ions begin to react

with the potassium alginate to produce calcium alginate

Kzn Alg +n CaSo4rarr n KaSo4 + Cal alginate

The added salt is retarder

Controlling of gelation time-

An increase in the temp of water used for mixing shorten the working amp setting

time

The proportion of powder amp water also effect the setting time

PROPERTIES

Page 7

Hydrocolloids

Alginate is of two types

Type I - Fast setting

Type II - Normal setting

According to ADA Specification No 18 properties are-

1 Mixing time- Creamy consistency come in 45 ndash 60 sec

2 Working time-

- Fast setting material - 12 ndash 2 min

- Normal set material - 2 ndash 45 min

3 Setting or gelation time-

- Optimum gelation time - 3-4 min at room temp

- For fast setting material - 1 -2 min

- For normal setting material - 2 ndash 45min

4 Permanent deformation - ADA specification requires 97 recovery amp where 3 is

permanent deformation Alginate has 988 recovery amp 15 permanent deformation

5 Flexibility- ADA specification permits10 ndash 20 at the stress of 1000gm cm2 Hard

material has value of 5-8

6 Strength-

The compressive strength- 5000-8000gmcm2

Tear strength - 350-700gmcm2

7Viscoelasticity

Usually an alginate impression material does not adhere to the oral tissue as strongly as some

of the non aqueous elastomers so it is easy to remove the alginate impression rapidly

8Accuracy Most

alginate is not capable of reproducing the finer details that are absorbed in impression with

Agar amp other elastomeric impression material

9 Dimensional effects - The gel may loss water by evaporation from its surface amp it shrinks

- If the gel placed in the water it absorbed water amp gel swells

- Thermal change also contributes to dimensional change The alginate shrinks slightly due to

difference in temp between mouth temp(30c) amp room temp(23c)

10 Biocompatibility -

Page 8

Hydrocolloids

No chemical or allergic reaction associated with alginate

11 Shelf life -

Alginate impressions have shorter shelf life Strong temp amp moisture contamination are two

factor which effect the self life of alginate

MANIPULATION OF ALGINATE

PREPARING THE MIX

A measured powder is shifted into pre measured water that has been placed in a clean

rubber bowl Care should be taken to avoid whipping air into the mix A vigorous figure 8

motion is best with the mix being swiped or stropped against the side of the mixing rubber

bowl with intermittent rotation ie180 degree of the spatula to press out air bubbles The

mixing time is 45sec -1 min

A variety of mechanical devices are also available for mixing impression material

There benefits are convenience speed amp elimination of human error

MAKING THE IMPRESSION

Before setting the impression the material should have developed sufficient body so

that it doesnrsquot flow out of the try A perforated tray is generally used If plastic try or metal

rim lock try is selected a thin layer of adhesive should be applied amp allowed to dry before

mixing and loading the try The thickness of the alginate between the tray amp tissue should

be at least 3mm

Recent developments

1 Dust-free alginates

Inhaling fine airborne particles from alginate impression material can cause

silicosis and pulmonary hypersensitivity

Page 9

Hydrocolloids

Dustless alginates were introduced which give off or no dust particles so avoiding

dust inhalation This can be achieved by coating the material with glycerine or

glycol This causes the powder to become more denser than in uncoated state

2 Siliconised alginates

It is a two component system in the form of two pastes one containing the

alginate sol and the second containing the calcium reactor

The components incorporate a silicone polymer component which makes material

tear resistant compared to unmodified alginates However the dimensional

stability is reported to be poor

3 Low dust alginate impression material

Introduced by Schunichi Nobutakwatanate in 1997

This composition comprises an alginate a gelation regulator and a filler as major

components which further comprises sepiolite and a tetraflouroethylene resin

having a true specific gravity of from 2-3

The material generates less dust has a mean particle size of 1-40microns

4 Antiseptic alginate impression material

Introduced by Tameyuki Yamamoto Maso Abinu patented in 1990

An antiseptic containing alginate impression material contains 001 to 7 parts by weight

of an antiseptic such as glutaraldehyde and chlohexidine gluconate per 100 parts by

weight of a cured product of an alginate impression material

The antiseptic may be encapsulated in a microcapsule or clathrated in a cyclodextrin

5 CAVEX Color change

Page 10

Hydrocolloids

The alginate impression material with color indications avoiding confusion about setting

time

Color changes are visualizing the major decision points in impression making

end of mixing time

end of setting time ( tray can be removed from mouth)

it indicates two color changes

Violet to pink indicates the end of mixing time

Pink to white indicates end of setting time

Other advantages of this material are

-improved dimensional stability (upto 5 days)

Good tear and deformation resistance

Dust free

Smooth surface optimum gypsum compatibility

ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES

Advantages

1 Easy to mix and manipulate

2 Minimum requirement of equipment

3 Accuracy (if properly handled)

4 Low cost

5 Comfortable to the patient

6 Hygienic (as fresh material is used for each impression)

Disadvantages

1 Cannot be electroplated

2 Distortion occurs easily

3 Poor dimensional stability (poured within 15 min)

4 Poor tear strength

AGAR ndash REVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS

Page 11

Hydrocolloids

When agar hydrocolloids heated they liquefy or go into the sol state amp on cooling they

return to the gel state Because this process can be repeated a gel of this type is

described as Reversible hydrocolloid The preparation of the agar hydrocolloids for

clinical use requires care full control amp yields accurate impression It has been largely

replaced by alginate hydrocolloids amp rubber impression materials

COMPOSITION

Borates - 02 ndash 05 Its works as retarder

water - 855 It is reaction medium

Agar- 13-17 It is main active constituent of reversible

hydrocolloid impression material

Sulfates - 1 ndash 2 Accelerators

Fillers - 05 -1 Diatomaceous earth silica wax rubber etc

used as filler

Bactericide - Thymol amp glycerin are used

Color amp flavor

GELATION PROCESS

The setting of the reversible hydrocolloid is called gelation The reaction can be

expressed a sol- gel reaction The physical changes from to gel does not return to the sol at

the same temp at which it solidified The gel must be heated at the liquefaction temp ie 70 -

100c to form sol Sol transform into a gel at 37-50c the exact gelation temp depended on

several factor including the molecular wt the purity of the material amp the ratio of agar to

other ingredients

The gelation is critical If the temp is high the heat from sol may injury to the soft

tissue or if the surface of the sol transforms to a gel as soon as the sol may injure the oral

tissues a high surface stress may develop If the gelation temp is too far below the oral

temp it will be difficulty or even impossible to chill the material sufficiently to obtain a firm

Page 12

Hydrocolloids

gel to adjacent to the oral tissue The temp lag between the gelation amp liquefaction temp of

the gel makes it possible to use as a dental impression material

PROPERTIES

Gelation temperature -

After tempering the sol should be homogenous and should set to a gel between 37

ndash 500c when cooled

Viscoelastic properties -

It demonstrates the necessity of deforming the impression rapidly when it removed

from the mouth which reduces the amount of the permanent deformation The elastic

recovery of the hydrocolloid is never complete amp it does not return entirely to its original

dimension after deformation The amount of permanent deformation in clinical is

negligible provided that -

a) The material has adequately gelled

b) The impression has been removed rapidly

c) The under cuts present in the cavity preparation are minimal

Permanent deformation -

The ADA specification requires that the permanent deformation should be less than

15 after the material compressed 10 for 30sec This impression material readily meets

this requirement with the value of about 1

Distortion during gelation -

If the material is held rigidly to the tray then the impression material shrinks

toward the center of its mass Rapid cooling may cause a concentration of stress near the

tray where gelation first takes place

Flexibility -

The ADA specification requirement for flexibility allows a range of 4-14 amp most

agar materials meet this requirement

Strength -

The compressive strength of Agar impression material is 8000gmcm2

The tear strength of Agar is 7000gmcm2

Page 13

Hydrocolloids

Flow -

Agar is sufficiently fluid to allow detailed reproduction of hard amp soft tissue

Compatibility with gypsum -

Not all the agar impression materials are equally compatible with all gypsum

products The impression should be washed of saliva amp any trace of blood which

retarded the setting of gypsum

Manipulation of agar impression

The use of agar hydrocolloid involves special equipment called conditioning

unit for agar The hydrocolloid is usually supplied In two forms syringe and tray

materials The only difference between the materials is the color and the greater fluidity of

the syringe material

Impression tray

It is rim locked trays with water circulating device This types of trays should

allow a space of 3mm occlusally and laterally and extend distally to cover all the teeth

After the tray has been properly positioned water is circulated at 13 degrees through the

tray until gelation occurs

Preparation of material

Proper equipment of liquefying and storing the agar impression material is essential

At first reverse the hydrocolloid gel to the sol stage Boiling water is a convenient

way of liquefying the material The material must be held at this temperature for a

minimum of 10mins Propylene glycol can be added to the water to obtain 100 degrees

After it has been liquefied the material must be stored in the tray The material can be

stored for several days Usually there are three compartments in the conditioning unit

making it possible to liquefy store and temper the material

Page 14

Hydrocolloids

Conditioning and tempering

Because 55 degree is the maximum tolerable temperature the storage temperature

of 65 degrees would be too hot for the oral tissues especially given the bulk of the tray

material Therefore the material that is used to fill the tray must be cooled and tempered

Eliminating the effect of imbibition is the purpose of placing the gauze pad over the

tempering tray materials When the tray material is placed into the tempering bath the

gauze is removed and the contaminating surface layer of material clings to the gauze and is

removed as well

Making the impression

The syringe material is taken directly from the storage compartment and applied to

the prepared cavities It is first applied to the base of the preparation and then the reminder

of the tooth is covered By the time the cavity preparation and adjoining teeth have been

covered the tray material has been properly tempered and is now ready to be placed

immediately in the mouth to form the bulk of impression Gelation is accelerated by

circulating cool water approximately 18 ndash 21 degrees through the tray for 3 ndash 5 minutes

Disinfection of hydrocolloid impression

As the hydrocolloid impression material must be poured within short time after

removal from the mouth The disinfection procedure should be relatively rapid to prevent

the dimensional change Most manufacturers recommended a specific disinfectant The

agent may be iodophor bleach or gluteraldehyde The distortion is minimal if the

recommended immersion time is followed and if the impression is poured properly The

irreversible hydrocolloid may be disinfected by 10 minute immersion inor spraying with

the antimicrobial agent such as NaOCl and glutaraldehyde without sufficient dimensional

change The current protocol for disinfecting hydrocolloid impression is to use household

bleach iodophor and synthetic phenols as disinfectants After the immersion it is

thoroughly rinsed The disinfectant is sprayed liberally o the exposed surface The

immersion should not be submerged or soaked in the disinfectant solution

Page 15

Hydrocolloids

Recent techniques

Laminate technique

A recent modification of the conventional procedure is the combined agar alginate

technique The hydrocolloid in the tray is replaced with a mix of chilled alginate

that bonds with the agar expressed from a syringe

The alginate gels by a chemical reaction whereas the agar gels by means of

contact with cool alginate rather than with the water circulating through the tray

Since the agar not the alginate is in contact with the prepared teeth maximum

detail is reproduced

Advantages

syringe agar records tissues more accurately

Water cooled tray is not required

Sets faster

Disadvantages

Agar ndash alginate bond failure can occur

Viscous alginate may displace agar

Technique sensitive

Wet field technique

This is a recent technique

The oral tissues are flooded with warm water The syringe material is then

injected in to the surface to be recorded

Before syringe material gels tray material is seated

Page 16

Hydrocolloids

The hydraulic pressure of the viscous tray material forces the fluid syringe

material down in to the areas to be recorded

The motion displaces the syringe material as well as blood and debris through out

the sulcus

ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES

Advantages

1 Hydrophilic Impression material

2 Good elastic properties Good recovery from distortion

3 Can be re-used as a duplicating material

4 Long working time and low material cost

5 No mixing technique

6 High accuracy and fine detail recording

Disadvantages

1 Only one model can be used

2 Extensive and expensive equipment required

3 It can not be electroplated

4 Impossible to sterilize for reuse

5 Low dimensional stability amp tear resistance

TYPES OF FAILURES

1 Distortion- due to

Delayed pouring of impression

Movement of tray during setting

Removal from mouth too early

2 Grainy impression- due to

Inadequate mixing

Page 17

Hydrocolloids

Prolonged mixing

Less water in mix

3 Tearing - due to

Inadequate bulk

Moisture contamination

Removal from mouth too early

Prolonged mixing

4 Bubbles- due to

Early gelation preventing flow

Air incorporated during mixing

5 Irregular voids- due to

Excess moisture ampdebris on

REFERENCES

1 Anusavice ldquoSkinners science of dental materialsrdquo Tenth Edition

2 Dental materials and their selection-willian jorsquo brien

3 Restorative dental materials-craig

4 Removable prosthodintics- stewart

Page 18

  • Constructing a model or cast is an important step in numerous dental procedures Various types of cast amp models can be made from gypsum products using an impression mold or negative likeness of a dental structure An impression is a negative replica of the tissue of the oral cavity It is used to register or reproduce the form and relation of the teeth amp surrounding tissue
  • HISTORY
    • 1558 - Celline described a wax model to make impression in his book MEMORIES
    • 1700 - Matheus G Purenam suggested that wax models can be used in prosthetic work
    • 1728 ndash Pierre Fauchard described various impression materials in his book LE CHIRURGEEN DENTISTE
    • 1756 ndash Persian Phillip Pfaff first used plaster models prepared from sectional wax impression of the mouth
    • 1810 ndash R C Skinner describe about many materials and techniques in his first American book
    • 1928 ndash ADA developed specification No 19 for impression material
    • 1930 ndash Zinc Oxide Eugenol a rigid impression was introduced
    • 1930 ndash Polysulfide was first used as a commercial synthetic rubber as a copolymer of Ethylene Chloride amp sodium
    • 1937 ndash Agar was introduced by Sears
    • 1949 ndash Alginate was developed during World war II
    • 1950 ndash Polysulfide was used in dentistry
    • 1955 ndash Condensation Silicone was introduced in Germany
    • 1975 ndash Addition Silicone was introduced
    • 1977 ndash Costell introduced Dual tray technique
    • 1980 ndash A Visible light cure Polyether Urethane Dimethacrylate rubber impression material was introduced
    • 1996 ndash Blare amp Wassed considered a no of solution used to disinfecting impression material
      • IDEAL REQUIREMENTS OF IMPRESSION MATERIAL
        • 1 Pleasant taste amp odor
        • 2 Not contain any toxic amp irritating ingredients
        • 3 Adequate shelf life
        • 4 Satisfactory consistency and texture
        • 5 Easy to disinfect with out loss of accuracy
        • 6 Compatible with die and cast material
        • 7 Dimensional stability
        • 8 Good elastic properties
        • 9 Easy manipulation
        • 10 Adequate setting characteristics
        • 11 High degree of reproduction details
        • 12 Adequate strength
        • 13 Should not release any gas
        • 14 Economical
        • 15 Should not be technique sensitive
        • 1 Based on rigidityelasticity -
        • a Rigid (non-elastic)
        • b Elastic
        • 2 Based on viscosity -
        • a Mucostatic
        • b Mucocompressive
        • c Pseudoplastic
          • 3 Based on setting of material -
            • 1 a chemical reaction
            • b Physical change of state
            • 2 a reversible
            • b Irreversible
            • 4Based on interaction with salivawater -
            • 1 Hydrophobic
            • 2 Hydrophilic
              • 5Based on chemistry-
                • 1 Impression Plaster
                • 2 Impression compound
                • 3 Metal oxide (zinc oxide eugenol)
                • 4 Reversible hydrocolloid
                • 5 Irreversible hydrocolloid
                • 6 Poly sulfides
                • 7 Condensation silicones
                • 8 Addition silicones
                • 9 Polyether
                • 10 Visible light curing polyether urethane dimethacrylate
                  • 6Based on use -
                    • 1 Primary impression materials
                    • 2 Secondary impression materials
                    • 3 Duplicating materials
                      • HYDROCOLLOIDS
                        • Colloids are often classified as fourth state of matter the Colloidal state In a solution of sugar in water the sugar molecules are uniformly dispersed in the water amp there is no visible physical separation between the solute amp the solvent molecules If sugar molecules replaced with large amp visible particles such as sand the system is Suspension or if molecules are liquid such vegetable oil then system is Emulsion
                        • True solution exists as a single phase However both the colloid amp the suspension have to phase- The dispersed amp Dispersion phase In the colloid the particles in the dispersed phase consist of molecules held together either by primary or secondary force The size of the particles range is 1 ndash 200nm
                          • Gels
                            • Colloids with a liquid as the dispersion medium can exist in two different forms known as Sol amp Gel
                            • A sol has the appearance amp many characteristic of a various liquid
                            • A gel on the contrary is a semi solid amp produced from a soldering process of gelation by the formation of fibrils or chains called Micelles
                            • Gelation is the conversion of a sol to gel amp the temperature at which this occurs is called Gelation Temperature
                              • Gelation may be brought about in one of these ways
                                • Lowering the temperature- It is done by reducing the thermal energy of effectively These forces are secondary molecular forces The bond between the fibrils is weak amp they break at slightly elevated temperature Gelation temp is 37-50degree centigrade
                                • Liquefaction temperature- It is considerable higher than gelation temp amp this property is known as Hysteresis This temp is between 70 -100 degree centigrade
                                • Chemical reaction- Gelation may also induced by chemical reaction where in the dispersed phase of soil is allowed to react with a substance to give a different type of dispersed phase The process is not reversed by an increased temperature
                                  • Types of Hydrocolloids
                                    • REVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS - Reversible hydrocolloids are those sol can be changed to gel but gel canrsquot be reversed back to the solution
                                    • Eg Alginate impression material
                                    • IRREVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS - Irreversible hydrocolloids are those materials where the change from the sol to gel can be brought by lowering the temp of the sol amp the gel can be converted back to sol condition by heating
                                    • Eg Agar ndash Agar
                                      • ALGINATE IRREVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOID
                                        • The word alginate comes from Algin amp named by a chemist of Scotland It was identified as a liner polymer with numerous carboxyl acid groups It is called as irreversible hydrocolloids because gelation is induced by chemical reaction amp transformation is not possible It is the most widely used dental materials
                                        • The principal factors responsible for the success of this type of impression materials are-
                                        • Easy to manipulate
                                        • Comfortable for the patients
                                        • Relatively inexpensive
                                        • Composition
                                        • Potassium or Sodium Alginate- 15 It is the chief active ingredient
                                        • Calcium Sulfate- 16 It is used as a reactor
                                        • Zinc Oxide amp Diatomaceous Earth- Zinc oxide ndash 4 amp Diatomaceous
                                        • earth 60
                                        • Potassium Titanium Fluoride - 3
                                        • Sodium Phosphate - 2
                                          • Gelation Process
                                            • The typical sol-gel reaction is a soluble alginate with calcium sulfate amp the formation of an insoluble calcium alginate gel Calcium sulfate reacts rapidly to produce the in soluble Ca alginate from the potassium or sodium alginate in a aqueous solution The production of calcium alginate is rapid that it does not allow sufficient working time Thus third water soluble salt such as a trisodium phosphate is added to the solution to prolong the working time Thus the reaction between the calcium sulfate amp the soluble alginate is prevented as long as there is uncreated trisodium phosphate
                                            • 2Na3Po4 +n CaSo4 rarrnKaSo4 +Ca alginate
                                            • When the supply of the trisodium phosphate is exhausted the ca ions begin to react with the potassium alginate to produce calcium alginate Kzn Alg +n CaSo4rarr n KaSo4 + Cal alginate
                                            • The added salt is retarder
                                            • Controlling of gelation time-
                                            • An increase in the temp of water used for mixing shorten the working amp setting time
                                            • The proportion of powder amp water also effect the setting time
                                              • PROPERTIES
                                                • Alginate is of two types
                                                • Type I - Fast setting
                                                • Type II - Normal setting
                                                • According to ADA Specification No 18 properties are-
                                                • 1 Mixing time- Creamy consistency come in 45 ndash 60 sec
                                                • 2 Working time-
                                                • - Fast setting material - 12 ndash 2 min
                                                • - Normal set material - 2 ndash 45 min
                                                • 3 Setting or gelation time-
                                                • - Optimum gelation time - 3-4 min at room temp
                                                • - For fast setting material - 1 -2 min
                                                • - For normal setting material - 2 ndash 45min
                                                • 4 Permanent deformation - ADA specification requires 97 recovery amp where 3 is permanent deformation Alginate has 988 recovery amp 15 permanent deformation
                                                • 5 Flexibility- ADA specification permits10 ndash 20 at the stress of 1000gm cm2 Hard material has value of 5-8
                                                • 6 Strength-
                                                • The compressive strength- 5000-8000gmcm2
                                                • Tear strength - 350-700gmcm2
                                                • 7Viscoelasticity Usually an alginate impression material does not adhere to the oral tissue as strongly as some of the non aqueous elastomers so it is easy to remove the alginate impression rapidly
                                                • 8Accuracy Most alginate is not capable of reproducing the finer details that are absorbed in impression with Agar amp other elastomeric impression material
                                                • 9 Dimensional effects - The gel may loss water by evaporation from its surface amp it shrinks
                                                • - If the gel placed in the water it absorbed water amp gel swells
                                                • - Thermal change also contributes to dimensional change The alginate shrinks slightly due to difference in temp between mouth temp(30c) amp room temp(23c)
                                                • 10 Biocompatibility -
                                                • No chemical or allergic reaction associated with alginate
                                                • 11 Shelf life -
                                                • Alginate impressions have shorter shelf life Strong temp amp moisture contamination are two factor which effect the self life of alginate
                                                  • MANIPULATION OF ALGINATE
                                                    • PREPARING THE MIX
                                                    • A measured powder is shifted into pre measured water that has been placed in a clean rubber bowl Care should be taken to avoid whipping air into the mix A vigorous figure 8 motion is best with the mix being swiped or stropped against the side of the mixing rubber bowl with intermittent rotation ie180 degree of the spatula to press out air bubbles The mixing time is 45sec -1 min
                                                    • A variety of mechanical devices are also available for mixing impression material There benefits are convenience speed amp elimination of human error
                                                    • MAKING THE IMPRESSION
                                                    • Before setting the impression the material should have developed sufficient body so that it doesnrsquot flow out of the try A perforated tray is generally used If plastic try or metal rim lock try is selected a thin layer of adhesive should be applied amp allowed to dry before mixing and loading the try The thickness of the alginate between the tray amp tissue should be at least 3mm
                                                    • ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES
                                                    • Advantages
                                                    • 1 Cannot be electroplated
                                                    • 2 Distortion occurs easily
                                                    • 3 Poor dimensional stability (poured within 15 min)
                                                    • 4 Poor tear strength
                                                    • AGAR ndash REVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS
                                                    • When agar hydrocolloids heated they liquefy or go into the sol state amp on cooling they return to the gel state Because this process can be repeated a gel of this type is described as Reversible hydrocolloid The preparation of the agar hydrocolloids for clinical use requires care full control amp yields accurate impression It has been largely replaced by alginate hydrocolloids amp rubber impression materials
                                                      • COMPOSITION
                                                        • Borates - 02 ndash 05 Its works as retarder
                                                        • water - 855 It is reaction medium
                                                        • Agar- 13-17 It is main active constituent of reversible hydrocolloid impression material
                                                        • Sulfates - 1 ndash 2 Accelerators
                                                        • Fillers - 05 -1 Diatomaceous earth silica wax rubber etc used as filler
                                                        • Bactericide - Thymol amp glycerin are used
                                                        • Color amp flavor
                                                          • GELATION PROCESS
                                                            • The setting of the reversible hydrocolloid is called gelation The reaction can be expressed a sol- gel reaction The physical changes from to gel does not return to the sol at the same temp at which it solidified The gel must be heated at the liquefaction temp ie 70 - 100c to form sol Sol transform into a gel at 37-50c the exact gelation temp depended on several factor including the molecular wt the purity of the material amp the ratio of agar to other ingredients
                                                            • The gelation is critical If the temp is high the heat from sol may injury to the soft tissue or if the surface of the sol transforms to a gel as soon as the sol may injure the oral tissues a high surface stress may develop If the gelation temp is too far below the oral temp it will be difficulty or even impossible to chill the material sufficiently to obtain a firm gel to adjacent to the oral tissue The temp lag between the gelation amp liquefaction temp of the gel makes it possible to use as a dental impression material
                                                              • PROPERTIES
                                                                • Gelation temperature -
                                                                • After tempering the sol should be homogenous and should set to a gel between 37 ndash 500c when cooled
                                                                • Viscoelastic properties -
                                                                • It demonstrates the necessity of deforming the impression rapidly when it removed from the mouth which reduces the amount of the permanent deformation The elastic recovery of the hydrocolloid is never complete amp it does not return entirely to its original dimension after deformation The amount of permanent deformation in clinical is negligible provided that -
                                                                • a) The material has adequately gelled
                                                                • b) The impression has been removed rapidly
                                                                • c) The under cuts present in the cavity preparation are minimal
                                                                • Permanent deformation -
                                                                • The ADA specification requires that the permanent deformation should be less than 15 after the material compressed 10 for 30sec This impression material readily meets this requirement with the value of about 1
                                                                • Distortion during gelation -
                                                                • If the material is held rigidly to the tray then the impression material shrinks toward the center of its mass Rapid cooling may cause a concentration of stress near the tray where gelation first takes place
                                                                • Flexibility -
                                                                • The ADA specification requirement for flexibility allows a range of 4-14 amp most agar materials meet this requirement
                                                                • Strength -
                                                                • The compressive strength of Agar impression material is 8000gmcm2
                                                                • The tear strength of Agar is 7000gmcm2
                                                                • Flow -
                                                                • Agar is sufficiently fluid to allow detailed reproduction of hard amp soft tissue
                                                                • Compatibility with gypsum -
                                                                • Not all the agar impression materials are equally compatible with all gypsum products The impression should be washed of saliva amp any trace of blood which retarded the setting of gypsum
                                                                  • Manipulation of agar impression
                                                                    • The use of agar hydrocolloid involves special equipment called conditioning unit for agar The hydrocolloid is usually supplied In two forms syringe and tray materials The only difference between the materials is the color and the greater fluidity of the syringe material
                                                                      • Impression tray
                                                                        • It is rim locked trays with water circulating device This types of trays should allow a space of 3mm occlusally and laterally and extend distally to cover all the teeth After the tray has been properly positioned water is circulated at 13 degrees through the tray until gelation occurs
                                                                          • Preparation of material
                                                                            • Proper equipment of liquefying and storing the agar impression material is essential
                                                                            • At first reverse the hydrocolloid gel to the sol stage Boiling water is a convenient way of liquefying the material The material must be held at this temperature for a minimum of 10mins Propylene glycol can be added to the water to obtain 100 degrees After it has been liquefied the material must be stored in the tray The material can be stored for several days Usually there are three compartments in the conditioning unit making it possible to liquefy store and temper the material
                                                                              • Conditioning and tempering
                                                                                • Because 55 degree is the maximum tolerable temperature the storage temperature of 65 degrees would be too hot for the oral tissues especially given the bulk of the tray material Therefore the material that is used to fill the tray must be cooled and tempered Eliminating the effect of imbibition is the purpose of placing the gauze pad over the tempering tray materials When the tray material is placed into the tempering bath the gauze is removed and the contaminating surface layer of material clings to the gauze and is removed as well
                                                                                  • Making the impression
                                                                                    • The syringe material is taken directly from the storage compartment and applied to the prepared cavities It is first applied to the base of the preparation and then the reminder of the tooth is covered By the time the cavity preparation and adjoining teeth have been covered the tray material has been properly tempered and is now ready to be placed immediately in the mouth to form the bulk of impression Gelation is accelerated by circulating cool water approximately 18 ndash 21 degrees through the tray for 3 ndash 5 minutes
                                                                                      • Disinfection of hydrocolloid impression
                                                                                        • As the hydrocolloid impression material must be poured within short time after removal from the mouth The disinfection procedure should be relatively rapid to prevent the dimensional change Most manufacturers recommended a specific disinfectant The agent may be iodophor bleach or gluteraldehyde The distortion is minimal if the recommended immersion time is followed and if the impression is poured properly The irreversible hydrocolloid may be disinfected by 10 minute immersion inor spraying with the antimicrobial agent such as NaOCl and glutaraldehyde without sufficient dimensional change The current protocol for disinfecting hydrocolloid impression is to use household bleach iodophor and synthetic phenols as disinfectants After the immersion it is thoroughly rinsed The disinfectant is sprayed liberally o the exposed surface The immersion should not be submerged or soaked in the disinfectant solution
                                                                                          • ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES
                                                                                          • TYPES OF FAILURES
                                                                                            • 1 Distortion- due to
                                                                                            • Delayed pouring of impression
                                                                                            • Movement of tray during setting
                                                                                            • Removal from mouth too early
                                                                                            • 2 Grainy impression- due to
                                                                                            • Inadequate mixing
                                                                                            • Prolonged mixing
                                                                                            • Less water in mix
                                                                                            • 3 Tearing - due to
                                                                                            • Inadequate bulk
                                                                                            • Moisture contamination
                                                                                            • Removal from mouth too early
                                                                                            • Prolonged mixing
                                                                                            • 4 Bubbles- due to
                                                                                            • Early gelation preventing flow
                                                                                            • Air incorporated during mixing
                                                                                            • 5 Irregular voids- due to
                                                                                            • Excess moisture ampdebris on
                                                                                              • 1 Anusavice ldquoSkinners science of dental materialsrdquo Tenth Edition
Page 4: Hydroco Llo Ids / orthodontic courses by Indian dental academy

Hydrocolloids

1 Based on rigidityelasticity -

a Rigid (non-elastic)

b Elastic

2 Based on viscosity -

a Mucostatic

b Mucocompressive

c Pseudoplastic

3 Based on setting of material -

1 a chemical reaction

b Physical change of state

2 a reversible

b Irreversible

4Based on interaction with salivawater -

1 Hydrophobic

2 Hydrophilic

5Based on chemistry-

1 Impression Plaster

2 Impression compound

3 Metal oxide (zinc oxide eugenol)

4 Reversible hydrocolloid

5 Irreversible hydrocolloid

6 Poly sulfides

7 Condensation silicones

8 Addition silicones

9 Polyether

10 Visible light curing polyether urethane dimethacrylate

Page 4

Hydrocolloids

6Based on use -

1 Primary impression materials

2 Secondary impression materials

3 Duplicating materials

HYDROCOLLOIDS

Colloids are often classified as fourth state of matter the Colloidal state In a solution

of sugar in water the sugar molecules are uniformly dispersed in the water amp there is

no visible physical separation between the solute amp the solvent molecules If sugar

molecules replaced with large amp visible particles such as sand the system is

Suspension or if molecules are liquid such vegetable oil then system is Emulsion

True solution exists as a single phase However both the colloid amp the suspension

have to phase- The dispersed amp Dispersion phase In the colloid the particles in the

dispersed phase consist of molecules held together either by primary or secondary

force The size of the particles range is 1 ndash 200nm

Gels

Colloids with a liquid as the dispersion medium can exist in two different forms

known as Sol amp Gel

A sol has the appearance amp many characteristic of a various liquid

A gel on the contrary is a semi solid amp produced from a soldering process of gelation

by the formation of fibrils or chains called Micelles

Gelation is the conversion of a sol to gel amp the temperature at which this occurs is

called Gelation Temperature

Gelation may be brought about in one of these ways

Page 5

Hydrocolloids

Lowering the temperature- It is done by reducing the thermal energy of effectively

These forces are secondary molecular forces The bond between the fibrils is weak amp they

break at slightly elevated temperature Gelation temp is 37-50degree centigrade

Liquefaction temperature- It is considerable higher than gelation temp amp this

property is known as Hysteresis This temp is between 70 -100 degree centigrade

Chemical reaction- Gelation may also induced by chemical reaction where in the

dispersed phase of soil is allowed to react with a substance to give a different type of

dispersed phase The process is not reversed by an increased temperature

Types of Hydrocolloids

REVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS - Reversible hydrocolloids are those sol can be

changed to gel but gel canrsquot be reversed back to the solution

Eg Alginate impression material

IRREVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS - Irreversible hydrocolloids are those materials

where the change from the sol to gel can be brought by lowering the temp of the sol amp the

gel can be converted back to sol condition by heating

Eg Agar ndash Agar

ALGINATE IRREVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOID

bull The word alginate comes from Algin amp named by a chemist of Scotland It was identified

as a liner polymer with numerous carboxyl acid groups It is called as irreversible

hydrocolloids because gelation is induced by chemical reaction amp transformation is not

possible It is the most widely used dental materials

bull The principal factors responsible for the success of this type of impression materials are-

bull Easy to manipulate

bull Comfortable for the patients

bull Relatively inexpensive

Page 6

Hydrocolloids

Composition

Potassium or Sodium Alginate- 15 It is the chief active ingredient

Calcium Sulfate- 16 It is used as a reactor

Zinc Oxide amp Diatomaceous Earth- Zinc oxide ndash 4 amp Diatomaceous

earth 60

Potassium Titanium Fluoride - 3

Sodium Phosphate - 2

Gelation Process

The typical sol-gel reaction is a soluble alginate with calcium sulfate amp the formation

of an insoluble calcium alginate gel Calcium sulfate reacts rapidly to produce the in soluble

Ca alginate from the potassium or sodium alginate in a aqueous solution The production of

calcium alginate is rapid that it does not allow sufficient working time Thus third water

soluble salt such as a trisodium phosphate is added to the solution to prolong the working

time Thus the reaction between the calcium sulfate amp the soluble alginate is prevented as

long as there is uncreated trisodium phosphate

2Na3Po4 +n CaSo4 rarrnKaSo4 +Ca alginate

When the supply of the trisodium phosphate is exhausted the ca ions begin to react

with the potassium alginate to produce calcium alginate

Kzn Alg +n CaSo4rarr n KaSo4 + Cal alginate

The added salt is retarder

Controlling of gelation time-

An increase in the temp of water used for mixing shorten the working amp setting

time

The proportion of powder amp water also effect the setting time

PROPERTIES

Page 7

Hydrocolloids

Alginate is of two types

Type I - Fast setting

Type II - Normal setting

According to ADA Specification No 18 properties are-

1 Mixing time- Creamy consistency come in 45 ndash 60 sec

2 Working time-

- Fast setting material - 12 ndash 2 min

- Normal set material - 2 ndash 45 min

3 Setting or gelation time-

- Optimum gelation time - 3-4 min at room temp

- For fast setting material - 1 -2 min

- For normal setting material - 2 ndash 45min

4 Permanent deformation - ADA specification requires 97 recovery amp where 3 is

permanent deformation Alginate has 988 recovery amp 15 permanent deformation

5 Flexibility- ADA specification permits10 ndash 20 at the stress of 1000gm cm2 Hard

material has value of 5-8

6 Strength-

The compressive strength- 5000-8000gmcm2

Tear strength - 350-700gmcm2

7Viscoelasticity

Usually an alginate impression material does not adhere to the oral tissue as strongly as some

of the non aqueous elastomers so it is easy to remove the alginate impression rapidly

8Accuracy Most

alginate is not capable of reproducing the finer details that are absorbed in impression with

Agar amp other elastomeric impression material

9 Dimensional effects - The gel may loss water by evaporation from its surface amp it shrinks

- If the gel placed in the water it absorbed water amp gel swells

- Thermal change also contributes to dimensional change The alginate shrinks slightly due to

difference in temp between mouth temp(30c) amp room temp(23c)

10 Biocompatibility -

Page 8

Hydrocolloids

No chemical or allergic reaction associated with alginate

11 Shelf life -

Alginate impressions have shorter shelf life Strong temp amp moisture contamination are two

factor which effect the self life of alginate

MANIPULATION OF ALGINATE

PREPARING THE MIX

A measured powder is shifted into pre measured water that has been placed in a clean

rubber bowl Care should be taken to avoid whipping air into the mix A vigorous figure 8

motion is best with the mix being swiped or stropped against the side of the mixing rubber

bowl with intermittent rotation ie180 degree of the spatula to press out air bubbles The

mixing time is 45sec -1 min

A variety of mechanical devices are also available for mixing impression material

There benefits are convenience speed amp elimination of human error

MAKING THE IMPRESSION

Before setting the impression the material should have developed sufficient body so

that it doesnrsquot flow out of the try A perforated tray is generally used If plastic try or metal

rim lock try is selected a thin layer of adhesive should be applied amp allowed to dry before

mixing and loading the try The thickness of the alginate between the tray amp tissue should

be at least 3mm

Recent developments

1 Dust-free alginates

Inhaling fine airborne particles from alginate impression material can cause

silicosis and pulmonary hypersensitivity

Page 9

Hydrocolloids

Dustless alginates were introduced which give off or no dust particles so avoiding

dust inhalation This can be achieved by coating the material with glycerine or

glycol This causes the powder to become more denser than in uncoated state

2 Siliconised alginates

It is a two component system in the form of two pastes one containing the

alginate sol and the second containing the calcium reactor

The components incorporate a silicone polymer component which makes material

tear resistant compared to unmodified alginates However the dimensional

stability is reported to be poor

3 Low dust alginate impression material

Introduced by Schunichi Nobutakwatanate in 1997

This composition comprises an alginate a gelation regulator and a filler as major

components which further comprises sepiolite and a tetraflouroethylene resin

having a true specific gravity of from 2-3

The material generates less dust has a mean particle size of 1-40microns

4 Antiseptic alginate impression material

Introduced by Tameyuki Yamamoto Maso Abinu patented in 1990

An antiseptic containing alginate impression material contains 001 to 7 parts by weight

of an antiseptic such as glutaraldehyde and chlohexidine gluconate per 100 parts by

weight of a cured product of an alginate impression material

The antiseptic may be encapsulated in a microcapsule or clathrated in a cyclodextrin

5 CAVEX Color change

Page 10

Hydrocolloids

The alginate impression material with color indications avoiding confusion about setting

time

Color changes are visualizing the major decision points in impression making

end of mixing time

end of setting time ( tray can be removed from mouth)

it indicates two color changes

Violet to pink indicates the end of mixing time

Pink to white indicates end of setting time

Other advantages of this material are

-improved dimensional stability (upto 5 days)

Good tear and deformation resistance

Dust free

Smooth surface optimum gypsum compatibility

ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES

Advantages

1 Easy to mix and manipulate

2 Minimum requirement of equipment

3 Accuracy (if properly handled)

4 Low cost

5 Comfortable to the patient

6 Hygienic (as fresh material is used for each impression)

Disadvantages

1 Cannot be electroplated

2 Distortion occurs easily

3 Poor dimensional stability (poured within 15 min)

4 Poor tear strength

AGAR ndash REVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS

Page 11

Hydrocolloids

When agar hydrocolloids heated they liquefy or go into the sol state amp on cooling they

return to the gel state Because this process can be repeated a gel of this type is

described as Reversible hydrocolloid The preparation of the agar hydrocolloids for

clinical use requires care full control amp yields accurate impression It has been largely

replaced by alginate hydrocolloids amp rubber impression materials

COMPOSITION

Borates - 02 ndash 05 Its works as retarder

water - 855 It is reaction medium

Agar- 13-17 It is main active constituent of reversible

hydrocolloid impression material

Sulfates - 1 ndash 2 Accelerators

Fillers - 05 -1 Diatomaceous earth silica wax rubber etc

used as filler

Bactericide - Thymol amp glycerin are used

Color amp flavor

GELATION PROCESS

The setting of the reversible hydrocolloid is called gelation The reaction can be

expressed a sol- gel reaction The physical changes from to gel does not return to the sol at

the same temp at which it solidified The gel must be heated at the liquefaction temp ie 70 -

100c to form sol Sol transform into a gel at 37-50c the exact gelation temp depended on

several factor including the molecular wt the purity of the material amp the ratio of agar to

other ingredients

The gelation is critical If the temp is high the heat from sol may injury to the soft

tissue or if the surface of the sol transforms to a gel as soon as the sol may injure the oral

tissues a high surface stress may develop If the gelation temp is too far below the oral

temp it will be difficulty or even impossible to chill the material sufficiently to obtain a firm

Page 12

Hydrocolloids

gel to adjacent to the oral tissue The temp lag between the gelation amp liquefaction temp of

the gel makes it possible to use as a dental impression material

PROPERTIES

Gelation temperature -

After tempering the sol should be homogenous and should set to a gel between 37

ndash 500c when cooled

Viscoelastic properties -

It demonstrates the necessity of deforming the impression rapidly when it removed

from the mouth which reduces the amount of the permanent deformation The elastic

recovery of the hydrocolloid is never complete amp it does not return entirely to its original

dimension after deformation The amount of permanent deformation in clinical is

negligible provided that -

a) The material has adequately gelled

b) The impression has been removed rapidly

c) The under cuts present in the cavity preparation are minimal

Permanent deformation -

The ADA specification requires that the permanent deformation should be less than

15 after the material compressed 10 for 30sec This impression material readily meets

this requirement with the value of about 1

Distortion during gelation -

If the material is held rigidly to the tray then the impression material shrinks

toward the center of its mass Rapid cooling may cause a concentration of stress near the

tray where gelation first takes place

Flexibility -

The ADA specification requirement for flexibility allows a range of 4-14 amp most

agar materials meet this requirement

Strength -

The compressive strength of Agar impression material is 8000gmcm2

The tear strength of Agar is 7000gmcm2

Page 13

Hydrocolloids

Flow -

Agar is sufficiently fluid to allow detailed reproduction of hard amp soft tissue

Compatibility with gypsum -

Not all the agar impression materials are equally compatible with all gypsum

products The impression should be washed of saliva amp any trace of blood which

retarded the setting of gypsum

Manipulation of agar impression

The use of agar hydrocolloid involves special equipment called conditioning

unit for agar The hydrocolloid is usually supplied In two forms syringe and tray

materials The only difference between the materials is the color and the greater fluidity of

the syringe material

Impression tray

It is rim locked trays with water circulating device This types of trays should

allow a space of 3mm occlusally and laterally and extend distally to cover all the teeth

After the tray has been properly positioned water is circulated at 13 degrees through the

tray until gelation occurs

Preparation of material

Proper equipment of liquefying and storing the agar impression material is essential

At first reverse the hydrocolloid gel to the sol stage Boiling water is a convenient

way of liquefying the material The material must be held at this temperature for a

minimum of 10mins Propylene glycol can be added to the water to obtain 100 degrees

After it has been liquefied the material must be stored in the tray The material can be

stored for several days Usually there are three compartments in the conditioning unit

making it possible to liquefy store and temper the material

Page 14

Hydrocolloids

Conditioning and tempering

Because 55 degree is the maximum tolerable temperature the storage temperature

of 65 degrees would be too hot for the oral tissues especially given the bulk of the tray

material Therefore the material that is used to fill the tray must be cooled and tempered

Eliminating the effect of imbibition is the purpose of placing the gauze pad over the

tempering tray materials When the tray material is placed into the tempering bath the

gauze is removed and the contaminating surface layer of material clings to the gauze and is

removed as well

Making the impression

The syringe material is taken directly from the storage compartment and applied to

the prepared cavities It is first applied to the base of the preparation and then the reminder

of the tooth is covered By the time the cavity preparation and adjoining teeth have been

covered the tray material has been properly tempered and is now ready to be placed

immediately in the mouth to form the bulk of impression Gelation is accelerated by

circulating cool water approximately 18 ndash 21 degrees through the tray for 3 ndash 5 minutes

Disinfection of hydrocolloid impression

As the hydrocolloid impression material must be poured within short time after

removal from the mouth The disinfection procedure should be relatively rapid to prevent

the dimensional change Most manufacturers recommended a specific disinfectant The

agent may be iodophor bleach or gluteraldehyde The distortion is minimal if the

recommended immersion time is followed and if the impression is poured properly The

irreversible hydrocolloid may be disinfected by 10 minute immersion inor spraying with

the antimicrobial agent such as NaOCl and glutaraldehyde without sufficient dimensional

change The current protocol for disinfecting hydrocolloid impression is to use household

bleach iodophor and synthetic phenols as disinfectants After the immersion it is

thoroughly rinsed The disinfectant is sprayed liberally o the exposed surface The

immersion should not be submerged or soaked in the disinfectant solution

Page 15

Hydrocolloids

Recent techniques

Laminate technique

A recent modification of the conventional procedure is the combined agar alginate

technique The hydrocolloid in the tray is replaced with a mix of chilled alginate

that bonds with the agar expressed from a syringe

The alginate gels by a chemical reaction whereas the agar gels by means of

contact with cool alginate rather than with the water circulating through the tray

Since the agar not the alginate is in contact with the prepared teeth maximum

detail is reproduced

Advantages

syringe agar records tissues more accurately

Water cooled tray is not required

Sets faster

Disadvantages

Agar ndash alginate bond failure can occur

Viscous alginate may displace agar

Technique sensitive

Wet field technique

This is a recent technique

The oral tissues are flooded with warm water The syringe material is then

injected in to the surface to be recorded

Before syringe material gels tray material is seated

Page 16

Hydrocolloids

The hydraulic pressure of the viscous tray material forces the fluid syringe

material down in to the areas to be recorded

The motion displaces the syringe material as well as blood and debris through out

the sulcus

ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES

Advantages

1 Hydrophilic Impression material

2 Good elastic properties Good recovery from distortion

3 Can be re-used as a duplicating material

4 Long working time and low material cost

5 No mixing technique

6 High accuracy and fine detail recording

Disadvantages

1 Only one model can be used

2 Extensive and expensive equipment required

3 It can not be electroplated

4 Impossible to sterilize for reuse

5 Low dimensional stability amp tear resistance

TYPES OF FAILURES

1 Distortion- due to

Delayed pouring of impression

Movement of tray during setting

Removal from mouth too early

2 Grainy impression- due to

Inadequate mixing

Page 17

Hydrocolloids

Prolonged mixing

Less water in mix

3 Tearing - due to

Inadequate bulk

Moisture contamination

Removal from mouth too early

Prolonged mixing

4 Bubbles- due to

Early gelation preventing flow

Air incorporated during mixing

5 Irregular voids- due to

Excess moisture ampdebris on

REFERENCES

1 Anusavice ldquoSkinners science of dental materialsrdquo Tenth Edition

2 Dental materials and their selection-willian jorsquo brien

3 Restorative dental materials-craig

4 Removable prosthodintics- stewart

Page 18

  • Constructing a model or cast is an important step in numerous dental procedures Various types of cast amp models can be made from gypsum products using an impression mold or negative likeness of a dental structure An impression is a negative replica of the tissue of the oral cavity It is used to register or reproduce the form and relation of the teeth amp surrounding tissue
  • HISTORY
    • 1558 - Celline described a wax model to make impression in his book MEMORIES
    • 1700 - Matheus G Purenam suggested that wax models can be used in prosthetic work
    • 1728 ndash Pierre Fauchard described various impression materials in his book LE CHIRURGEEN DENTISTE
    • 1756 ndash Persian Phillip Pfaff first used plaster models prepared from sectional wax impression of the mouth
    • 1810 ndash R C Skinner describe about many materials and techniques in his first American book
    • 1928 ndash ADA developed specification No 19 for impression material
    • 1930 ndash Zinc Oxide Eugenol a rigid impression was introduced
    • 1930 ndash Polysulfide was first used as a commercial synthetic rubber as a copolymer of Ethylene Chloride amp sodium
    • 1937 ndash Agar was introduced by Sears
    • 1949 ndash Alginate was developed during World war II
    • 1950 ndash Polysulfide was used in dentistry
    • 1955 ndash Condensation Silicone was introduced in Germany
    • 1975 ndash Addition Silicone was introduced
    • 1977 ndash Costell introduced Dual tray technique
    • 1980 ndash A Visible light cure Polyether Urethane Dimethacrylate rubber impression material was introduced
    • 1996 ndash Blare amp Wassed considered a no of solution used to disinfecting impression material
      • IDEAL REQUIREMENTS OF IMPRESSION MATERIAL
        • 1 Pleasant taste amp odor
        • 2 Not contain any toxic amp irritating ingredients
        • 3 Adequate shelf life
        • 4 Satisfactory consistency and texture
        • 5 Easy to disinfect with out loss of accuracy
        • 6 Compatible with die and cast material
        • 7 Dimensional stability
        • 8 Good elastic properties
        • 9 Easy manipulation
        • 10 Adequate setting characteristics
        • 11 High degree of reproduction details
        • 12 Adequate strength
        • 13 Should not release any gas
        • 14 Economical
        • 15 Should not be technique sensitive
        • 1 Based on rigidityelasticity -
        • a Rigid (non-elastic)
        • b Elastic
        • 2 Based on viscosity -
        • a Mucostatic
        • b Mucocompressive
        • c Pseudoplastic
          • 3 Based on setting of material -
            • 1 a chemical reaction
            • b Physical change of state
            • 2 a reversible
            • b Irreversible
            • 4Based on interaction with salivawater -
            • 1 Hydrophobic
            • 2 Hydrophilic
              • 5Based on chemistry-
                • 1 Impression Plaster
                • 2 Impression compound
                • 3 Metal oxide (zinc oxide eugenol)
                • 4 Reversible hydrocolloid
                • 5 Irreversible hydrocolloid
                • 6 Poly sulfides
                • 7 Condensation silicones
                • 8 Addition silicones
                • 9 Polyether
                • 10 Visible light curing polyether urethane dimethacrylate
                  • 6Based on use -
                    • 1 Primary impression materials
                    • 2 Secondary impression materials
                    • 3 Duplicating materials
                      • HYDROCOLLOIDS
                        • Colloids are often classified as fourth state of matter the Colloidal state In a solution of sugar in water the sugar molecules are uniformly dispersed in the water amp there is no visible physical separation between the solute amp the solvent molecules If sugar molecules replaced with large amp visible particles such as sand the system is Suspension or if molecules are liquid such vegetable oil then system is Emulsion
                        • True solution exists as a single phase However both the colloid amp the suspension have to phase- The dispersed amp Dispersion phase In the colloid the particles in the dispersed phase consist of molecules held together either by primary or secondary force The size of the particles range is 1 ndash 200nm
                          • Gels
                            • Colloids with a liquid as the dispersion medium can exist in two different forms known as Sol amp Gel
                            • A sol has the appearance amp many characteristic of a various liquid
                            • A gel on the contrary is a semi solid amp produced from a soldering process of gelation by the formation of fibrils or chains called Micelles
                            • Gelation is the conversion of a sol to gel amp the temperature at which this occurs is called Gelation Temperature
                              • Gelation may be brought about in one of these ways
                                • Lowering the temperature- It is done by reducing the thermal energy of effectively These forces are secondary molecular forces The bond between the fibrils is weak amp they break at slightly elevated temperature Gelation temp is 37-50degree centigrade
                                • Liquefaction temperature- It is considerable higher than gelation temp amp this property is known as Hysteresis This temp is between 70 -100 degree centigrade
                                • Chemical reaction- Gelation may also induced by chemical reaction where in the dispersed phase of soil is allowed to react with a substance to give a different type of dispersed phase The process is not reversed by an increased temperature
                                  • Types of Hydrocolloids
                                    • REVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS - Reversible hydrocolloids are those sol can be changed to gel but gel canrsquot be reversed back to the solution
                                    • Eg Alginate impression material
                                    • IRREVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS - Irreversible hydrocolloids are those materials where the change from the sol to gel can be brought by lowering the temp of the sol amp the gel can be converted back to sol condition by heating
                                    • Eg Agar ndash Agar
                                      • ALGINATE IRREVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOID
                                        • The word alginate comes from Algin amp named by a chemist of Scotland It was identified as a liner polymer with numerous carboxyl acid groups It is called as irreversible hydrocolloids because gelation is induced by chemical reaction amp transformation is not possible It is the most widely used dental materials
                                        • The principal factors responsible for the success of this type of impression materials are-
                                        • Easy to manipulate
                                        • Comfortable for the patients
                                        • Relatively inexpensive
                                        • Composition
                                        • Potassium or Sodium Alginate- 15 It is the chief active ingredient
                                        • Calcium Sulfate- 16 It is used as a reactor
                                        • Zinc Oxide amp Diatomaceous Earth- Zinc oxide ndash 4 amp Diatomaceous
                                        • earth 60
                                        • Potassium Titanium Fluoride - 3
                                        • Sodium Phosphate - 2
                                          • Gelation Process
                                            • The typical sol-gel reaction is a soluble alginate with calcium sulfate amp the formation of an insoluble calcium alginate gel Calcium sulfate reacts rapidly to produce the in soluble Ca alginate from the potassium or sodium alginate in a aqueous solution The production of calcium alginate is rapid that it does not allow sufficient working time Thus third water soluble salt such as a trisodium phosphate is added to the solution to prolong the working time Thus the reaction between the calcium sulfate amp the soluble alginate is prevented as long as there is uncreated trisodium phosphate
                                            • 2Na3Po4 +n CaSo4 rarrnKaSo4 +Ca alginate
                                            • When the supply of the trisodium phosphate is exhausted the ca ions begin to react with the potassium alginate to produce calcium alginate Kzn Alg +n CaSo4rarr n KaSo4 + Cal alginate
                                            • The added salt is retarder
                                            • Controlling of gelation time-
                                            • An increase in the temp of water used for mixing shorten the working amp setting time
                                            • The proportion of powder amp water also effect the setting time
                                              • PROPERTIES
                                                • Alginate is of two types
                                                • Type I - Fast setting
                                                • Type II - Normal setting
                                                • According to ADA Specification No 18 properties are-
                                                • 1 Mixing time- Creamy consistency come in 45 ndash 60 sec
                                                • 2 Working time-
                                                • - Fast setting material - 12 ndash 2 min
                                                • - Normal set material - 2 ndash 45 min
                                                • 3 Setting or gelation time-
                                                • - Optimum gelation time - 3-4 min at room temp
                                                • - For fast setting material - 1 -2 min
                                                • - For normal setting material - 2 ndash 45min
                                                • 4 Permanent deformation - ADA specification requires 97 recovery amp where 3 is permanent deformation Alginate has 988 recovery amp 15 permanent deformation
                                                • 5 Flexibility- ADA specification permits10 ndash 20 at the stress of 1000gm cm2 Hard material has value of 5-8
                                                • 6 Strength-
                                                • The compressive strength- 5000-8000gmcm2
                                                • Tear strength - 350-700gmcm2
                                                • 7Viscoelasticity Usually an alginate impression material does not adhere to the oral tissue as strongly as some of the non aqueous elastomers so it is easy to remove the alginate impression rapidly
                                                • 8Accuracy Most alginate is not capable of reproducing the finer details that are absorbed in impression with Agar amp other elastomeric impression material
                                                • 9 Dimensional effects - The gel may loss water by evaporation from its surface amp it shrinks
                                                • - If the gel placed in the water it absorbed water amp gel swells
                                                • - Thermal change also contributes to dimensional change The alginate shrinks slightly due to difference in temp between mouth temp(30c) amp room temp(23c)
                                                • 10 Biocompatibility -
                                                • No chemical or allergic reaction associated with alginate
                                                • 11 Shelf life -
                                                • Alginate impressions have shorter shelf life Strong temp amp moisture contamination are two factor which effect the self life of alginate
                                                  • MANIPULATION OF ALGINATE
                                                    • PREPARING THE MIX
                                                    • A measured powder is shifted into pre measured water that has been placed in a clean rubber bowl Care should be taken to avoid whipping air into the mix A vigorous figure 8 motion is best with the mix being swiped or stropped against the side of the mixing rubber bowl with intermittent rotation ie180 degree of the spatula to press out air bubbles The mixing time is 45sec -1 min
                                                    • A variety of mechanical devices are also available for mixing impression material There benefits are convenience speed amp elimination of human error
                                                    • MAKING THE IMPRESSION
                                                    • Before setting the impression the material should have developed sufficient body so that it doesnrsquot flow out of the try A perforated tray is generally used If plastic try or metal rim lock try is selected a thin layer of adhesive should be applied amp allowed to dry before mixing and loading the try The thickness of the alginate between the tray amp tissue should be at least 3mm
                                                    • ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES
                                                    • Advantages
                                                    • 1 Cannot be electroplated
                                                    • 2 Distortion occurs easily
                                                    • 3 Poor dimensional stability (poured within 15 min)
                                                    • 4 Poor tear strength
                                                    • AGAR ndash REVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS
                                                    • When agar hydrocolloids heated they liquefy or go into the sol state amp on cooling they return to the gel state Because this process can be repeated a gel of this type is described as Reversible hydrocolloid The preparation of the agar hydrocolloids for clinical use requires care full control amp yields accurate impression It has been largely replaced by alginate hydrocolloids amp rubber impression materials
                                                      • COMPOSITION
                                                        • Borates - 02 ndash 05 Its works as retarder
                                                        • water - 855 It is reaction medium
                                                        • Agar- 13-17 It is main active constituent of reversible hydrocolloid impression material
                                                        • Sulfates - 1 ndash 2 Accelerators
                                                        • Fillers - 05 -1 Diatomaceous earth silica wax rubber etc used as filler
                                                        • Bactericide - Thymol amp glycerin are used
                                                        • Color amp flavor
                                                          • GELATION PROCESS
                                                            • The setting of the reversible hydrocolloid is called gelation The reaction can be expressed a sol- gel reaction The physical changes from to gel does not return to the sol at the same temp at which it solidified The gel must be heated at the liquefaction temp ie 70 - 100c to form sol Sol transform into a gel at 37-50c the exact gelation temp depended on several factor including the molecular wt the purity of the material amp the ratio of agar to other ingredients
                                                            • The gelation is critical If the temp is high the heat from sol may injury to the soft tissue or if the surface of the sol transforms to a gel as soon as the sol may injure the oral tissues a high surface stress may develop If the gelation temp is too far below the oral temp it will be difficulty or even impossible to chill the material sufficiently to obtain a firm gel to adjacent to the oral tissue The temp lag between the gelation amp liquefaction temp of the gel makes it possible to use as a dental impression material
                                                              • PROPERTIES
                                                                • Gelation temperature -
                                                                • After tempering the sol should be homogenous and should set to a gel between 37 ndash 500c when cooled
                                                                • Viscoelastic properties -
                                                                • It demonstrates the necessity of deforming the impression rapidly when it removed from the mouth which reduces the amount of the permanent deformation The elastic recovery of the hydrocolloid is never complete amp it does not return entirely to its original dimension after deformation The amount of permanent deformation in clinical is negligible provided that -
                                                                • a) The material has adequately gelled
                                                                • b) The impression has been removed rapidly
                                                                • c) The under cuts present in the cavity preparation are minimal
                                                                • Permanent deformation -
                                                                • The ADA specification requires that the permanent deformation should be less than 15 after the material compressed 10 for 30sec This impression material readily meets this requirement with the value of about 1
                                                                • Distortion during gelation -
                                                                • If the material is held rigidly to the tray then the impression material shrinks toward the center of its mass Rapid cooling may cause a concentration of stress near the tray where gelation first takes place
                                                                • Flexibility -
                                                                • The ADA specification requirement for flexibility allows a range of 4-14 amp most agar materials meet this requirement
                                                                • Strength -
                                                                • The compressive strength of Agar impression material is 8000gmcm2
                                                                • The tear strength of Agar is 7000gmcm2
                                                                • Flow -
                                                                • Agar is sufficiently fluid to allow detailed reproduction of hard amp soft tissue
                                                                • Compatibility with gypsum -
                                                                • Not all the agar impression materials are equally compatible with all gypsum products The impression should be washed of saliva amp any trace of blood which retarded the setting of gypsum
                                                                  • Manipulation of agar impression
                                                                    • The use of agar hydrocolloid involves special equipment called conditioning unit for agar The hydrocolloid is usually supplied In two forms syringe and tray materials The only difference between the materials is the color and the greater fluidity of the syringe material
                                                                      • Impression tray
                                                                        • It is rim locked trays with water circulating device This types of trays should allow a space of 3mm occlusally and laterally and extend distally to cover all the teeth After the tray has been properly positioned water is circulated at 13 degrees through the tray until gelation occurs
                                                                          • Preparation of material
                                                                            • Proper equipment of liquefying and storing the agar impression material is essential
                                                                            • At first reverse the hydrocolloid gel to the sol stage Boiling water is a convenient way of liquefying the material The material must be held at this temperature for a minimum of 10mins Propylene glycol can be added to the water to obtain 100 degrees After it has been liquefied the material must be stored in the tray The material can be stored for several days Usually there are three compartments in the conditioning unit making it possible to liquefy store and temper the material
                                                                              • Conditioning and tempering
                                                                                • Because 55 degree is the maximum tolerable temperature the storage temperature of 65 degrees would be too hot for the oral tissues especially given the bulk of the tray material Therefore the material that is used to fill the tray must be cooled and tempered Eliminating the effect of imbibition is the purpose of placing the gauze pad over the tempering tray materials When the tray material is placed into the tempering bath the gauze is removed and the contaminating surface layer of material clings to the gauze and is removed as well
                                                                                  • Making the impression
                                                                                    • The syringe material is taken directly from the storage compartment and applied to the prepared cavities It is first applied to the base of the preparation and then the reminder of the tooth is covered By the time the cavity preparation and adjoining teeth have been covered the tray material has been properly tempered and is now ready to be placed immediately in the mouth to form the bulk of impression Gelation is accelerated by circulating cool water approximately 18 ndash 21 degrees through the tray for 3 ndash 5 minutes
                                                                                      • Disinfection of hydrocolloid impression
                                                                                        • As the hydrocolloid impression material must be poured within short time after removal from the mouth The disinfection procedure should be relatively rapid to prevent the dimensional change Most manufacturers recommended a specific disinfectant The agent may be iodophor bleach or gluteraldehyde The distortion is minimal if the recommended immersion time is followed and if the impression is poured properly The irreversible hydrocolloid may be disinfected by 10 minute immersion inor spraying with the antimicrobial agent such as NaOCl and glutaraldehyde without sufficient dimensional change The current protocol for disinfecting hydrocolloid impression is to use household bleach iodophor and synthetic phenols as disinfectants After the immersion it is thoroughly rinsed The disinfectant is sprayed liberally o the exposed surface The immersion should not be submerged or soaked in the disinfectant solution
                                                                                          • ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES
                                                                                          • TYPES OF FAILURES
                                                                                            • 1 Distortion- due to
                                                                                            • Delayed pouring of impression
                                                                                            • Movement of tray during setting
                                                                                            • Removal from mouth too early
                                                                                            • 2 Grainy impression- due to
                                                                                            • Inadequate mixing
                                                                                            • Prolonged mixing
                                                                                            • Less water in mix
                                                                                            • 3 Tearing - due to
                                                                                            • Inadequate bulk
                                                                                            • Moisture contamination
                                                                                            • Removal from mouth too early
                                                                                            • Prolonged mixing
                                                                                            • 4 Bubbles- due to
                                                                                            • Early gelation preventing flow
                                                                                            • Air incorporated during mixing
                                                                                            • 5 Irregular voids- due to
                                                                                            • Excess moisture ampdebris on
                                                                                              • 1 Anusavice ldquoSkinners science of dental materialsrdquo Tenth Edition
Page 5: Hydroco Llo Ids / orthodontic courses by Indian dental academy

Hydrocolloids

6Based on use -

1 Primary impression materials

2 Secondary impression materials

3 Duplicating materials

HYDROCOLLOIDS

Colloids are often classified as fourth state of matter the Colloidal state In a solution

of sugar in water the sugar molecules are uniformly dispersed in the water amp there is

no visible physical separation between the solute amp the solvent molecules If sugar

molecules replaced with large amp visible particles such as sand the system is

Suspension or if molecules are liquid such vegetable oil then system is Emulsion

True solution exists as a single phase However both the colloid amp the suspension

have to phase- The dispersed amp Dispersion phase In the colloid the particles in the

dispersed phase consist of molecules held together either by primary or secondary

force The size of the particles range is 1 ndash 200nm

Gels

Colloids with a liquid as the dispersion medium can exist in two different forms

known as Sol amp Gel

A sol has the appearance amp many characteristic of a various liquid

A gel on the contrary is a semi solid amp produced from a soldering process of gelation

by the formation of fibrils or chains called Micelles

Gelation is the conversion of a sol to gel amp the temperature at which this occurs is

called Gelation Temperature

Gelation may be brought about in one of these ways

Page 5

Hydrocolloids

Lowering the temperature- It is done by reducing the thermal energy of effectively

These forces are secondary molecular forces The bond between the fibrils is weak amp they

break at slightly elevated temperature Gelation temp is 37-50degree centigrade

Liquefaction temperature- It is considerable higher than gelation temp amp this

property is known as Hysteresis This temp is between 70 -100 degree centigrade

Chemical reaction- Gelation may also induced by chemical reaction where in the

dispersed phase of soil is allowed to react with a substance to give a different type of

dispersed phase The process is not reversed by an increased temperature

Types of Hydrocolloids

REVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS - Reversible hydrocolloids are those sol can be

changed to gel but gel canrsquot be reversed back to the solution

Eg Alginate impression material

IRREVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS - Irreversible hydrocolloids are those materials

where the change from the sol to gel can be brought by lowering the temp of the sol amp the

gel can be converted back to sol condition by heating

Eg Agar ndash Agar

ALGINATE IRREVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOID

bull The word alginate comes from Algin amp named by a chemist of Scotland It was identified

as a liner polymer with numerous carboxyl acid groups It is called as irreversible

hydrocolloids because gelation is induced by chemical reaction amp transformation is not

possible It is the most widely used dental materials

bull The principal factors responsible for the success of this type of impression materials are-

bull Easy to manipulate

bull Comfortable for the patients

bull Relatively inexpensive

Page 6

Hydrocolloids

Composition

Potassium or Sodium Alginate- 15 It is the chief active ingredient

Calcium Sulfate- 16 It is used as a reactor

Zinc Oxide amp Diatomaceous Earth- Zinc oxide ndash 4 amp Diatomaceous

earth 60

Potassium Titanium Fluoride - 3

Sodium Phosphate - 2

Gelation Process

The typical sol-gel reaction is a soluble alginate with calcium sulfate amp the formation

of an insoluble calcium alginate gel Calcium sulfate reacts rapidly to produce the in soluble

Ca alginate from the potassium or sodium alginate in a aqueous solution The production of

calcium alginate is rapid that it does not allow sufficient working time Thus third water

soluble salt such as a trisodium phosphate is added to the solution to prolong the working

time Thus the reaction between the calcium sulfate amp the soluble alginate is prevented as

long as there is uncreated trisodium phosphate

2Na3Po4 +n CaSo4 rarrnKaSo4 +Ca alginate

When the supply of the trisodium phosphate is exhausted the ca ions begin to react

with the potassium alginate to produce calcium alginate

Kzn Alg +n CaSo4rarr n KaSo4 + Cal alginate

The added salt is retarder

Controlling of gelation time-

An increase in the temp of water used for mixing shorten the working amp setting

time

The proportion of powder amp water also effect the setting time

PROPERTIES

Page 7

Hydrocolloids

Alginate is of two types

Type I - Fast setting

Type II - Normal setting

According to ADA Specification No 18 properties are-

1 Mixing time- Creamy consistency come in 45 ndash 60 sec

2 Working time-

- Fast setting material - 12 ndash 2 min

- Normal set material - 2 ndash 45 min

3 Setting or gelation time-

- Optimum gelation time - 3-4 min at room temp

- For fast setting material - 1 -2 min

- For normal setting material - 2 ndash 45min

4 Permanent deformation - ADA specification requires 97 recovery amp where 3 is

permanent deformation Alginate has 988 recovery amp 15 permanent deformation

5 Flexibility- ADA specification permits10 ndash 20 at the stress of 1000gm cm2 Hard

material has value of 5-8

6 Strength-

The compressive strength- 5000-8000gmcm2

Tear strength - 350-700gmcm2

7Viscoelasticity

Usually an alginate impression material does not adhere to the oral tissue as strongly as some

of the non aqueous elastomers so it is easy to remove the alginate impression rapidly

8Accuracy Most

alginate is not capable of reproducing the finer details that are absorbed in impression with

Agar amp other elastomeric impression material

9 Dimensional effects - The gel may loss water by evaporation from its surface amp it shrinks

- If the gel placed in the water it absorbed water amp gel swells

- Thermal change also contributes to dimensional change The alginate shrinks slightly due to

difference in temp between mouth temp(30c) amp room temp(23c)

10 Biocompatibility -

Page 8

Hydrocolloids

No chemical or allergic reaction associated with alginate

11 Shelf life -

Alginate impressions have shorter shelf life Strong temp amp moisture contamination are two

factor which effect the self life of alginate

MANIPULATION OF ALGINATE

PREPARING THE MIX

A measured powder is shifted into pre measured water that has been placed in a clean

rubber bowl Care should be taken to avoid whipping air into the mix A vigorous figure 8

motion is best with the mix being swiped or stropped against the side of the mixing rubber

bowl with intermittent rotation ie180 degree of the spatula to press out air bubbles The

mixing time is 45sec -1 min

A variety of mechanical devices are also available for mixing impression material

There benefits are convenience speed amp elimination of human error

MAKING THE IMPRESSION

Before setting the impression the material should have developed sufficient body so

that it doesnrsquot flow out of the try A perforated tray is generally used If plastic try or metal

rim lock try is selected a thin layer of adhesive should be applied amp allowed to dry before

mixing and loading the try The thickness of the alginate between the tray amp tissue should

be at least 3mm

Recent developments

1 Dust-free alginates

Inhaling fine airborne particles from alginate impression material can cause

silicosis and pulmonary hypersensitivity

Page 9

Hydrocolloids

Dustless alginates were introduced which give off or no dust particles so avoiding

dust inhalation This can be achieved by coating the material with glycerine or

glycol This causes the powder to become more denser than in uncoated state

2 Siliconised alginates

It is a two component system in the form of two pastes one containing the

alginate sol and the second containing the calcium reactor

The components incorporate a silicone polymer component which makes material

tear resistant compared to unmodified alginates However the dimensional

stability is reported to be poor

3 Low dust alginate impression material

Introduced by Schunichi Nobutakwatanate in 1997

This composition comprises an alginate a gelation regulator and a filler as major

components which further comprises sepiolite and a tetraflouroethylene resin

having a true specific gravity of from 2-3

The material generates less dust has a mean particle size of 1-40microns

4 Antiseptic alginate impression material

Introduced by Tameyuki Yamamoto Maso Abinu patented in 1990

An antiseptic containing alginate impression material contains 001 to 7 parts by weight

of an antiseptic such as glutaraldehyde and chlohexidine gluconate per 100 parts by

weight of a cured product of an alginate impression material

The antiseptic may be encapsulated in a microcapsule or clathrated in a cyclodextrin

5 CAVEX Color change

Page 10

Hydrocolloids

The alginate impression material with color indications avoiding confusion about setting

time

Color changes are visualizing the major decision points in impression making

end of mixing time

end of setting time ( tray can be removed from mouth)

it indicates two color changes

Violet to pink indicates the end of mixing time

Pink to white indicates end of setting time

Other advantages of this material are

-improved dimensional stability (upto 5 days)

Good tear and deformation resistance

Dust free

Smooth surface optimum gypsum compatibility

ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES

Advantages

1 Easy to mix and manipulate

2 Minimum requirement of equipment

3 Accuracy (if properly handled)

4 Low cost

5 Comfortable to the patient

6 Hygienic (as fresh material is used for each impression)

Disadvantages

1 Cannot be electroplated

2 Distortion occurs easily

3 Poor dimensional stability (poured within 15 min)

4 Poor tear strength

AGAR ndash REVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS

Page 11

Hydrocolloids

When agar hydrocolloids heated they liquefy or go into the sol state amp on cooling they

return to the gel state Because this process can be repeated a gel of this type is

described as Reversible hydrocolloid The preparation of the agar hydrocolloids for

clinical use requires care full control amp yields accurate impression It has been largely

replaced by alginate hydrocolloids amp rubber impression materials

COMPOSITION

Borates - 02 ndash 05 Its works as retarder

water - 855 It is reaction medium

Agar- 13-17 It is main active constituent of reversible

hydrocolloid impression material

Sulfates - 1 ndash 2 Accelerators

Fillers - 05 -1 Diatomaceous earth silica wax rubber etc

used as filler

Bactericide - Thymol amp glycerin are used

Color amp flavor

GELATION PROCESS

The setting of the reversible hydrocolloid is called gelation The reaction can be

expressed a sol- gel reaction The physical changes from to gel does not return to the sol at

the same temp at which it solidified The gel must be heated at the liquefaction temp ie 70 -

100c to form sol Sol transform into a gel at 37-50c the exact gelation temp depended on

several factor including the molecular wt the purity of the material amp the ratio of agar to

other ingredients

The gelation is critical If the temp is high the heat from sol may injury to the soft

tissue or if the surface of the sol transforms to a gel as soon as the sol may injure the oral

tissues a high surface stress may develop If the gelation temp is too far below the oral

temp it will be difficulty or even impossible to chill the material sufficiently to obtain a firm

Page 12

Hydrocolloids

gel to adjacent to the oral tissue The temp lag between the gelation amp liquefaction temp of

the gel makes it possible to use as a dental impression material

PROPERTIES

Gelation temperature -

After tempering the sol should be homogenous and should set to a gel between 37

ndash 500c when cooled

Viscoelastic properties -

It demonstrates the necessity of deforming the impression rapidly when it removed

from the mouth which reduces the amount of the permanent deformation The elastic

recovery of the hydrocolloid is never complete amp it does not return entirely to its original

dimension after deformation The amount of permanent deformation in clinical is

negligible provided that -

a) The material has adequately gelled

b) The impression has been removed rapidly

c) The under cuts present in the cavity preparation are minimal

Permanent deformation -

The ADA specification requires that the permanent deformation should be less than

15 after the material compressed 10 for 30sec This impression material readily meets

this requirement with the value of about 1

Distortion during gelation -

If the material is held rigidly to the tray then the impression material shrinks

toward the center of its mass Rapid cooling may cause a concentration of stress near the

tray where gelation first takes place

Flexibility -

The ADA specification requirement for flexibility allows a range of 4-14 amp most

agar materials meet this requirement

Strength -

The compressive strength of Agar impression material is 8000gmcm2

The tear strength of Agar is 7000gmcm2

Page 13

Hydrocolloids

Flow -

Agar is sufficiently fluid to allow detailed reproduction of hard amp soft tissue

Compatibility with gypsum -

Not all the agar impression materials are equally compatible with all gypsum

products The impression should be washed of saliva amp any trace of blood which

retarded the setting of gypsum

Manipulation of agar impression

The use of agar hydrocolloid involves special equipment called conditioning

unit for agar The hydrocolloid is usually supplied In two forms syringe and tray

materials The only difference between the materials is the color and the greater fluidity of

the syringe material

Impression tray

It is rim locked trays with water circulating device This types of trays should

allow a space of 3mm occlusally and laterally and extend distally to cover all the teeth

After the tray has been properly positioned water is circulated at 13 degrees through the

tray until gelation occurs

Preparation of material

Proper equipment of liquefying and storing the agar impression material is essential

At first reverse the hydrocolloid gel to the sol stage Boiling water is a convenient

way of liquefying the material The material must be held at this temperature for a

minimum of 10mins Propylene glycol can be added to the water to obtain 100 degrees

After it has been liquefied the material must be stored in the tray The material can be

stored for several days Usually there are three compartments in the conditioning unit

making it possible to liquefy store and temper the material

Page 14

Hydrocolloids

Conditioning and tempering

Because 55 degree is the maximum tolerable temperature the storage temperature

of 65 degrees would be too hot for the oral tissues especially given the bulk of the tray

material Therefore the material that is used to fill the tray must be cooled and tempered

Eliminating the effect of imbibition is the purpose of placing the gauze pad over the

tempering tray materials When the tray material is placed into the tempering bath the

gauze is removed and the contaminating surface layer of material clings to the gauze and is

removed as well

Making the impression

The syringe material is taken directly from the storage compartment and applied to

the prepared cavities It is first applied to the base of the preparation and then the reminder

of the tooth is covered By the time the cavity preparation and adjoining teeth have been

covered the tray material has been properly tempered and is now ready to be placed

immediately in the mouth to form the bulk of impression Gelation is accelerated by

circulating cool water approximately 18 ndash 21 degrees through the tray for 3 ndash 5 minutes

Disinfection of hydrocolloid impression

As the hydrocolloid impression material must be poured within short time after

removal from the mouth The disinfection procedure should be relatively rapid to prevent

the dimensional change Most manufacturers recommended a specific disinfectant The

agent may be iodophor bleach or gluteraldehyde The distortion is minimal if the

recommended immersion time is followed and if the impression is poured properly The

irreversible hydrocolloid may be disinfected by 10 minute immersion inor spraying with

the antimicrobial agent such as NaOCl and glutaraldehyde without sufficient dimensional

change The current protocol for disinfecting hydrocolloid impression is to use household

bleach iodophor and synthetic phenols as disinfectants After the immersion it is

thoroughly rinsed The disinfectant is sprayed liberally o the exposed surface The

immersion should not be submerged or soaked in the disinfectant solution

Page 15

Hydrocolloids

Recent techniques

Laminate technique

A recent modification of the conventional procedure is the combined agar alginate

technique The hydrocolloid in the tray is replaced with a mix of chilled alginate

that bonds with the agar expressed from a syringe

The alginate gels by a chemical reaction whereas the agar gels by means of

contact with cool alginate rather than with the water circulating through the tray

Since the agar not the alginate is in contact with the prepared teeth maximum

detail is reproduced

Advantages

syringe agar records tissues more accurately

Water cooled tray is not required

Sets faster

Disadvantages

Agar ndash alginate bond failure can occur

Viscous alginate may displace agar

Technique sensitive

Wet field technique

This is a recent technique

The oral tissues are flooded with warm water The syringe material is then

injected in to the surface to be recorded

Before syringe material gels tray material is seated

Page 16

Hydrocolloids

The hydraulic pressure of the viscous tray material forces the fluid syringe

material down in to the areas to be recorded

The motion displaces the syringe material as well as blood and debris through out

the sulcus

ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES

Advantages

1 Hydrophilic Impression material

2 Good elastic properties Good recovery from distortion

3 Can be re-used as a duplicating material

4 Long working time and low material cost

5 No mixing technique

6 High accuracy and fine detail recording

Disadvantages

1 Only one model can be used

2 Extensive and expensive equipment required

3 It can not be electroplated

4 Impossible to sterilize for reuse

5 Low dimensional stability amp tear resistance

TYPES OF FAILURES

1 Distortion- due to

Delayed pouring of impression

Movement of tray during setting

Removal from mouth too early

2 Grainy impression- due to

Inadequate mixing

Page 17

Hydrocolloids

Prolonged mixing

Less water in mix

3 Tearing - due to

Inadequate bulk

Moisture contamination

Removal from mouth too early

Prolonged mixing

4 Bubbles- due to

Early gelation preventing flow

Air incorporated during mixing

5 Irregular voids- due to

Excess moisture ampdebris on

REFERENCES

1 Anusavice ldquoSkinners science of dental materialsrdquo Tenth Edition

2 Dental materials and their selection-willian jorsquo brien

3 Restorative dental materials-craig

4 Removable prosthodintics- stewart

Page 18

  • Constructing a model or cast is an important step in numerous dental procedures Various types of cast amp models can be made from gypsum products using an impression mold or negative likeness of a dental structure An impression is a negative replica of the tissue of the oral cavity It is used to register or reproduce the form and relation of the teeth amp surrounding tissue
  • HISTORY
    • 1558 - Celline described a wax model to make impression in his book MEMORIES
    • 1700 - Matheus G Purenam suggested that wax models can be used in prosthetic work
    • 1728 ndash Pierre Fauchard described various impression materials in his book LE CHIRURGEEN DENTISTE
    • 1756 ndash Persian Phillip Pfaff first used plaster models prepared from sectional wax impression of the mouth
    • 1810 ndash R C Skinner describe about many materials and techniques in his first American book
    • 1928 ndash ADA developed specification No 19 for impression material
    • 1930 ndash Zinc Oxide Eugenol a rigid impression was introduced
    • 1930 ndash Polysulfide was first used as a commercial synthetic rubber as a copolymer of Ethylene Chloride amp sodium
    • 1937 ndash Agar was introduced by Sears
    • 1949 ndash Alginate was developed during World war II
    • 1950 ndash Polysulfide was used in dentistry
    • 1955 ndash Condensation Silicone was introduced in Germany
    • 1975 ndash Addition Silicone was introduced
    • 1977 ndash Costell introduced Dual tray technique
    • 1980 ndash A Visible light cure Polyether Urethane Dimethacrylate rubber impression material was introduced
    • 1996 ndash Blare amp Wassed considered a no of solution used to disinfecting impression material
      • IDEAL REQUIREMENTS OF IMPRESSION MATERIAL
        • 1 Pleasant taste amp odor
        • 2 Not contain any toxic amp irritating ingredients
        • 3 Adequate shelf life
        • 4 Satisfactory consistency and texture
        • 5 Easy to disinfect with out loss of accuracy
        • 6 Compatible with die and cast material
        • 7 Dimensional stability
        • 8 Good elastic properties
        • 9 Easy manipulation
        • 10 Adequate setting characteristics
        • 11 High degree of reproduction details
        • 12 Adequate strength
        • 13 Should not release any gas
        • 14 Economical
        • 15 Should not be technique sensitive
        • 1 Based on rigidityelasticity -
        • a Rigid (non-elastic)
        • b Elastic
        • 2 Based on viscosity -
        • a Mucostatic
        • b Mucocompressive
        • c Pseudoplastic
          • 3 Based on setting of material -
            • 1 a chemical reaction
            • b Physical change of state
            • 2 a reversible
            • b Irreversible
            • 4Based on interaction with salivawater -
            • 1 Hydrophobic
            • 2 Hydrophilic
              • 5Based on chemistry-
                • 1 Impression Plaster
                • 2 Impression compound
                • 3 Metal oxide (zinc oxide eugenol)
                • 4 Reversible hydrocolloid
                • 5 Irreversible hydrocolloid
                • 6 Poly sulfides
                • 7 Condensation silicones
                • 8 Addition silicones
                • 9 Polyether
                • 10 Visible light curing polyether urethane dimethacrylate
                  • 6Based on use -
                    • 1 Primary impression materials
                    • 2 Secondary impression materials
                    • 3 Duplicating materials
                      • HYDROCOLLOIDS
                        • Colloids are often classified as fourth state of matter the Colloidal state In a solution of sugar in water the sugar molecules are uniformly dispersed in the water amp there is no visible physical separation between the solute amp the solvent molecules If sugar molecules replaced with large amp visible particles such as sand the system is Suspension or if molecules are liquid such vegetable oil then system is Emulsion
                        • True solution exists as a single phase However both the colloid amp the suspension have to phase- The dispersed amp Dispersion phase In the colloid the particles in the dispersed phase consist of molecules held together either by primary or secondary force The size of the particles range is 1 ndash 200nm
                          • Gels
                            • Colloids with a liquid as the dispersion medium can exist in two different forms known as Sol amp Gel
                            • A sol has the appearance amp many characteristic of a various liquid
                            • A gel on the contrary is a semi solid amp produced from a soldering process of gelation by the formation of fibrils or chains called Micelles
                            • Gelation is the conversion of a sol to gel amp the temperature at which this occurs is called Gelation Temperature
                              • Gelation may be brought about in one of these ways
                                • Lowering the temperature- It is done by reducing the thermal energy of effectively These forces are secondary molecular forces The bond between the fibrils is weak amp they break at slightly elevated temperature Gelation temp is 37-50degree centigrade
                                • Liquefaction temperature- It is considerable higher than gelation temp amp this property is known as Hysteresis This temp is between 70 -100 degree centigrade
                                • Chemical reaction- Gelation may also induced by chemical reaction where in the dispersed phase of soil is allowed to react with a substance to give a different type of dispersed phase The process is not reversed by an increased temperature
                                  • Types of Hydrocolloids
                                    • REVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS - Reversible hydrocolloids are those sol can be changed to gel but gel canrsquot be reversed back to the solution
                                    • Eg Alginate impression material
                                    • IRREVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS - Irreversible hydrocolloids are those materials where the change from the sol to gel can be brought by lowering the temp of the sol amp the gel can be converted back to sol condition by heating
                                    • Eg Agar ndash Agar
                                      • ALGINATE IRREVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOID
                                        • The word alginate comes from Algin amp named by a chemist of Scotland It was identified as a liner polymer with numerous carboxyl acid groups It is called as irreversible hydrocolloids because gelation is induced by chemical reaction amp transformation is not possible It is the most widely used dental materials
                                        • The principal factors responsible for the success of this type of impression materials are-
                                        • Easy to manipulate
                                        • Comfortable for the patients
                                        • Relatively inexpensive
                                        • Composition
                                        • Potassium or Sodium Alginate- 15 It is the chief active ingredient
                                        • Calcium Sulfate- 16 It is used as a reactor
                                        • Zinc Oxide amp Diatomaceous Earth- Zinc oxide ndash 4 amp Diatomaceous
                                        • earth 60
                                        • Potassium Titanium Fluoride - 3
                                        • Sodium Phosphate - 2
                                          • Gelation Process
                                            • The typical sol-gel reaction is a soluble alginate with calcium sulfate amp the formation of an insoluble calcium alginate gel Calcium sulfate reacts rapidly to produce the in soluble Ca alginate from the potassium or sodium alginate in a aqueous solution The production of calcium alginate is rapid that it does not allow sufficient working time Thus third water soluble salt such as a trisodium phosphate is added to the solution to prolong the working time Thus the reaction between the calcium sulfate amp the soluble alginate is prevented as long as there is uncreated trisodium phosphate
                                            • 2Na3Po4 +n CaSo4 rarrnKaSo4 +Ca alginate
                                            • When the supply of the trisodium phosphate is exhausted the ca ions begin to react with the potassium alginate to produce calcium alginate Kzn Alg +n CaSo4rarr n KaSo4 + Cal alginate
                                            • The added salt is retarder
                                            • Controlling of gelation time-
                                            • An increase in the temp of water used for mixing shorten the working amp setting time
                                            • The proportion of powder amp water also effect the setting time
                                              • PROPERTIES
                                                • Alginate is of two types
                                                • Type I - Fast setting
                                                • Type II - Normal setting
                                                • According to ADA Specification No 18 properties are-
                                                • 1 Mixing time- Creamy consistency come in 45 ndash 60 sec
                                                • 2 Working time-
                                                • - Fast setting material - 12 ndash 2 min
                                                • - Normal set material - 2 ndash 45 min
                                                • 3 Setting or gelation time-
                                                • - Optimum gelation time - 3-4 min at room temp
                                                • - For fast setting material - 1 -2 min
                                                • - For normal setting material - 2 ndash 45min
                                                • 4 Permanent deformation - ADA specification requires 97 recovery amp where 3 is permanent deformation Alginate has 988 recovery amp 15 permanent deformation
                                                • 5 Flexibility- ADA specification permits10 ndash 20 at the stress of 1000gm cm2 Hard material has value of 5-8
                                                • 6 Strength-
                                                • The compressive strength- 5000-8000gmcm2
                                                • Tear strength - 350-700gmcm2
                                                • 7Viscoelasticity Usually an alginate impression material does not adhere to the oral tissue as strongly as some of the non aqueous elastomers so it is easy to remove the alginate impression rapidly
                                                • 8Accuracy Most alginate is not capable of reproducing the finer details that are absorbed in impression with Agar amp other elastomeric impression material
                                                • 9 Dimensional effects - The gel may loss water by evaporation from its surface amp it shrinks
                                                • - If the gel placed in the water it absorbed water amp gel swells
                                                • - Thermal change also contributes to dimensional change The alginate shrinks slightly due to difference in temp between mouth temp(30c) amp room temp(23c)
                                                • 10 Biocompatibility -
                                                • No chemical or allergic reaction associated with alginate
                                                • 11 Shelf life -
                                                • Alginate impressions have shorter shelf life Strong temp amp moisture contamination are two factor which effect the self life of alginate
                                                  • MANIPULATION OF ALGINATE
                                                    • PREPARING THE MIX
                                                    • A measured powder is shifted into pre measured water that has been placed in a clean rubber bowl Care should be taken to avoid whipping air into the mix A vigorous figure 8 motion is best with the mix being swiped or stropped against the side of the mixing rubber bowl with intermittent rotation ie180 degree of the spatula to press out air bubbles The mixing time is 45sec -1 min
                                                    • A variety of mechanical devices are also available for mixing impression material There benefits are convenience speed amp elimination of human error
                                                    • MAKING THE IMPRESSION
                                                    • Before setting the impression the material should have developed sufficient body so that it doesnrsquot flow out of the try A perforated tray is generally used If plastic try or metal rim lock try is selected a thin layer of adhesive should be applied amp allowed to dry before mixing and loading the try The thickness of the alginate between the tray amp tissue should be at least 3mm
                                                    • ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES
                                                    • Advantages
                                                    • 1 Cannot be electroplated
                                                    • 2 Distortion occurs easily
                                                    • 3 Poor dimensional stability (poured within 15 min)
                                                    • 4 Poor tear strength
                                                    • AGAR ndash REVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS
                                                    • When agar hydrocolloids heated they liquefy or go into the sol state amp on cooling they return to the gel state Because this process can be repeated a gel of this type is described as Reversible hydrocolloid The preparation of the agar hydrocolloids for clinical use requires care full control amp yields accurate impression It has been largely replaced by alginate hydrocolloids amp rubber impression materials
                                                      • COMPOSITION
                                                        • Borates - 02 ndash 05 Its works as retarder
                                                        • water - 855 It is reaction medium
                                                        • Agar- 13-17 It is main active constituent of reversible hydrocolloid impression material
                                                        • Sulfates - 1 ndash 2 Accelerators
                                                        • Fillers - 05 -1 Diatomaceous earth silica wax rubber etc used as filler
                                                        • Bactericide - Thymol amp glycerin are used
                                                        • Color amp flavor
                                                          • GELATION PROCESS
                                                            • The setting of the reversible hydrocolloid is called gelation The reaction can be expressed a sol- gel reaction The physical changes from to gel does not return to the sol at the same temp at which it solidified The gel must be heated at the liquefaction temp ie 70 - 100c to form sol Sol transform into a gel at 37-50c the exact gelation temp depended on several factor including the molecular wt the purity of the material amp the ratio of agar to other ingredients
                                                            • The gelation is critical If the temp is high the heat from sol may injury to the soft tissue or if the surface of the sol transforms to a gel as soon as the sol may injure the oral tissues a high surface stress may develop If the gelation temp is too far below the oral temp it will be difficulty or even impossible to chill the material sufficiently to obtain a firm gel to adjacent to the oral tissue The temp lag between the gelation amp liquefaction temp of the gel makes it possible to use as a dental impression material
                                                              • PROPERTIES
                                                                • Gelation temperature -
                                                                • After tempering the sol should be homogenous and should set to a gel between 37 ndash 500c when cooled
                                                                • Viscoelastic properties -
                                                                • It demonstrates the necessity of deforming the impression rapidly when it removed from the mouth which reduces the amount of the permanent deformation The elastic recovery of the hydrocolloid is never complete amp it does not return entirely to its original dimension after deformation The amount of permanent deformation in clinical is negligible provided that -
                                                                • a) The material has adequately gelled
                                                                • b) The impression has been removed rapidly
                                                                • c) The under cuts present in the cavity preparation are minimal
                                                                • Permanent deformation -
                                                                • The ADA specification requires that the permanent deformation should be less than 15 after the material compressed 10 for 30sec This impression material readily meets this requirement with the value of about 1
                                                                • Distortion during gelation -
                                                                • If the material is held rigidly to the tray then the impression material shrinks toward the center of its mass Rapid cooling may cause a concentration of stress near the tray where gelation first takes place
                                                                • Flexibility -
                                                                • The ADA specification requirement for flexibility allows a range of 4-14 amp most agar materials meet this requirement
                                                                • Strength -
                                                                • The compressive strength of Agar impression material is 8000gmcm2
                                                                • The tear strength of Agar is 7000gmcm2
                                                                • Flow -
                                                                • Agar is sufficiently fluid to allow detailed reproduction of hard amp soft tissue
                                                                • Compatibility with gypsum -
                                                                • Not all the agar impression materials are equally compatible with all gypsum products The impression should be washed of saliva amp any trace of blood which retarded the setting of gypsum
                                                                  • Manipulation of agar impression
                                                                    • The use of agar hydrocolloid involves special equipment called conditioning unit for agar The hydrocolloid is usually supplied In two forms syringe and tray materials The only difference between the materials is the color and the greater fluidity of the syringe material
                                                                      • Impression tray
                                                                        • It is rim locked trays with water circulating device This types of trays should allow a space of 3mm occlusally and laterally and extend distally to cover all the teeth After the tray has been properly positioned water is circulated at 13 degrees through the tray until gelation occurs
                                                                          • Preparation of material
                                                                            • Proper equipment of liquefying and storing the agar impression material is essential
                                                                            • At first reverse the hydrocolloid gel to the sol stage Boiling water is a convenient way of liquefying the material The material must be held at this temperature for a minimum of 10mins Propylene glycol can be added to the water to obtain 100 degrees After it has been liquefied the material must be stored in the tray The material can be stored for several days Usually there are three compartments in the conditioning unit making it possible to liquefy store and temper the material
                                                                              • Conditioning and tempering
                                                                                • Because 55 degree is the maximum tolerable temperature the storage temperature of 65 degrees would be too hot for the oral tissues especially given the bulk of the tray material Therefore the material that is used to fill the tray must be cooled and tempered Eliminating the effect of imbibition is the purpose of placing the gauze pad over the tempering tray materials When the tray material is placed into the tempering bath the gauze is removed and the contaminating surface layer of material clings to the gauze and is removed as well
                                                                                  • Making the impression
                                                                                    • The syringe material is taken directly from the storage compartment and applied to the prepared cavities It is first applied to the base of the preparation and then the reminder of the tooth is covered By the time the cavity preparation and adjoining teeth have been covered the tray material has been properly tempered and is now ready to be placed immediately in the mouth to form the bulk of impression Gelation is accelerated by circulating cool water approximately 18 ndash 21 degrees through the tray for 3 ndash 5 minutes
                                                                                      • Disinfection of hydrocolloid impression
                                                                                        • As the hydrocolloid impression material must be poured within short time after removal from the mouth The disinfection procedure should be relatively rapid to prevent the dimensional change Most manufacturers recommended a specific disinfectant The agent may be iodophor bleach or gluteraldehyde The distortion is minimal if the recommended immersion time is followed and if the impression is poured properly The irreversible hydrocolloid may be disinfected by 10 minute immersion inor spraying with the antimicrobial agent such as NaOCl and glutaraldehyde without sufficient dimensional change The current protocol for disinfecting hydrocolloid impression is to use household bleach iodophor and synthetic phenols as disinfectants After the immersion it is thoroughly rinsed The disinfectant is sprayed liberally o the exposed surface The immersion should not be submerged or soaked in the disinfectant solution
                                                                                          • ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES
                                                                                          • TYPES OF FAILURES
                                                                                            • 1 Distortion- due to
                                                                                            • Delayed pouring of impression
                                                                                            • Movement of tray during setting
                                                                                            • Removal from mouth too early
                                                                                            • 2 Grainy impression- due to
                                                                                            • Inadequate mixing
                                                                                            • Prolonged mixing
                                                                                            • Less water in mix
                                                                                            • 3 Tearing - due to
                                                                                            • Inadequate bulk
                                                                                            • Moisture contamination
                                                                                            • Removal from mouth too early
                                                                                            • Prolonged mixing
                                                                                            • 4 Bubbles- due to
                                                                                            • Early gelation preventing flow
                                                                                            • Air incorporated during mixing
                                                                                            • 5 Irregular voids- due to
                                                                                            • Excess moisture ampdebris on
                                                                                              • 1 Anusavice ldquoSkinners science of dental materialsrdquo Tenth Edition
Page 6: Hydroco Llo Ids / orthodontic courses by Indian dental academy

Hydrocolloids

Lowering the temperature- It is done by reducing the thermal energy of effectively

These forces are secondary molecular forces The bond between the fibrils is weak amp they

break at slightly elevated temperature Gelation temp is 37-50degree centigrade

Liquefaction temperature- It is considerable higher than gelation temp amp this

property is known as Hysteresis This temp is between 70 -100 degree centigrade

Chemical reaction- Gelation may also induced by chemical reaction where in the

dispersed phase of soil is allowed to react with a substance to give a different type of

dispersed phase The process is not reversed by an increased temperature

Types of Hydrocolloids

REVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS - Reversible hydrocolloids are those sol can be

changed to gel but gel canrsquot be reversed back to the solution

Eg Alginate impression material

IRREVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS - Irreversible hydrocolloids are those materials

where the change from the sol to gel can be brought by lowering the temp of the sol amp the

gel can be converted back to sol condition by heating

Eg Agar ndash Agar

ALGINATE IRREVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOID

bull The word alginate comes from Algin amp named by a chemist of Scotland It was identified

as a liner polymer with numerous carboxyl acid groups It is called as irreversible

hydrocolloids because gelation is induced by chemical reaction amp transformation is not

possible It is the most widely used dental materials

bull The principal factors responsible for the success of this type of impression materials are-

bull Easy to manipulate

bull Comfortable for the patients

bull Relatively inexpensive

Page 6

Hydrocolloids

Composition

Potassium or Sodium Alginate- 15 It is the chief active ingredient

Calcium Sulfate- 16 It is used as a reactor

Zinc Oxide amp Diatomaceous Earth- Zinc oxide ndash 4 amp Diatomaceous

earth 60

Potassium Titanium Fluoride - 3

Sodium Phosphate - 2

Gelation Process

The typical sol-gel reaction is a soluble alginate with calcium sulfate amp the formation

of an insoluble calcium alginate gel Calcium sulfate reacts rapidly to produce the in soluble

Ca alginate from the potassium or sodium alginate in a aqueous solution The production of

calcium alginate is rapid that it does not allow sufficient working time Thus third water

soluble salt such as a trisodium phosphate is added to the solution to prolong the working

time Thus the reaction between the calcium sulfate amp the soluble alginate is prevented as

long as there is uncreated trisodium phosphate

2Na3Po4 +n CaSo4 rarrnKaSo4 +Ca alginate

When the supply of the trisodium phosphate is exhausted the ca ions begin to react

with the potassium alginate to produce calcium alginate

Kzn Alg +n CaSo4rarr n KaSo4 + Cal alginate

The added salt is retarder

Controlling of gelation time-

An increase in the temp of water used for mixing shorten the working amp setting

time

The proportion of powder amp water also effect the setting time

PROPERTIES

Page 7

Hydrocolloids

Alginate is of two types

Type I - Fast setting

Type II - Normal setting

According to ADA Specification No 18 properties are-

1 Mixing time- Creamy consistency come in 45 ndash 60 sec

2 Working time-

- Fast setting material - 12 ndash 2 min

- Normal set material - 2 ndash 45 min

3 Setting or gelation time-

- Optimum gelation time - 3-4 min at room temp

- For fast setting material - 1 -2 min

- For normal setting material - 2 ndash 45min

4 Permanent deformation - ADA specification requires 97 recovery amp where 3 is

permanent deformation Alginate has 988 recovery amp 15 permanent deformation

5 Flexibility- ADA specification permits10 ndash 20 at the stress of 1000gm cm2 Hard

material has value of 5-8

6 Strength-

The compressive strength- 5000-8000gmcm2

Tear strength - 350-700gmcm2

7Viscoelasticity

Usually an alginate impression material does not adhere to the oral tissue as strongly as some

of the non aqueous elastomers so it is easy to remove the alginate impression rapidly

8Accuracy Most

alginate is not capable of reproducing the finer details that are absorbed in impression with

Agar amp other elastomeric impression material

9 Dimensional effects - The gel may loss water by evaporation from its surface amp it shrinks

- If the gel placed in the water it absorbed water amp gel swells

- Thermal change also contributes to dimensional change The alginate shrinks slightly due to

difference in temp between mouth temp(30c) amp room temp(23c)

10 Biocompatibility -

Page 8

Hydrocolloids

No chemical or allergic reaction associated with alginate

11 Shelf life -

Alginate impressions have shorter shelf life Strong temp amp moisture contamination are two

factor which effect the self life of alginate

MANIPULATION OF ALGINATE

PREPARING THE MIX

A measured powder is shifted into pre measured water that has been placed in a clean

rubber bowl Care should be taken to avoid whipping air into the mix A vigorous figure 8

motion is best with the mix being swiped or stropped against the side of the mixing rubber

bowl with intermittent rotation ie180 degree of the spatula to press out air bubbles The

mixing time is 45sec -1 min

A variety of mechanical devices are also available for mixing impression material

There benefits are convenience speed amp elimination of human error

MAKING THE IMPRESSION

Before setting the impression the material should have developed sufficient body so

that it doesnrsquot flow out of the try A perforated tray is generally used If plastic try or metal

rim lock try is selected a thin layer of adhesive should be applied amp allowed to dry before

mixing and loading the try The thickness of the alginate between the tray amp tissue should

be at least 3mm

Recent developments

1 Dust-free alginates

Inhaling fine airborne particles from alginate impression material can cause

silicosis and pulmonary hypersensitivity

Page 9

Hydrocolloids

Dustless alginates were introduced which give off or no dust particles so avoiding

dust inhalation This can be achieved by coating the material with glycerine or

glycol This causes the powder to become more denser than in uncoated state

2 Siliconised alginates

It is a two component system in the form of two pastes one containing the

alginate sol and the second containing the calcium reactor

The components incorporate a silicone polymer component which makes material

tear resistant compared to unmodified alginates However the dimensional

stability is reported to be poor

3 Low dust alginate impression material

Introduced by Schunichi Nobutakwatanate in 1997

This composition comprises an alginate a gelation regulator and a filler as major

components which further comprises sepiolite and a tetraflouroethylene resin

having a true specific gravity of from 2-3

The material generates less dust has a mean particle size of 1-40microns

4 Antiseptic alginate impression material

Introduced by Tameyuki Yamamoto Maso Abinu patented in 1990

An antiseptic containing alginate impression material contains 001 to 7 parts by weight

of an antiseptic such as glutaraldehyde and chlohexidine gluconate per 100 parts by

weight of a cured product of an alginate impression material

The antiseptic may be encapsulated in a microcapsule or clathrated in a cyclodextrin

5 CAVEX Color change

Page 10

Hydrocolloids

The alginate impression material with color indications avoiding confusion about setting

time

Color changes are visualizing the major decision points in impression making

end of mixing time

end of setting time ( tray can be removed from mouth)

it indicates two color changes

Violet to pink indicates the end of mixing time

Pink to white indicates end of setting time

Other advantages of this material are

-improved dimensional stability (upto 5 days)

Good tear and deformation resistance

Dust free

Smooth surface optimum gypsum compatibility

ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES

Advantages

1 Easy to mix and manipulate

2 Minimum requirement of equipment

3 Accuracy (if properly handled)

4 Low cost

5 Comfortable to the patient

6 Hygienic (as fresh material is used for each impression)

Disadvantages

1 Cannot be electroplated

2 Distortion occurs easily

3 Poor dimensional stability (poured within 15 min)

4 Poor tear strength

AGAR ndash REVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS

Page 11

Hydrocolloids

When agar hydrocolloids heated they liquefy or go into the sol state amp on cooling they

return to the gel state Because this process can be repeated a gel of this type is

described as Reversible hydrocolloid The preparation of the agar hydrocolloids for

clinical use requires care full control amp yields accurate impression It has been largely

replaced by alginate hydrocolloids amp rubber impression materials

COMPOSITION

Borates - 02 ndash 05 Its works as retarder

water - 855 It is reaction medium

Agar- 13-17 It is main active constituent of reversible

hydrocolloid impression material

Sulfates - 1 ndash 2 Accelerators

Fillers - 05 -1 Diatomaceous earth silica wax rubber etc

used as filler

Bactericide - Thymol amp glycerin are used

Color amp flavor

GELATION PROCESS

The setting of the reversible hydrocolloid is called gelation The reaction can be

expressed a sol- gel reaction The physical changes from to gel does not return to the sol at

the same temp at which it solidified The gel must be heated at the liquefaction temp ie 70 -

100c to form sol Sol transform into a gel at 37-50c the exact gelation temp depended on

several factor including the molecular wt the purity of the material amp the ratio of agar to

other ingredients

The gelation is critical If the temp is high the heat from sol may injury to the soft

tissue or if the surface of the sol transforms to a gel as soon as the sol may injure the oral

tissues a high surface stress may develop If the gelation temp is too far below the oral

temp it will be difficulty or even impossible to chill the material sufficiently to obtain a firm

Page 12

Hydrocolloids

gel to adjacent to the oral tissue The temp lag between the gelation amp liquefaction temp of

the gel makes it possible to use as a dental impression material

PROPERTIES

Gelation temperature -

After tempering the sol should be homogenous and should set to a gel between 37

ndash 500c when cooled

Viscoelastic properties -

It demonstrates the necessity of deforming the impression rapidly when it removed

from the mouth which reduces the amount of the permanent deformation The elastic

recovery of the hydrocolloid is never complete amp it does not return entirely to its original

dimension after deformation The amount of permanent deformation in clinical is

negligible provided that -

a) The material has adequately gelled

b) The impression has been removed rapidly

c) The under cuts present in the cavity preparation are minimal

Permanent deformation -

The ADA specification requires that the permanent deformation should be less than

15 after the material compressed 10 for 30sec This impression material readily meets

this requirement with the value of about 1

Distortion during gelation -

If the material is held rigidly to the tray then the impression material shrinks

toward the center of its mass Rapid cooling may cause a concentration of stress near the

tray where gelation first takes place

Flexibility -

The ADA specification requirement for flexibility allows a range of 4-14 amp most

agar materials meet this requirement

Strength -

The compressive strength of Agar impression material is 8000gmcm2

The tear strength of Agar is 7000gmcm2

Page 13

Hydrocolloids

Flow -

Agar is sufficiently fluid to allow detailed reproduction of hard amp soft tissue

Compatibility with gypsum -

Not all the agar impression materials are equally compatible with all gypsum

products The impression should be washed of saliva amp any trace of blood which

retarded the setting of gypsum

Manipulation of agar impression

The use of agar hydrocolloid involves special equipment called conditioning

unit for agar The hydrocolloid is usually supplied In two forms syringe and tray

materials The only difference between the materials is the color and the greater fluidity of

the syringe material

Impression tray

It is rim locked trays with water circulating device This types of trays should

allow a space of 3mm occlusally and laterally and extend distally to cover all the teeth

After the tray has been properly positioned water is circulated at 13 degrees through the

tray until gelation occurs

Preparation of material

Proper equipment of liquefying and storing the agar impression material is essential

At first reverse the hydrocolloid gel to the sol stage Boiling water is a convenient

way of liquefying the material The material must be held at this temperature for a

minimum of 10mins Propylene glycol can be added to the water to obtain 100 degrees

After it has been liquefied the material must be stored in the tray The material can be

stored for several days Usually there are three compartments in the conditioning unit

making it possible to liquefy store and temper the material

Page 14

Hydrocolloids

Conditioning and tempering

Because 55 degree is the maximum tolerable temperature the storage temperature

of 65 degrees would be too hot for the oral tissues especially given the bulk of the tray

material Therefore the material that is used to fill the tray must be cooled and tempered

Eliminating the effect of imbibition is the purpose of placing the gauze pad over the

tempering tray materials When the tray material is placed into the tempering bath the

gauze is removed and the contaminating surface layer of material clings to the gauze and is

removed as well

Making the impression

The syringe material is taken directly from the storage compartment and applied to

the prepared cavities It is first applied to the base of the preparation and then the reminder

of the tooth is covered By the time the cavity preparation and adjoining teeth have been

covered the tray material has been properly tempered and is now ready to be placed

immediately in the mouth to form the bulk of impression Gelation is accelerated by

circulating cool water approximately 18 ndash 21 degrees through the tray for 3 ndash 5 minutes

Disinfection of hydrocolloid impression

As the hydrocolloid impression material must be poured within short time after

removal from the mouth The disinfection procedure should be relatively rapid to prevent

the dimensional change Most manufacturers recommended a specific disinfectant The

agent may be iodophor bleach or gluteraldehyde The distortion is minimal if the

recommended immersion time is followed and if the impression is poured properly The

irreversible hydrocolloid may be disinfected by 10 minute immersion inor spraying with

the antimicrobial agent such as NaOCl and glutaraldehyde without sufficient dimensional

change The current protocol for disinfecting hydrocolloid impression is to use household

bleach iodophor and synthetic phenols as disinfectants After the immersion it is

thoroughly rinsed The disinfectant is sprayed liberally o the exposed surface The

immersion should not be submerged or soaked in the disinfectant solution

Page 15

Hydrocolloids

Recent techniques

Laminate technique

A recent modification of the conventional procedure is the combined agar alginate

technique The hydrocolloid in the tray is replaced with a mix of chilled alginate

that bonds with the agar expressed from a syringe

The alginate gels by a chemical reaction whereas the agar gels by means of

contact with cool alginate rather than with the water circulating through the tray

Since the agar not the alginate is in contact with the prepared teeth maximum

detail is reproduced

Advantages

syringe agar records tissues more accurately

Water cooled tray is not required

Sets faster

Disadvantages

Agar ndash alginate bond failure can occur

Viscous alginate may displace agar

Technique sensitive

Wet field technique

This is a recent technique

The oral tissues are flooded with warm water The syringe material is then

injected in to the surface to be recorded

Before syringe material gels tray material is seated

Page 16

Hydrocolloids

The hydraulic pressure of the viscous tray material forces the fluid syringe

material down in to the areas to be recorded

The motion displaces the syringe material as well as blood and debris through out

the sulcus

ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES

Advantages

1 Hydrophilic Impression material

2 Good elastic properties Good recovery from distortion

3 Can be re-used as a duplicating material

4 Long working time and low material cost

5 No mixing technique

6 High accuracy and fine detail recording

Disadvantages

1 Only one model can be used

2 Extensive and expensive equipment required

3 It can not be electroplated

4 Impossible to sterilize for reuse

5 Low dimensional stability amp tear resistance

TYPES OF FAILURES

1 Distortion- due to

Delayed pouring of impression

Movement of tray during setting

Removal from mouth too early

2 Grainy impression- due to

Inadequate mixing

Page 17

Hydrocolloids

Prolonged mixing

Less water in mix

3 Tearing - due to

Inadequate bulk

Moisture contamination

Removal from mouth too early

Prolonged mixing

4 Bubbles- due to

Early gelation preventing flow

Air incorporated during mixing

5 Irregular voids- due to

Excess moisture ampdebris on

REFERENCES

1 Anusavice ldquoSkinners science of dental materialsrdquo Tenth Edition

2 Dental materials and their selection-willian jorsquo brien

3 Restorative dental materials-craig

4 Removable prosthodintics- stewart

Page 18

  • Constructing a model or cast is an important step in numerous dental procedures Various types of cast amp models can be made from gypsum products using an impression mold or negative likeness of a dental structure An impression is a negative replica of the tissue of the oral cavity It is used to register or reproduce the form and relation of the teeth amp surrounding tissue
  • HISTORY
    • 1558 - Celline described a wax model to make impression in his book MEMORIES
    • 1700 - Matheus G Purenam suggested that wax models can be used in prosthetic work
    • 1728 ndash Pierre Fauchard described various impression materials in his book LE CHIRURGEEN DENTISTE
    • 1756 ndash Persian Phillip Pfaff first used plaster models prepared from sectional wax impression of the mouth
    • 1810 ndash R C Skinner describe about many materials and techniques in his first American book
    • 1928 ndash ADA developed specification No 19 for impression material
    • 1930 ndash Zinc Oxide Eugenol a rigid impression was introduced
    • 1930 ndash Polysulfide was first used as a commercial synthetic rubber as a copolymer of Ethylene Chloride amp sodium
    • 1937 ndash Agar was introduced by Sears
    • 1949 ndash Alginate was developed during World war II
    • 1950 ndash Polysulfide was used in dentistry
    • 1955 ndash Condensation Silicone was introduced in Germany
    • 1975 ndash Addition Silicone was introduced
    • 1977 ndash Costell introduced Dual tray technique
    • 1980 ndash A Visible light cure Polyether Urethane Dimethacrylate rubber impression material was introduced
    • 1996 ndash Blare amp Wassed considered a no of solution used to disinfecting impression material
      • IDEAL REQUIREMENTS OF IMPRESSION MATERIAL
        • 1 Pleasant taste amp odor
        • 2 Not contain any toxic amp irritating ingredients
        • 3 Adequate shelf life
        • 4 Satisfactory consistency and texture
        • 5 Easy to disinfect with out loss of accuracy
        • 6 Compatible with die and cast material
        • 7 Dimensional stability
        • 8 Good elastic properties
        • 9 Easy manipulation
        • 10 Adequate setting characteristics
        • 11 High degree of reproduction details
        • 12 Adequate strength
        • 13 Should not release any gas
        • 14 Economical
        • 15 Should not be technique sensitive
        • 1 Based on rigidityelasticity -
        • a Rigid (non-elastic)
        • b Elastic
        • 2 Based on viscosity -
        • a Mucostatic
        • b Mucocompressive
        • c Pseudoplastic
          • 3 Based on setting of material -
            • 1 a chemical reaction
            • b Physical change of state
            • 2 a reversible
            • b Irreversible
            • 4Based on interaction with salivawater -
            • 1 Hydrophobic
            • 2 Hydrophilic
              • 5Based on chemistry-
                • 1 Impression Plaster
                • 2 Impression compound
                • 3 Metal oxide (zinc oxide eugenol)
                • 4 Reversible hydrocolloid
                • 5 Irreversible hydrocolloid
                • 6 Poly sulfides
                • 7 Condensation silicones
                • 8 Addition silicones
                • 9 Polyether
                • 10 Visible light curing polyether urethane dimethacrylate
                  • 6Based on use -
                    • 1 Primary impression materials
                    • 2 Secondary impression materials
                    • 3 Duplicating materials
                      • HYDROCOLLOIDS
                        • Colloids are often classified as fourth state of matter the Colloidal state In a solution of sugar in water the sugar molecules are uniformly dispersed in the water amp there is no visible physical separation between the solute amp the solvent molecules If sugar molecules replaced with large amp visible particles such as sand the system is Suspension or if molecules are liquid such vegetable oil then system is Emulsion
                        • True solution exists as a single phase However both the colloid amp the suspension have to phase- The dispersed amp Dispersion phase In the colloid the particles in the dispersed phase consist of molecules held together either by primary or secondary force The size of the particles range is 1 ndash 200nm
                          • Gels
                            • Colloids with a liquid as the dispersion medium can exist in two different forms known as Sol amp Gel
                            • A sol has the appearance amp many characteristic of a various liquid
                            • A gel on the contrary is a semi solid amp produced from a soldering process of gelation by the formation of fibrils or chains called Micelles
                            • Gelation is the conversion of a sol to gel amp the temperature at which this occurs is called Gelation Temperature
                              • Gelation may be brought about in one of these ways
                                • Lowering the temperature- It is done by reducing the thermal energy of effectively These forces are secondary molecular forces The bond between the fibrils is weak amp they break at slightly elevated temperature Gelation temp is 37-50degree centigrade
                                • Liquefaction temperature- It is considerable higher than gelation temp amp this property is known as Hysteresis This temp is between 70 -100 degree centigrade
                                • Chemical reaction- Gelation may also induced by chemical reaction where in the dispersed phase of soil is allowed to react with a substance to give a different type of dispersed phase The process is not reversed by an increased temperature
                                  • Types of Hydrocolloids
                                    • REVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS - Reversible hydrocolloids are those sol can be changed to gel but gel canrsquot be reversed back to the solution
                                    • Eg Alginate impression material
                                    • IRREVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS - Irreversible hydrocolloids are those materials where the change from the sol to gel can be brought by lowering the temp of the sol amp the gel can be converted back to sol condition by heating
                                    • Eg Agar ndash Agar
                                      • ALGINATE IRREVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOID
                                        • The word alginate comes from Algin amp named by a chemist of Scotland It was identified as a liner polymer with numerous carboxyl acid groups It is called as irreversible hydrocolloids because gelation is induced by chemical reaction amp transformation is not possible It is the most widely used dental materials
                                        • The principal factors responsible for the success of this type of impression materials are-
                                        • Easy to manipulate
                                        • Comfortable for the patients
                                        • Relatively inexpensive
                                        • Composition
                                        • Potassium or Sodium Alginate- 15 It is the chief active ingredient
                                        • Calcium Sulfate- 16 It is used as a reactor
                                        • Zinc Oxide amp Diatomaceous Earth- Zinc oxide ndash 4 amp Diatomaceous
                                        • earth 60
                                        • Potassium Titanium Fluoride - 3
                                        • Sodium Phosphate - 2
                                          • Gelation Process
                                            • The typical sol-gel reaction is a soluble alginate with calcium sulfate amp the formation of an insoluble calcium alginate gel Calcium sulfate reacts rapidly to produce the in soluble Ca alginate from the potassium or sodium alginate in a aqueous solution The production of calcium alginate is rapid that it does not allow sufficient working time Thus third water soluble salt such as a trisodium phosphate is added to the solution to prolong the working time Thus the reaction between the calcium sulfate amp the soluble alginate is prevented as long as there is uncreated trisodium phosphate
                                            • 2Na3Po4 +n CaSo4 rarrnKaSo4 +Ca alginate
                                            • When the supply of the trisodium phosphate is exhausted the ca ions begin to react with the potassium alginate to produce calcium alginate Kzn Alg +n CaSo4rarr n KaSo4 + Cal alginate
                                            • The added salt is retarder
                                            • Controlling of gelation time-
                                            • An increase in the temp of water used for mixing shorten the working amp setting time
                                            • The proportion of powder amp water also effect the setting time
                                              • PROPERTIES
                                                • Alginate is of two types
                                                • Type I - Fast setting
                                                • Type II - Normal setting
                                                • According to ADA Specification No 18 properties are-
                                                • 1 Mixing time- Creamy consistency come in 45 ndash 60 sec
                                                • 2 Working time-
                                                • - Fast setting material - 12 ndash 2 min
                                                • - Normal set material - 2 ndash 45 min
                                                • 3 Setting or gelation time-
                                                • - Optimum gelation time - 3-4 min at room temp
                                                • - For fast setting material - 1 -2 min
                                                • - For normal setting material - 2 ndash 45min
                                                • 4 Permanent deformation - ADA specification requires 97 recovery amp where 3 is permanent deformation Alginate has 988 recovery amp 15 permanent deformation
                                                • 5 Flexibility- ADA specification permits10 ndash 20 at the stress of 1000gm cm2 Hard material has value of 5-8
                                                • 6 Strength-
                                                • The compressive strength- 5000-8000gmcm2
                                                • Tear strength - 350-700gmcm2
                                                • 7Viscoelasticity Usually an alginate impression material does not adhere to the oral tissue as strongly as some of the non aqueous elastomers so it is easy to remove the alginate impression rapidly
                                                • 8Accuracy Most alginate is not capable of reproducing the finer details that are absorbed in impression with Agar amp other elastomeric impression material
                                                • 9 Dimensional effects - The gel may loss water by evaporation from its surface amp it shrinks
                                                • - If the gel placed in the water it absorbed water amp gel swells
                                                • - Thermal change also contributes to dimensional change The alginate shrinks slightly due to difference in temp between mouth temp(30c) amp room temp(23c)
                                                • 10 Biocompatibility -
                                                • No chemical or allergic reaction associated with alginate
                                                • 11 Shelf life -
                                                • Alginate impressions have shorter shelf life Strong temp amp moisture contamination are two factor which effect the self life of alginate
                                                  • MANIPULATION OF ALGINATE
                                                    • PREPARING THE MIX
                                                    • A measured powder is shifted into pre measured water that has been placed in a clean rubber bowl Care should be taken to avoid whipping air into the mix A vigorous figure 8 motion is best with the mix being swiped or stropped against the side of the mixing rubber bowl with intermittent rotation ie180 degree of the spatula to press out air bubbles The mixing time is 45sec -1 min
                                                    • A variety of mechanical devices are also available for mixing impression material There benefits are convenience speed amp elimination of human error
                                                    • MAKING THE IMPRESSION
                                                    • Before setting the impression the material should have developed sufficient body so that it doesnrsquot flow out of the try A perforated tray is generally used If plastic try or metal rim lock try is selected a thin layer of adhesive should be applied amp allowed to dry before mixing and loading the try The thickness of the alginate between the tray amp tissue should be at least 3mm
                                                    • ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES
                                                    • Advantages
                                                    • 1 Cannot be electroplated
                                                    • 2 Distortion occurs easily
                                                    • 3 Poor dimensional stability (poured within 15 min)
                                                    • 4 Poor tear strength
                                                    • AGAR ndash REVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS
                                                    • When agar hydrocolloids heated they liquefy or go into the sol state amp on cooling they return to the gel state Because this process can be repeated a gel of this type is described as Reversible hydrocolloid The preparation of the agar hydrocolloids for clinical use requires care full control amp yields accurate impression It has been largely replaced by alginate hydrocolloids amp rubber impression materials
                                                      • COMPOSITION
                                                        • Borates - 02 ndash 05 Its works as retarder
                                                        • water - 855 It is reaction medium
                                                        • Agar- 13-17 It is main active constituent of reversible hydrocolloid impression material
                                                        • Sulfates - 1 ndash 2 Accelerators
                                                        • Fillers - 05 -1 Diatomaceous earth silica wax rubber etc used as filler
                                                        • Bactericide - Thymol amp glycerin are used
                                                        • Color amp flavor
                                                          • GELATION PROCESS
                                                            • The setting of the reversible hydrocolloid is called gelation The reaction can be expressed a sol- gel reaction The physical changes from to gel does not return to the sol at the same temp at which it solidified The gel must be heated at the liquefaction temp ie 70 - 100c to form sol Sol transform into a gel at 37-50c the exact gelation temp depended on several factor including the molecular wt the purity of the material amp the ratio of agar to other ingredients
                                                            • The gelation is critical If the temp is high the heat from sol may injury to the soft tissue or if the surface of the sol transforms to a gel as soon as the sol may injure the oral tissues a high surface stress may develop If the gelation temp is too far below the oral temp it will be difficulty or even impossible to chill the material sufficiently to obtain a firm gel to adjacent to the oral tissue The temp lag between the gelation amp liquefaction temp of the gel makes it possible to use as a dental impression material
                                                              • PROPERTIES
                                                                • Gelation temperature -
                                                                • After tempering the sol should be homogenous and should set to a gel between 37 ndash 500c when cooled
                                                                • Viscoelastic properties -
                                                                • It demonstrates the necessity of deforming the impression rapidly when it removed from the mouth which reduces the amount of the permanent deformation The elastic recovery of the hydrocolloid is never complete amp it does not return entirely to its original dimension after deformation The amount of permanent deformation in clinical is negligible provided that -
                                                                • a) The material has adequately gelled
                                                                • b) The impression has been removed rapidly
                                                                • c) The under cuts present in the cavity preparation are minimal
                                                                • Permanent deformation -
                                                                • The ADA specification requires that the permanent deformation should be less than 15 after the material compressed 10 for 30sec This impression material readily meets this requirement with the value of about 1
                                                                • Distortion during gelation -
                                                                • If the material is held rigidly to the tray then the impression material shrinks toward the center of its mass Rapid cooling may cause a concentration of stress near the tray where gelation first takes place
                                                                • Flexibility -
                                                                • The ADA specification requirement for flexibility allows a range of 4-14 amp most agar materials meet this requirement
                                                                • Strength -
                                                                • The compressive strength of Agar impression material is 8000gmcm2
                                                                • The tear strength of Agar is 7000gmcm2
                                                                • Flow -
                                                                • Agar is sufficiently fluid to allow detailed reproduction of hard amp soft tissue
                                                                • Compatibility with gypsum -
                                                                • Not all the agar impression materials are equally compatible with all gypsum products The impression should be washed of saliva amp any trace of blood which retarded the setting of gypsum
                                                                  • Manipulation of agar impression
                                                                    • The use of agar hydrocolloid involves special equipment called conditioning unit for agar The hydrocolloid is usually supplied In two forms syringe and tray materials The only difference between the materials is the color and the greater fluidity of the syringe material
                                                                      • Impression tray
                                                                        • It is rim locked trays with water circulating device This types of trays should allow a space of 3mm occlusally and laterally and extend distally to cover all the teeth After the tray has been properly positioned water is circulated at 13 degrees through the tray until gelation occurs
                                                                          • Preparation of material
                                                                            • Proper equipment of liquefying and storing the agar impression material is essential
                                                                            • At first reverse the hydrocolloid gel to the sol stage Boiling water is a convenient way of liquefying the material The material must be held at this temperature for a minimum of 10mins Propylene glycol can be added to the water to obtain 100 degrees After it has been liquefied the material must be stored in the tray The material can be stored for several days Usually there are three compartments in the conditioning unit making it possible to liquefy store and temper the material
                                                                              • Conditioning and tempering
                                                                                • Because 55 degree is the maximum tolerable temperature the storage temperature of 65 degrees would be too hot for the oral tissues especially given the bulk of the tray material Therefore the material that is used to fill the tray must be cooled and tempered Eliminating the effect of imbibition is the purpose of placing the gauze pad over the tempering tray materials When the tray material is placed into the tempering bath the gauze is removed and the contaminating surface layer of material clings to the gauze and is removed as well
                                                                                  • Making the impression
                                                                                    • The syringe material is taken directly from the storage compartment and applied to the prepared cavities It is first applied to the base of the preparation and then the reminder of the tooth is covered By the time the cavity preparation and adjoining teeth have been covered the tray material has been properly tempered and is now ready to be placed immediately in the mouth to form the bulk of impression Gelation is accelerated by circulating cool water approximately 18 ndash 21 degrees through the tray for 3 ndash 5 minutes
                                                                                      • Disinfection of hydrocolloid impression
                                                                                        • As the hydrocolloid impression material must be poured within short time after removal from the mouth The disinfection procedure should be relatively rapid to prevent the dimensional change Most manufacturers recommended a specific disinfectant The agent may be iodophor bleach or gluteraldehyde The distortion is minimal if the recommended immersion time is followed and if the impression is poured properly The irreversible hydrocolloid may be disinfected by 10 minute immersion inor spraying with the antimicrobial agent such as NaOCl and glutaraldehyde without sufficient dimensional change The current protocol for disinfecting hydrocolloid impression is to use household bleach iodophor and synthetic phenols as disinfectants After the immersion it is thoroughly rinsed The disinfectant is sprayed liberally o the exposed surface The immersion should not be submerged or soaked in the disinfectant solution
                                                                                          • ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES
                                                                                          • TYPES OF FAILURES
                                                                                            • 1 Distortion- due to
                                                                                            • Delayed pouring of impression
                                                                                            • Movement of tray during setting
                                                                                            • Removal from mouth too early
                                                                                            • 2 Grainy impression- due to
                                                                                            • Inadequate mixing
                                                                                            • Prolonged mixing
                                                                                            • Less water in mix
                                                                                            • 3 Tearing - due to
                                                                                            • Inadequate bulk
                                                                                            • Moisture contamination
                                                                                            • Removal from mouth too early
                                                                                            • Prolonged mixing
                                                                                            • 4 Bubbles- due to
                                                                                            • Early gelation preventing flow
                                                                                            • Air incorporated during mixing
                                                                                            • 5 Irregular voids- due to
                                                                                            • Excess moisture ampdebris on
                                                                                              • 1 Anusavice ldquoSkinners science of dental materialsrdquo Tenth Edition
Page 7: Hydroco Llo Ids / orthodontic courses by Indian dental academy

Hydrocolloids

Composition

Potassium or Sodium Alginate- 15 It is the chief active ingredient

Calcium Sulfate- 16 It is used as a reactor

Zinc Oxide amp Diatomaceous Earth- Zinc oxide ndash 4 amp Diatomaceous

earth 60

Potassium Titanium Fluoride - 3

Sodium Phosphate - 2

Gelation Process

The typical sol-gel reaction is a soluble alginate with calcium sulfate amp the formation

of an insoluble calcium alginate gel Calcium sulfate reacts rapidly to produce the in soluble

Ca alginate from the potassium or sodium alginate in a aqueous solution The production of

calcium alginate is rapid that it does not allow sufficient working time Thus third water

soluble salt such as a trisodium phosphate is added to the solution to prolong the working

time Thus the reaction between the calcium sulfate amp the soluble alginate is prevented as

long as there is uncreated trisodium phosphate

2Na3Po4 +n CaSo4 rarrnKaSo4 +Ca alginate

When the supply of the trisodium phosphate is exhausted the ca ions begin to react

with the potassium alginate to produce calcium alginate

Kzn Alg +n CaSo4rarr n KaSo4 + Cal alginate

The added salt is retarder

Controlling of gelation time-

An increase in the temp of water used for mixing shorten the working amp setting

time

The proportion of powder amp water also effect the setting time

PROPERTIES

Page 7

Hydrocolloids

Alginate is of two types

Type I - Fast setting

Type II - Normal setting

According to ADA Specification No 18 properties are-

1 Mixing time- Creamy consistency come in 45 ndash 60 sec

2 Working time-

- Fast setting material - 12 ndash 2 min

- Normal set material - 2 ndash 45 min

3 Setting or gelation time-

- Optimum gelation time - 3-4 min at room temp

- For fast setting material - 1 -2 min

- For normal setting material - 2 ndash 45min

4 Permanent deformation - ADA specification requires 97 recovery amp where 3 is

permanent deformation Alginate has 988 recovery amp 15 permanent deformation

5 Flexibility- ADA specification permits10 ndash 20 at the stress of 1000gm cm2 Hard

material has value of 5-8

6 Strength-

The compressive strength- 5000-8000gmcm2

Tear strength - 350-700gmcm2

7Viscoelasticity

Usually an alginate impression material does not adhere to the oral tissue as strongly as some

of the non aqueous elastomers so it is easy to remove the alginate impression rapidly

8Accuracy Most

alginate is not capable of reproducing the finer details that are absorbed in impression with

Agar amp other elastomeric impression material

9 Dimensional effects - The gel may loss water by evaporation from its surface amp it shrinks

- If the gel placed in the water it absorbed water amp gel swells

- Thermal change also contributes to dimensional change The alginate shrinks slightly due to

difference in temp between mouth temp(30c) amp room temp(23c)

10 Biocompatibility -

Page 8

Hydrocolloids

No chemical or allergic reaction associated with alginate

11 Shelf life -

Alginate impressions have shorter shelf life Strong temp amp moisture contamination are two

factor which effect the self life of alginate

MANIPULATION OF ALGINATE

PREPARING THE MIX

A measured powder is shifted into pre measured water that has been placed in a clean

rubber bowl Care should be taken to avoid whipping air into the mix A vigorous figure 8

motion is best with the mix being swiped or stropped against the side of the mixing rubber

bowl with intermittent rotation ie180 degree of the spatula to press out air bubbles The

mixing time is 45sec -1 min

A variety of mechanical devices are also available for mixing impression material

There benefits are convenience speed amp elimination of human error

MAKING THE IMPRESSION

Before setting the impression the material should have developed sufficient body so

that it doesnrsquot flow out of the try A perforated tray is generally used If plastic try or metal

rim lock try is selected a thin layer of adhesive should be applied amp allowed to dry before

mixing and loading the try The thickness of the alginate between the tray amp tissue should

be at least 3mm

Recent developments

1 Dust-free alginates

Inhaling fine airborne particles from alginate impression material can cause

silicosis and pulmonary hypersensitivity

Page 9

Hydrocolloids

Dustless alginates were introduced which give off or no dust particles so avoiding

dust inhalation This can be achieved by coating the material with glycerine or

glycol This causes the powder to become more denser than in uncoated state

2 Siliconised alginates

It is a two component system in the form of two pastes one containing the

alginate sol and the second containing the calcium reactor

The components incorporate a silicone polymer component which makes material

tear resistant compared to unmodified alginates However the dimensional

stability is reported to be poor

3 Low dust alginate impression material

Introduced by Schunichi Nobutakwatanate in 1997

This composition comprises an alginate a gelation regulator and a filler as major

components which further comprises sepiolite and a tetraflouroethylene resin

having a true specific gravity of from 2-3

The material generates less dust has a mean particle size of 1-40microns

4 Antiseptic alginate impression material

Introduced by Tameyuki Yamamoto Maso Abinu patented in 1990

An antiseptic containing alginate impression material contains 001 to 7 parts by weight

of an antiseptic such as glutaraldehyde and chlohexidine gluconate per 100 parts by

weight of a cured product of an alginate impression material

The antiseptic may be encapsulated in a microcapsule or clathrated in a cyclodextrin

5 CAVEX Color change

Page 10

Hydrocolloids

The alginate impression material with color indications avoiding confusion about setting

time

Color changes are visualizing the major decision points in impression making

end of mixing time

end of setting time ( tray can be removed from mouth)

it indicates two color changes

Violet to pink indicates the end of mixing time

Pink to white indicates end of setting time

Other advantages of this material are

-improved dimensional stability (upto 5 days)

Good tear and deformation resistance

Dust free

Smooth surface optimum gypsum compatibility

ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES

Advantages

1 Easy to mix and manipulate

2 Minimum requirement of equipment

3 Accuracy (if properly handled)

4 Low cost

5 Comfortable to the patient

6 Hygienic (as fresh material is used for each impression)

Disadvantages

1 Cannot be electroplated

2 Distortion occurs easily

3 Poor dimensional stability (poured within 15 min)

4 Poor tear strength

AGAR ndash REVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS

Page 11

Hydrocolloids

When agar hydrocolloids heated they liquefy or go into the sol state amp on cooling they

return to the gel state Because this process can be repeated a gel of this type is

described as Reversible hydrocolloid The preparation of the agar hydrocolloids for

clinical use requires care full control amp yields accurate impression It has been largely

replaced by alginate hydrocolloids amp rubber impression materials

COMPOSITION

Borates - 02 ndash 05 Its works as retarder

water - 855 It is reaction medium

Agar- 13-17 It is main active constituent of reversible

hydrocolloid impression material

Sulfates - 1 ndash 2 Accelerators

Fillers - 05 -1 Diatomaceous earth silica wax rubber etc

used as filler

Bactericide - Thymol amp glycerin are used

Color amp flavor

GELATION PROCESS

The setting of the reversible hydrocolloid is called gelation The reaction can be

expressed a sol- gel reaction The physical changes from to gel does not return to the sol at

the same temp at which it solidified The gel must be heated at the liquefaction temp ie 70 -

100c to form sol Sol transform into a gel at 37-50c the exact gelation temp depended on

several factor including the molecular wt the purity of the material amp the ratio of agar to

other ingredients

The gelation is critical If the temp is high the heat from sol may injury to the soft

tissue or if the surface of the sol transforms to a gel as soon as the sol may injure the oral

tissues a high surface stress may develop If the gelation temp is too far below the oral

temp it will be difficulty or even impossible to chill the material sufficiently to obtain a firm

Page 12

Hydrocolloids

gel to adjacent to the oral tissue The temp lag between the gelation amp liquefaction temp of

the gel makes it possible to use as a dental impression material

PROPERTIES

Gelation temperature -

After tempering the sol should be homogenous and should set to a gel between 37

ndash 500c when cooled

Viscoelastic properties -

It demonstrates the necessity of deforming the impression rapidly when it removed

from the mouth which reduces the amount of the permanent deformation The elastic

recovery of the hydrocolloid is never complete amp it does not return entirely to its original

dimension after deformation The amount of permanent deformation in clinical is

negligible provided that -

a) The material has adequately gelled

b) The impression has been removed rapidly

c) The under cuts present in the cavity preparation are minimal

Permanent deformation -

The ADA specification requires that the permanent deformation should be less than

15 after the material compressed 10 for 30sec This impression material readily meets

this requirement with the value of about 1

Distortion during gelation -

If the material is held rigidly to the tray then the impression material shrinks

toward the center of its mass Rapid cooling may cause a concentration of stress near the

tray where gelation first takes place

Flexibility -

The ADA specification requirement for flexibility allows a range of 4-14 amp most

agar materials meet this requirement

Strength -

The compressive strength of Agar impression material is 8000gmcm2

The tear strength of Agar is 7000gmcm2

Page 13

Hydrocolloids

Flow -

Agar is sufficiently fluid to allow detailed reproduction of hard amp soft tissue

Compatibility with gypsum -

Not all the agar impression materials are equally compatible with all gypsum

products The impression should be washed of saliva amp any trace of blood which

retarded the setting of gypsum

Manipulation of agar impression

The use of agar hydrocolloid involves special equipment called conditioning

unit for agar The hydrocolloid is usually supplied In two forms syringe and tray

materials The only difference between the materials is the color and the greater fluidity of

the syringe material

Impression tray

It is rim locked trays with water circulating device This types of trays should

allow a space of 3mm occlusally and laterally and extend distally to cover all the teeth

After the tray has been properly positioned water is circulated at 13 degrees through the

tray until gelation occurs

Preparation of material

Proper equipment of liquefying and storing the agar impression material is essential

At first reverse the hydrocolloid gel to the sol stage Boiling water is a convenient

way of liquefying the material The material must be held at this temperature for a

minimum of 10mins Propylene glycol can be added to the water to obtain 100 degrees

After it has been liquefied the material must be stored in the tray The material can be

stored for several days Usually there are three compartments in the conditioning unit

making it possible to liquefy store and temper the material

Page 14

Hydrocolloids

Conditioning and tempering

Because 55 degree is the maximum tolerable temperature the storage temperature

of 65 degrees would be too hot for the oral tissues especially given the bulk of the tray

material Therefore the material that is used to fill the tray must be cooled and tempered

Eliminating the effect of imbibition is the purpose of placing the gauze pad over the

tempering tray materials When the tray material is placed into the tempering bath the

gauze is removed and the contaminating surface layer of material clings to the gauze and is

removed as well

Making the impression

The syringe material is taken directly from the storage compartment and applied to

the prepared cavities It is first applied to the base of the preparation and then the reminder

of the tooth is covered By the time the cavity preparation and adjoining teeth have been

covered the tray material has been properly tempered and is now ready to be placed

immediately in the mouth to form the bulk of impression Gelation is accelerated by

circulating cool water approximately 18 ndash 21 degrees through the tray for 3 ndash 5 minutes

Disinfection of hydrocolloid impression

As the hydrocolloid impression material must be poured within short time after

removal from the mouth The disinfection procedure should be relatively rapid to prevent

the dimensional change Most manufacturers recommended a specific disinfectant The

agent may be iodophor bleach or gluteraldehyde The distortion is minimal if the

recommended immersion time is followed and if the impression is poured properly The

irreversible hydrocolloid may be disinfected by 10 minute immersion inor spraying with

the antimicrobial agent such as NaOCl and glutaraldehyde without sufficient dimensional

change The current protocol for disinfecting hydrocolloid impression is to use household

bleach iodophor and synthetic phenols as disinfectants After the immersion it is

thoroughly rinsed The disinfectant is sprayed liberally o the exposed surface The

immersion should not be submerged or soaked in the disinfectant solution

Page 15

Hydrocolloids

Recent techniques

Laminate technique

A recent modification of the conventional procedure is the combined agar alginate

technique The hydrocolloid in the tray is replaced with a mix of chilled alginate

that bonds with the agar expressed from a syringe

The alginate gels by a chemical reaction whereas the agar gels by means of

contact with cool alginate rather than with the water circulating through the tray

Since the agar not the alginate is in contact with the prepared teeth maximum

detail is reproduced

Advantages

syringe agar records tissues more accurately

Water cooled tray is not required

Sets faster

Disadvantages

Agar ndash alginate bond failure can occur

Viscous alginate may displace agar

Technique sensitive

Wet field technique

This is a recent technique

The oral tissues are flooded with warm water The syringe material is then

injected in to the surface to be recorded

Before syringe material gels tray material is seated

Page 16

Hydrocolloids

The hydraulic pressure of the viscous tray material forces the fluid syringe

material down in to the areas to be recorded

The motion displaces the syringe material as well as blood and debris through out

the sulcus

ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES

Advantages

1 Hydrophilic Impression material

2 Good elastic properties Good recovery from distortion

3 Can be re-used as a duplicating material

4 Long working time and low material cost

5 No mixing technique

6 High accuracy and fine detail recording

Disadvantages

1 Only one model can be used

2 Extensive and expensive equipment required

3 It can not be electroplated

4 Impossible to sterilize for reuse

5 Low dimensional stability amp tear resistance

TYPES OF FAILURES

1 Distortion- due to

Delayed pouring of impression

Movement of tray during setting

Removal from mouth too early

2 Grainy impression- due to

Inadequate mixing

Page 17

Hydrocolloids

Prolonged mixing

Less water in mix

3 Tearing - due to

Inadequate bulk

Moisture contamination

Removal from mouth too early

Prolonged mixing

4 Bubbles- due to

Early gelation preventing flow

Air incorporated during mixing

5 Irregular voids- due to

Excess moisture ampdebris on

REFERENCES

1 Anusavice ldquoSkinners science of dental materialsrdquo Tenth Edition

2 Dental materials and their selection-willian jorsquo brien

3 Restorative dental materials-craig

4 Removable prosthodintics- stewart

Page 18

  • Constructing a model or cast is an important step in numerous dental procedures Various types of cast amp models can be made from gypsum products using an impression mold or negative likeness of a dental structure An impression is a negative replica of the tissue of the oral cavity It is used to register or reproduce the form and relation of the teeth amp surrounding tissue
  • HISTORY
    • 1558 - Celline described a wax model to make impression in his book MEMORIES
    • 1700 - Matheus G Purenam suggested that wax models can be used in prosthetic work
    • 1728 ndash Pierre Fauchard described various impression materials in his book LE CHIRURGEEN DENTISTE
    • 1756 ndash Persian Phillip Pfaff first used plaster models prepared from sectional wax impression of the mouth
    • 1810 ndash R C Skinner describe about many materials and techniques in his first American book
    • 1928 ndash ADA developed specification No 19 for impression material
    • 1930 ndash Zinc Oxide Eugenol a rigid impression was introduced
    • 1930 ndash Polysulfide was first used as a commercial synthetic rubber as a copolymer of Ethylene Chloride amp sodium
    • 1937 ndash Agar was introduced by Sears
    • 1949 ndash Alginate was developed during World war II
    • 1950 ndash Polysulfide was used in dentistry
    • 1955 ndash Condensation Silicone was introduced in Germany
    • 1975 ndash Addition Silicone was introduced
    • 1977 ndash Costell introduced Dual tray technique
    • 1980 ndash A Visible light cure Polyether Urethane Dimethacrylate rubber impression material was introduced
    • 1996 ndash Blare amp Wassed considered a no of solution used to disinfecting impression material
      • IDEAL REQUIREMENTS OF IMPRESSION MATERIAL
        • 1 Pleasant taste amp odor
        • 2 Not contain any toxic amp irritating ingredients
        • 3 Adequate shelf life
        • 4 Satisfactory consistency and texture
        • 5 Easy to disinfect with out loss of accuracy
        • 6 Compatible with die and cast material
        • 7 Dimensional stability
        • 8 Good elastic properties
        • 9 Easy manipulation
        • 10 Adequate setting characteristics
        • 11 High degree of reproduction details
        • 12 Adequate strength
        • 13 Should not release any gas
        • 14 Economical
        • 15 Should not be technique sensitive
        • 1 Based on rigidityelasticity -
        • a Rigid (non-elastic)
        • b Elastic
        • 2 Based on viscosity -
        • a Mucostatic
        • b Mucocompressive
        • c Pseudoplastic
          • 3 Based on setting of material -
            • 1 a chemical reaction
            • b Physical change of state
            • 2 a reversible
            • b Irreversible
            • 4Based on interaction with salivawater -
            • 1 Hydrophobic
            • 2 Hydrophilic
              • 5Based on chemistry-
                • 1 Impression Plaster
                • 2 Impression compound
                • 3 Metal oxide (zinc oxide eugenol)
                • 4 Reversible hydrocolloid
                • 5 Irreversible hydrocolloid
                • 6 Poly sulfides
                • 7 Condensation silicones
                • 8 Addition silicones
                • 9 Polyether
                • 10 Visible light curing polyether urethane dimethacrylate
                  • 6Based on use -
                    • 1 Primary impression materials
                    • 2 Secondary impression materials
                    • 3 Duplicating materials
                      • HYDROCOLLOIDS
                        • Colloids are often classified as fourth state of matter the Colloidal state In a solution of sugar in water the sugar molecules are uniformly dispersed in the water amp there is no visible physical separation between the solute amp the solvent molecules If sugar molecules replaced with large amp visible particles such as sand the system is Suspension or if molecules are liquid such vegetable oil then system is Emulsion
                        • True solution exists as a single phase However both the colloid amp the suspension have to phase- The dispersed amp Dispersion phase In the colloid the particles in the dispersed phase consist of molecules held together either by primary or secondary force The size of the particles range is 1 ndash 200nm
                          • Gels
                            • Colloids with a liquid as the dispersion medium can exist in two different forms known as Sol amp Gel
                            • A sol has the appearance amp many characteristic of a various liquid
                            • A gel on the contrary is a semi solid amp produced from a soldering process of gelation by the formation of fibrils or chains called Micelles
                            • Gelation is the conversion of a sol to gel amp the temperature at which this occurs is called Gelation Temperature
                              • Gelation may be brought about in one of these ways
                                • Lowering the temperature- It is done by reducing the thermal energy of effectively These forces are secondary molecular forces The bond between the fibrils is weak amp they break at slightly elevated temperature Gelation temp is 37-50degree centigrade
                                • Liquefaction temperature- It is considerable higher than gelation temp amp this property is known as Hysteresis This temp is between 70 -100 degree centigrade
                                • Chemical reaction- Gelation may also induced by chemical reaction where in the dispersed phase of soil is allowed to react with a substance to give a different type of dispersed phase The process is not reversed by an increased temperature
                                  • Types of Hydrocolloids
                                    • REVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS - Reversible hydrocolloids are those sol can be changed to gel but gel canrsquot be reversed back to the solution
                                    • Eg Alginate impression material
                                    • IRREVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS - Irreversible hydrocolloids are those materials where the change from the sol to gel can be brought by lowering the temp of the sol amp the gel can be converted back to sol condition by heating
                                    • Eg Agar ndash Agar
                                      • ALGINATE IRREVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOID
                                        • The word alginate comes from Algin amp named by a chemist of Scotland It was identified as a liner polymer with numerous carboxyl acid groups It is called as irreversible hydrocolloids because gelation is induced by chemical reaction amp transformation is not possible It is the most widely used dental materials
                                        • The principal factors responsible for the success of this type of impression materials are-
                                        • Easy to manipulate
                                        • Comfortable for the patients
                                        • Relatively inexpensive
                                        • Composition
                                        • Potassium or Sodium Alginate- 15 It is the chief active ingredient
                                        • Calcium Sulfate- 16 It is used as a reactor
                                        • Zinc Oxide amp Diatomaceous Earth- Zinc oxide ndash 4 amp Diatomaceous
                                        • earth 60
                                        • Potassium Titanium Fluoride - 3
                                        • Sodium Phosphate - 2
                                          • Gelation Process
                                            • The typical sol-gel reaction is a soluble alginate with calcium sulfate amp the formation of an insoluble calcium alginate gel Calcium sulfate reacts rapidly to produce the in soluble Ca alginate from the potassium or sodium alginate in a aqueous solution The production of calcium alginate is rapid that it does not allow sufficient working time Thus third water soluble salt such as a trisodium phosphate is added to the solution to prolong the working time Thus the reaction between the calcium sulfate amp the soluble alginate is prevented as long as there is uncreated trisodium phosphate
                                            • 2Na3Po4 +n CaSo4 rarrnKaSo4 +Ca alginate
                                            • When the supply of the trisodium phosphate is exhausted the ca ions begin to react with the potassium alginate to produce calcium alginate Kzn Alg +n CaSo4rarr n KaSo4 + Cal alginate
                                            • The added salt is retarder
                                            • Controlling of gelation time-
                                            • An increase in the temp of water used for mixing shorten the working amp setting time
                                            • The proportion of powder amp water also effect the setting time
                                              • PROPERTIES
                                                • Alginate is of two types
                                                • Type I - Fast setting
                                                • Type II - Normal setting
                                                • According to ADA Specification No 18 properties are-
                                                • 1 Mixing time- Creamy consistency come in 45 ndash 60 sec
                                                • 2 Working time-
                                                • - Fast setting material - 12 ndash 2 min
                                                • - Normal set material - 2 ndash 45 min
                                                • 3 Setting or gelation time-
                                                • - Optimum gelation time - 3-4 min at room temp
                                                • - For fast setting material - 1 -2 min
                                                • - For normal setting material - 2 ndash 45min
                                                • 4 Permanent deformation - ADA specification requires 97 recovery amp where 3 is permanent deformation Alginate has 988 recovery amp 15 permanent deformation
                                                • 5 Flexibility- ADA specification permits10 ndash 20 at the stress of 1000gm cm2 Hard material has value of 5-8
                                                • 6 Strength-
                                                • The compressive strength- 5000-8000gmcm2
                                                • Tear strength - 350-700gmcm2
                                                • 7Viscoelasticity Usually an alginate impression material does not adhere to the oral tissue as strongly as some of the non aqueous elastomers so it is easy to remove the alginate impression rapidly
                                                • 8Accuracy Most alginate is not capable of reproducing the finer details that are absorbed in impression with Agar amp other elastomeric impression material
                                                • 9 Dimensional effects - The gel may loss water by evaporation from its surface amp it shrinks
                                                • - If the gel placed in the water it absorbed water amp gel swells
                                                • - Thermal change also contributes to dimensional change The alginate shrinks slightly due to difference in temp between mouth temp(30c) amp room temp(23c)
                                                • 10 Biocompatibility -
                                                • No chemical or allergic reaction associated with alginate
                                                • 11 Shelf life -
                                                • Alginate impressions have shorter shelf life Strong temp amp moisture contamination are two factor which effect the self life of alginate
                                                  • MANIPULATION OF ALGINATE
                                                    • PREPARING THE MIX
                                                    • A measured powder is shifted into pre measured water that has been placed in a clean rubber bowl Care should be taken to avoid whipping air into the mix A vigorous figure 8 motion is best with the mix being swiped or stropped against the side of the mixing rubber bowl with intermittent rotation ie180 degree of the spatula to press out air bubbles The mixing time is 45sec -1 min
                                                    • A variety of mechanical devices are also available for mixing impression material There benefits are convenience speed amp elimination of human error
                                                    • MAKING THE IMPRESSION
                                                    • Before setting the impression the material should have developed sufficient body so that it doesnrsquot flow out of the try A perforated tray is generally used If plastic try or metal rim lock try is selected a thin layer of adhesive should be applied amp allowed to dry before mixing and loading the try The thickness of the alginate between the tray amp tissue should be at least 3mm
                                                    • ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES
                                                    • Advantages
                                                    • 1 Cannot be electroplated
                                                    • 2 Distortion occurs easily
                                                    • 3 Poor dimensional stability (poured within 15 min)
                                                    • 4 Poor tear strength
                                                    • AGAR ndash REVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS
                                                    • When agar hydrocolloids heated they liquefy or go into the sol state amp on cooling they return to the gel state Because this process can be repeated a gel of this type is described as Reversible hydrocolloid The preparation of the agar hydrocolloids for clinical use requires care full control amp yields accurate impression It has been largely replaced by alginate hydrocolloids amp rubber impression materials
                                                      • COMPOSITION
                                                        • Borates - 02 ndash 05 Its works as retarder
                                                        • water - 855 It is reaction medium
                                                        • Agar- 13-17 It is main active constituent of reversible hydrocolloid impression material
                                                        • Sulfates - 1 ndash 2 Accelerators
                                                        • Fillers - 05 -1 Diatomaceous earth silica wax rubber etc used as filler
                                                        • Bactericide - Thymol amp glycerin are used
                                                        • Color amp flavor
                                                          • GELATION PROCESS
                                                            • The setting of the reversible hydrocolloid is called gelation The reaction can be expressed a sol- gel reaction The physical changes from to gel does not return to the sol at the same temp at which it solidified The gel must be heated at the liquefaction temp ie 70 - 100c to form sol Sol transform into a gel at 37-50c the exact gelation temp depended on several factor including the molecular wt the purity of the material amp the ratio of agar to other ingredients
                                                            • The gelation is critical If the temp is high the heat from sol may injury to the soft tissue or if the surface of the sol transforms to a gel as soon as the sol may injure the oral tissues a high surface stress may develop If the gelation temp is too far below the oral temp it will be difficulty or even impossible to chill the material sufficiently to obtain a firm gel to adjacent to the oral tissue The temp lag between the gelation amp liquefaction temp of the gel makes it possible to use as a dental impression material
                                                              • PROPERTIES
                                                                • Gelation temperature -
                                                                • After tempering the sol should be homogenous and should set to a gel between 37 ndash 500c when cooled
                                                                • Viscoelastic properties -
                                                                • It demonstrates the necessity of deforming the impression rapidly when it removed from the mouth which reduces the amount of the permanent deformation The elastic recovery of the hydrocolloid is never complete amp it does not return entirely to its original dimension after deformation The amount of permanent deformation in clinical is negligible provided that -
                                                                • a) The material has adequately gelled
                                                                • b) The impression has been removed rapidly
                                                                • c) The under cuts present in the cavity preparation are minimal
                                                                • Permanent deformation -
                                                                • The ADA specification requires that the permanent deformation should be less than 15 after the material compressed 10 for 30sec This impression material readily meets this requirement with the value of about 1
                                                                • Distortion during gelation -
                                                                • If the material is held rigidly to the tray then the impression material shrinks toward the center of its mass Rapid cooling may cause a concentration of stress near the tray where gelation first takes place
                                                                • Flexibility -
                                                                • The ADA specification requirement for flexibility allows a range of 4-14 amp most agar materials meet this requirement
                                                                • Strength -
                                                                • The compressive strength of Agar impression material is 8000gmcm2
                                                                • The tear strength of Agar is 7000gmcm2
                                                                • Flow -
                                                                • Agar is sufficiently fluid to allow detailed reproduction of hard amp soft tissue
                                                                • Compatibility with gypsum -
                                                                • Not all the agar impression materials are equally compatible with all gypsum products The impression should be washed of saliva amp any trace of blood which retarded the setting of gypsum
                                                                  • Manipulation of agar impression
                                                                    • The use of agar hydrocolloid involves special equipment called conditioning unit for agar The hydrocolloid is usually supplied In two forms syringe and tray materials The only difference between the materials is the color and the greater fluidity of the syringe material
                                                                      • Impression tray
                                                                        • It is rim locked trays with water circulating device This types of trays should allow a space of 3mm occlusally and laterally and extend distally to cover all the teeth After the tray has been properly positioned water is circulated at 13 degrees through the tray until gelation occurs
                                                                          • Preparation of material
                                                                            • Proper equipment of liquefying and storing the agar impression material is essential
                                                                            • At first reverse the hydrocolloid gel to the sol stage Boiling water is a convenient way of liquefying the material The material must be held at this temperature for a minimum of 10mins Propylene glycol can be added to the water to obtain 100 degrees After it has been liquefied the material must be stored in the tray The material can be stored for several days Usually there are three compartments in the conditioning unit making it possible to liquefy store and temper the material
                                                                              • Conditioning and tempering
                                                                                • Because 55 degree is the maximum tolerable temperature the storage temperature of 65 degrees would be too hot for the oral tissues especially given the bulk of the tray material Therefore the material that is used to fill the tray must be cooled and tempered Eliminating the effect of imbibition is the purpose of placing the gauze pad over the tempering tray materials When the tray material is placed into the tempering bath the gauze is removed and the contaminating surface layer of material clings to the gauze and is removed as well
                                                                                  • Making the impression
                                                                                    • The syringe material is taken directly from the storage compartment and applied to the prepared cavities It is first applied to the base of the preparation and then the reminder of the tooth is covered By the time the cavity preparation and adjoining teeth have been covered the tray material has been properly tempered and is now ready to be placed immediately in the mouth to form the bulk of impression Gelation is accelerated by circulating cool water approximately 18 ndash 21 degrees through the tray for 3 ndash 5 minutes
                                                                                      • Disinfection of hydrocolloid impression
                                                                                        • As the hydrocolloid impression material must be poured within short time after removal from the mouth The disinfection procedure should be relatively rapid to prevent the dimensional change Most manufacturers recommended a specific disinfectant The agent may be iodophor bleach or gluteraldehyde The distortion is minimal if the recommended immersion time is followed and if the impression is poured properly The irreversible hydrocolloid may be disinfected by 10 minute immersion inor spraying with the antimicrobial agent such as NaOCl and glutaraldehyde without sufficient dimensional change The current protocol for disinfecting hydrocolloid impression is to use household bleach iodophor and synthetic phenols as disinfectants After the immersion it is thoroughly rinsed The disinfectant is sprayed liberally o the exposed surface The immersion should not be submerged or soaked in the disinfectant solution
                                                                                          • ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES
                                                                                          • TYPES OF FAILURES
                                                                                            • 1 Distortion- due to
                                                                                            • Delayed pouring of impression
                                                                                            • Movement of tray during setting
                                                                                            • Removal from mouth too early
                                                                                            • 2 Grainy impression- due to
                                                                                            • Inadequate mixing
                                                                                            • Prolonged mixing
                                                                                            • Less water in mix
                                                                                            • 3 Tearing - due to
                                                                                            • Inadequate bulk
                                                                                            • Moisture contamination
                                                                                            • Removal from mouth too early
                                                                                            • Prolonged mixing
                                                                                            • 4 Bubbles- due to
                                                                                            • Early gelation preventing flow
                                                                                            • Air incorporated during mixing
                                                                                            • 5 Irregular voids- due to
                                                                                            • Excess moisture ampdebris on
                                                                                              • 1 Anusavice ldquoSkinners science of dental materialsrdquo Tenth Edition
Page 8: Hydroco Llo Ids / orthodontic courses by Indian dental academy

Hydrocolloids

Alginate is of two types

Type I - Fast setting

Type II - Normal setting

According to ADA Specification No 18 properties are-

1 Mixing time- Creamy consistency come in 45 ndash 60 sec

2 Working time-

- Fast setting material - 12 ndash 2 min

- Normal set material - 2 ndash 45 min

3 Setting or gelation time-

- Optimum gelation time - 3-4 min at room temp

- For fast setting material - 1 -2 min

- For normal setting material - 2 ndash 45min

4 Permanent deformation - ADA specification requires 97 recovery amp where 3 is

permanent deformation Alginate has 988 recovery amp 15 permanent deformation

5 Flexibility- ADA specification permits10 ndash 20 at the stress of 1000gm cm2 Hard

material has value of 5-8

6 Strength-

The compressive strength- 5000-8000gmcm2

Tear strength - 350-700gmcm2

7Viscoelasticity

Usually an alginate impression material does not adhere to the oral tissue as strongly as some

of the non aqueous elastomers so it is easy to remove the alginate impression rapidly

8Accuracy Most

alginate is not capable of reproducing the finer details that are absorbed in impression with

Agar amp other elastomeric impression material

9 Dimensional effects - The gel may loss water by evaporation from its surface amp it shrinks

- If the gel placed in the water it absorbed water amp gel swells

- Thermal change also contributes to dimensional change The alginate shrinks slightly due to

difference in temp between mouth temp(30c) amp room temp(23c)

10 Biocompatibility -

Page 8

Hydrocolloids

No chemical or allergic reaction associated with alginate

11 Shelf life -

Alginate impressions have shorter shelf life Strong temp amp moisture contamination are two

factor which effect the self life of alginate

MANIPULATION OF ALGINATE

PREPARING THE MIX

A measured powder is shifted into pre measured water that has been placed in a clean

rubber bowl Care should be taken to avoid whipping air into the mix A vigorous figure 8

motion is best with the mix being swiped or stropped against the side of the mixing rubber

bowl with intermittent rotation ie180 degree of the spatula to press out air bubbles The

mixing time is 45sec -1 min

A variety of mechanical devices are also available for mixing impression material

There benefits are convenience speed amp elimination of human error

MAKING THE IMPRESSION

Before setting the impression the material should have developed sufficient body so

that it doesnrsquot flow out of the try A perforated tray is generally used If plastic try or metal

rim lock try is selected a thin layer of adhesive should be applied amp allowed to dry before

mixing and loading the try The thickness of the alginate between the tray amp tissue should

be at least 3mm

Recent developments

1 Dust-free alginates

Inhaling fine airborne particles from alginate impression material can cause

silicosis and pulmonary hypersensitivity

Page 9

Hydrocolloids

Dustless alginates were introduced which give off or no dust particles so avoiding

dust inhalation This can be achieved by coating the material with glycerine or

glycol This causes the powder to become more denser than in uncoated state

2 Siliconised alginates

It is a two component system in the form of two pastes one containing the

alginate sol and the second containing the calcium reactor

The components incorporate a silicone polymer component which makes material

tear resistant compared to unmodified alginates However the dimensional

stability is reported to be poor

3 Low dust alginate impression material

Introduced by Schunichi Nobutakwatanate in 1997

This composition comprises an alginate a gelation regulator and a filler as major

components which further comprises sepiolite and a tetraflouroethylene resin

having a true specific gravity of from 2-3

The material generates less dust has a mean particle size of 1-40microns

4 Antiseptic alginate impression material

Introduced by Tameyuki Yamamoto Maso Abinu patented in 1990

An antiseptic containing alginate impression material contains 001 to 7 parts by weight

of an antiseptic such as glutaraldehyde and chlohexidine gluconate per 100 parts by

weight of a cured product of an alginate impression material

The antiseptic may be encapsulated in a microcapsule or clathrated in a cyclodextrin

5 CAVEX Color change

Page 10

Hydrocolloids

The alginate impression material with color indications avoiding confusion about setting

time

Color changes are visualizing the major decision points in impression making

end of mixing time

end of setting time ( tray can be removed from mouth)

it indicates two color changes

Violet to pink indicates the end of mixing time

Pink to white indicates end of setting time

Other advantages of this material are

-improved dimensional stability (upto 5 days)

Good tear and deformation resistance

Dust free

Smooth surface optimum gypsum compatibility

ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES

Advantages

1 Easy to mix and manipulate

2 Minimum requirement of equipment

3 Accuracy (if properly handled)

4 Low cost

5 Comfortable to the patient

6 Hygienic (as fresh material is used for each impression)

Disadvantages

1 Cannot be electroplated

2 Distortion occurs easily

3 Poor dimensional stability (poured within 15 min)

4 Poor tear strength

AGAR ndash REVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS

Page 11

Hydrocolloids

When agar hydrocolloids heated they liquefy or go into the sol state amp on cooling they

return to the gel state Because this process can be repeated a gel of this type is

described as Reversible hydrocolloid The preparation of the agar hydrocolloids for

clinical use requires care full control amp yields accurate impression It has been largely

replaced by alginate hydrocolloids amp rubber impression materials

COMPOSITION

Borates - 02 ndash 05 Its works as retarder

water - 855 It is reaction medium

Agar- 13-17 It is main active constituent of reversible

hydrocolloid impression material

Sulfates - 1 ndash 2 Accelerators

Fillers - 05 -1 Diatomaceous earth silica wax rubber etc

used as filler

Bactericide - Thymol amp glycerin are used

Color amp flavor

GELATION PROCESS

The setting of the reversible hydrocolloid is called gelation The reaction can be

expressed a sol- gel reaction The physical changes from to gel does not return to the sol at

the same temp at which it solidified The gel must be heated at the liquefaction temp ie 70 -

100c to form sol Sol transform into a gel at 37-50c the exact gelation temp depended on

several factor including the molecular wt the purity of the material amp the ratio of agar to

other ingredients

The gelation is critical If the temp is high the heat from sol may injury to the soft

tissue or if the surface of the sol transforms to a gel as soon as the sol may injure the oral

tissues a high surface stress may develop If the gelation temp is too far below the oral

temp it will be difficulty or even impossible to chill the material sufficiently to obtain a firm

Page 12

Hydrocolloids

gel to adjacent to the oral tissue The temp lag between the gelation amp liquefaction temp of

the gel makes it possible to use as a dental impression material

PROPERTIES

Gelation temperature -

After tempering the sol should be homogenous and should set to a gel between 37

ndash 500c when cooled

Viscoelastic properties -

It demonstrates the necessity of deforming the impression rapidly when it removed

from the mouth which reduces the amount of the permanent deformation The elastic

recovery of the hydrocolloid is never complete amp it does not return entirely to its original

dimension after deformation The amount of permanent deformation in clinical is

negligible provided that -

a) The material has adequately gelled

b) The impression has been removed rapidly

c) The under cuts present in the cavity preparation are minimal

Permanent deformation -

The ADA specification requires that the permanent deformation should be less than

15 after the material compressed 10 for 30sec This impression material readily meets

this requirement with the value of about 1

Distortion during gelation -

If the material is held rigidly to the tray then the impression material shrinks

toward the center of its mass Rapid cooling may cause a concentration of stress near the

tray where gelation first takes place

Flexibility -

The ADA specification requirement for flexibility allows a range of 4-14 amp most

agar materials meet this requirement

Strength -

The compressive strength of Agar impression material is 8000gmcm2

The tear strength of Agar is 7000gmcm2

Page 13

Hydrocolloids

Flow -

Agar is sufficiently fluid to allow detailed reproduction of hard amp soft tissue

Compatibility with gypsum -

Not all the agar impression materials are equally compatible with all gypsum

products The impression should be washed of saliva amp any trace of blood which

retarded the setting of gypsum

Manipulation of agar impression

The use of agar hydrocolloid involves special equipment called conditioning

unit for agar The hydrocolloid is usually supplied In two forms syringe and tray

materials The only difference between the materials is the color and the greater fluidity of

the syringe material

Impression tray

It is rim locked trays with water circulating device This types of trays should

allow a space of 3mm occlusally and laterally and extend distally to cover all the teeth

After the tray has been properly positioned water is circulated at 13 degrees through the

tray until gelation occurs

Preparation of material

Proper equipment of liquefying and storing the agar impression material is essential

At first reverse the hydrocolloid gel to the sol stage Boiling water is a convenient

way of liquefying the material The material must be held at this temperature for a

minimum of 10mins Propylene glycol can be added to the water to obtain 100 degrees

After it has been liquefied the material must be stored in the tray The material can be

stored for several days Usually there are three compartments in the conditioning unit

making it possible to liquefy store and temper the material

Page 14

Hydrocolloids

Conditioning and tempering

Because 55 degree is the maximum tolerable temperature the storage temperature

of 65 degrees would be too hot for the oral tissues especially given the bulk of the tray

material Therefore the material that is used to fill the tray must be cooled and tempered

Eliminating the effect of imbibition is the purpose of placing the gauze pad over the

tempering tray materials When the tray material is placed into the tempering bath the

gauze is removed and the contaminating surface layer of material clings to the gauze and is

removed as well

Making the impression

The syringe material is taken directly from the storage compartment and applied to

the prepared cavities It is first applied to the base of the preparation and then the reminder

of the tooth is covered By the time the cavity preparation and adjoining teeth have been

covered the tray material has been properly tempered and is now ready to be placed

immediately in the mouth to form the bulk of impression Gelation is accelerated by

circulating cool water approximately 18 ndash 21 degrees through the tray for 3 ndash 5 minutes

Disinfection of hydrocolloid impression

As the hydrocolloid impression material must be poured within short time after

removal from the mouth The disinfection procedure should be relatively rapid to prevent

the dimensional change Most manufacturers recommended a specific disinfectant The

agent may be iodophor bleach or gluteraldehyde The distortion is minimal if the

recommended immersion time is followed and if the impression is poured properly The

irreversible hydrocolloid may be disinfected by 10 minute immersion inor spraying with

the antimicrobial agent such as NaOCl and glutaraldehyde without sufficient dimensional

change The current protocol for disinfecting hydrocolloid impression is to use household

bleach iodophor and synthetic phenols as disinfectants After the immersion it is

thoroughly rinsed The disinfectant is sprayed liberally o the exposed surface The

immersion should not be submerged or soaked in the disinfectant solution

Page 15

Hydrocolloids

Recent techniques

Laminate technique

A recent modification of the conventional procedure is the combined agar alginate

technique The hydrocolloid in the tray is replaced with a mix of chilled alginate

that bonds with the agar expressed from a syringe

The alginate gels by a chemical reaction whereas the agar gels by means of

contact with cool alginate rather than with the water circulating through the tray

Since the agar not the alginate is in contact with the prepared teeth maximum

detail is reproduced

Advantages

syringe agar records tissues more accurately

Water cooled tray is not required

Sets faster

Disadvantages

Agar ndash alginate bond failure can occur

Viscous alginate may displace agar

Technique sensitive

Wet field technique

This is a recent technique

The oral tissues are flooded with warm water The syringe material is then

injected in to the surface to be recorded

Before syringe material gels tray material is seated

Page 16

Hydrocolloids

The hydraulic pressure of the viscous tray material forces the fluid syringe

material down in to the areas to be recorded

The motion displaces the syringe material as well as blood and debris through out

the sulcus

ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES

Advantages

1 Hydrophilic Impression material

2 Good elastic properties Good recovery from distortion

3 Can be re-used as a duplicating material

4 Long working time and low material cost

5 No mixing technique

6 High accuracy and fine detail recording

Disadvantages

1 Only one model can be used

2 Extensive and expensive equipment required

3 It can not be electroplated

4 Impossible to sterilize for reuse

5 Low dimensional stability amp tear resistance

TYPES OF FAILURES

1 Distortion- due to

Delayed pouring of impression

Movement of tray during setting

Removal from mouth too early

2 Grainy impression- due to

Inadequate mixing

Page 17

Hydrocolloids

Prolonged mixing

Less water in mix

3 Tearing - due to

Inadequate bulk

Moisture contamination

Removal from mouth too early

Prolonged mixing

4 Bubbles- due to

Early gelation preventing flow

Air incorporated during mixing

5 Irregular voids- due to

Excess moisture ampdebris on

REFERENCES

1 Anusavice ldquoSkinners science of dental materialsrdquo Tenth Edition

2 Dental materials and their selection-willian jorsquo brien

3 Restorative dental materials-craig

4 Removable prosthodintics- stewart

Page 18

  • Constructing a model or cast is an important step in numerous dental procedures Various types of cast amp models can be made from gypsum products using an impression mold or negative likeness of a dental structure An impression is a negative replica of the tissue of the oral cavity It is used to register or reproduce the form and relation of the teeth amp surrounding tissue
  • HISTORY
    • 1558 - Celline described a wax model to make impression in his book MEMORIES
    • 1700 - Matheus G Purenam suggested that wax models can be used in prosthetic work
    • 1728 ndash Pierre Fauchard described various impression materials in his book LE CHIRURGEEN DENTISTE
    • 1756 ndash Persian Phillip Pfaff first used plaster models prepared from sectional wax impression of the mouth
    • 1810 ndash R C Skinner describe about many materials and techniques in his first American book
    • 1928 ndash ADA developed specification No 19 for impression material
    • 1930 ndash Zinc Oxide Eugenol a rigid impression was introduced
    • 1930 ndash Polysulfide was first used as a commercial synthetic rubber as a copolymer of Ethylene Chloride amp sodium
    • 1937 ndash Agar was introduced by Sears
    • 1949 ndash Alginate was developed during World war II
    • 1950 ndash Polysulfide was used in dentistry
    • 1955 ndash Condensation Silicone was introduced in Germany
    • 1975 ndash Addition Silicone was introduced
    • 1977 ndash Costell introduced Dual tray technique
    • 1980 ndash A Visible light cure Polyether Urethane Dimethacrylate rubber impression material was introduced
    • 1996 ndash Blare amp Wassed considered a no of solution used to disinfecting impression material
      • IDEAL REQUIREMENTS OF IMPRESSION MATERIAL
        • 1 Pleasant taste amp odor
        • 2 Not contain any toxic amp irritating ingredients
        • 3 Adequate shelf life
        • 4 Satisfactory consistency and texture
        • 5 Easy to disinfect with out loss of accuracy
        • 6 Compatible with die and cast material
        • 7 Dimensional stability
        • 8 Good elastic properties
        • 9 Easy manipulation
        • 10 Adequate setting characteristics
        • 11 High degree of reproduction details
        • 12 Adequate strength
        • 13 Should not release any gas
        • 14 Economical
        • 15 Should not be technique sensitive
        • 1 Based on rigidityelasticity -
        • a Rigid (non-elastic)
        • b Elastic
        • 2 Based on viscosity -
        • a Mucostatic
        • b Mucocompressive
        • c Pseudoplastic
          • 3 Based on setting of material -
            • 1 a chemical reaction
            • b Physical change of state
            • 2 a reversible
            • b Irreversible
            • 4Based on interaction with salivawater -
            • 1 Hydrophobic
            • 2 Hydrophilic
              • 5Based on chemistry-
                • 1 Impression Plaster
                • 2 Impression compound
                • 3 Metal oxide (zinc oxide eugenol)
                • 4 Reversible hydrocolloid
                • 5 Irreversible hydrocolloid
                • 6 Poly sulfides
                • 7 Condensation silicones
                • 8 Addition silicones
                • 9 Polyether
                • 10 Visible light curing polyether urethane dimethacrylate
                  • 6Based on use -
                    • 1 Primary impression materials
                    • 2 Secondary impression materials
                    • 3 Duplicating materials
                      • HYDROCOLLOIDS
                        • Colloids are often classified as fourth state of matter the Colloidal state In a solution of sugar in water the sugar molecules are uniformly dispersed in the water amp there is no visible physical separation between the solute amp the solvent molecules If sugar molecules replaced with large amp visible particles such as sand the system is Suspension or if molecules are liquid such vegetable oil then system is Emulsion
                        • True solution exists as a single phase However both the colloid amp the suspension have to phase- The dispersed amp Dispersion phase In the colloid the particles in the dispersed phase consist of molecules held together either by primary or secondary force The size of the particles range is 1 ndash 200nm
                          • Gels
                            • Colloids with a liquid as the dispersion medium can exist in two different forms known as Sol amp Gel
                            • A sol has the appearance amp many characteristic of a various liquid
                            • A gel on the contrary is a semi solid amp produced from a soldering process of gelation by the formation of fibrils or chains called Micelles
                            • Gelation is the conversion of a sol to gel amp the temperature at which this occurs is called Gelation Temperature
                              • Gelation may be brought about in one of these ways
                                • Lowering the temperature- It is done by reducing the thermal energy of effectively These forces are secondary molecular forces The bond between the fibrils is weak amp they break at slightly elevated temperature Gelation temp is 37-50degree centigrade
                                • Liquefaction temperature- It is considerable higher than gelation temp amp this property is known as Hysteresis This temp is between 70 -100 degree centigrade
                                • Chemical reaction- Gelation may also induced by chemical reaction where in the dispersed phase of soil is allowed to react with a substance to give a different type of dispersed phase The process is not reversed by an increased temperature
                                  • Types of Hydrocolloids
                                    • REVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS - Reversible hydrocolloids are those sol can be changed to gel but gel canrsquot be reversed back to the solution
                                    • Eg Alginate impression material
                                    • IRREVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS - Irreversible hydrocolloids are those materials where the change from the sol to gel can be brought by lowering the temp of the sol amp the gel can be converted back to sol condition by heating
                                    • Eg Agar ndash Agar
                                      • ALGINATE IRREVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOID
                                        • The word alginate comes from Algin amp named by a chemist of Scotland It was identified as a liner polymer with numerous carboxyl acid groups It is called as irreversible hydrocolloids because gelation is induced by chemical reaction amp transformation is not possible It is the most widely used dental materials
                                        • The principal factors responsible for the success of this type of impression materials are-
                                        • Easy to manipulate
                                        • Comfortable for the patients
                                        • Relatively inexpensive
                                        • Composition
                                        • Potassium or Sodium Alginate- 15 It is the chief active ingredient
                                        • Calcium Sulfate- 16 It is used as a reactor
                                        • Zinc Oxide amp Diatomaceous Earth- Zinc oxide ndash 4 amp Diatomaceous
                                        • earth 60
                                        • Potassium Titanium Fluoride - 3
                                        • Sodium Phosphate - 2
                                          • Gelation Process
                                            • The typical sol-gel reaction is a soluble alginate with calcium sulfate amp the formation of an insoluble calcium alginate gel Calcium sulfate reacts rapidly to produce the in soluble Ca alginate from the potassium or sodium alginate in a aqueous solution The production of calcium alginate is rapid that it does not allow sufficient working time Thus third water soluble salt such as a trisodium phosphate is added to the solution to prolong the working time Thus the reaction between the calcium sulfate amp the soluble alginate is prevented as long as there is uncreated trisodium phosphate
                                            • 2Na3Po4 +n CaSo4 rarrnKaSo4 +Ca alginate
                                            • When the supply of the trisodium phosphate is exhausted the ca ions begin to react with the potassium alginate to produce calcium alginate Kzn Alg +n CaSo4rarr n KaSo4 + Cal alginate
                                            • The added salt is retarder
                                            • Controlling of gelation time-
                                            • An increase in the temp of water used for mixing shorten the working amp setting time
                                            • The proportion of powder amp water also effect the setting time
                                              • PROPERTIES
                                                • Alginate is of two types
                                                • Type I - Fast setting
                                                • Type II - Normal setting
                                                • According to ADA Specification No 18 properties are-
                                                • 1 Mixing time- Creamy consistency come in 45 ndash 60 sec
                                                • 2 Working time-
                                                • - Fast setting material - 12 ndash 2 min
                                                • - Normal set material - 2 ndash 45 min
                                                • 3 Setting or gelation time-
                                                • - Optimum gelation time - 3-4 min at room temp
                                                • - For fast setting material - 1 -2 min
                                                • - For normal setting material - 2 ndash 45min
                                                • 4 Permanent deformation - ADA specification requires 97 recovery amp where 3 is permanent deformation Alginate has 988 recovery amp 15 permanent deformation
                                                • 5 Flexibility- ADA specification permits10 ndash 20 at the stress of 1000gm cm2 Hard material has value of 5-8
                                                • 6 Strength-
                                                • The compressive strength- 5000-8000gmcm2
                                                • Tear strength - 350-700gmcm2
                                                • 7Viscoelasticity Usually an alginate impression material does not adhere to the oral tissue as strongly as some of the non aqueous elastomers so it is easy to remove the alginate impression rapidly
                                                • 8Accuracy Most alginate is not capable of reproducing the finer details that are absorbed in impression with Agar amp other elastomeric impression material
                                                • 9 Dimensional effects - The gel may loss water by evaporation from its surface amp it shrinks
                                                • - If the gel placed in the water it absorbed water amp gel swells
                                                • - Thermal change also contributes to dimensional change The alginate shrinks slightly due to difference in temp between mouth temp(30c) amp room temp(23c)
                                                • 10 Biocompatibility -
                                                • No chemical or allergic reaction associated with alginate
                                                • 11 Shelf life -
                                                • Alginate impressions have shorter shelf life Strong temp amp moisture contamination are two factor which effect the self life of alginate
                                                  • MANIPULATION OF ALGINATE
                                                    • PREPARING THE MIX
                                                    • A measured powder is shifted into pre measured water that has been placed in a clean rubber bowl Care should be taken to avoid whipping air into the mix A vigorous figure 8 motion is best with the mix being swiped or stropped against the side of the mixing rubber bowl with intermittent rotation ie180 degree of the spatula to press out air bubbles The mixing time is 45sec -1 min
                                                    • A variety of mechanical devices are also available for mixing impression material There benefits are convenience speed amp elimination of human error
                                                    • MAKING THE IMPRESSION
                                                    • Before setting the impression the material should have developed sufficient body so that it doesnrsquot flow out of the try A perforated tray is generally used If plastic try or metal rim lock try is selected a thin layer of adhesive should be applied amp allowed to dry before mixing and loading the try The thickness of the alginate between the tray amp tissue should be at least 3mm
                                                    • ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES
                                                    • Advantages
                                                    • 1 Cannot be electroplated
                                                    • 2 Distortion occurs easily
                                                    • 3 Poor dimensional stability (poured within 15 min)
                                                    • 4 Poor tear strength
                                                    • AGAR ndash REVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS
                                                    • When agar hydrocolloids heated they liquefy or go into the sol state amp on cooling they return to the gel state Because this process can be repeated a gel of this type is described as Reversible hydrocolloid The preparation of the agar hydrocolloids for clinical use requires care full control amp yields accurate impression It has been largely replaced by alginate hydrocolloids amp rubber impression materials
                                                      • COMPOSITION
                                                        • Borates - 02 ndash 05 Its works as retarder
                                                        • water - 855 It is reaction medium
                                                        • Agar- 13-17 It is main active constituent of reversible hydrocolloid impression material
                                                        • Sulfates - 1 ndash 2 Accelerators
                                                        • Fillers - 05 -1 Diatomaceous earth silica wax rubber etc used as filler
                                                        • Bactericide - Thymol amp glycerin are used
                                                        • Color amp flavor
                                                          • GELATION PROCESS
                                                            • The setting of the reversible hydrocolloid is called gelation The reaction can be expressed a sol- gel reaction The physical changes from to gel does not return to the sol at the same temp at which it solidified The gel must be heated at the liquefaction temp ie 70 - 100c to form sol Sol transform into a gel at 37-50c the exact gelation temp depended on several factor including the molecular wt the purity of the material amp the ratio of agar to other ingredients
                                                            • The gelation is critical If the temp is high the heat from sol may injury to the soft tissue or if the surface of the sol transforms to a gel as soon as the sol may injure the oral tissues a high surface stress may develop If the gelation temp is too far below the oral temp it will be difficulty or even impossible to chill the material sufficiently to obtain a firm gel to adjacent to the oral tissue The temp lag between the gelation amp liquefaction temp of the gel makes it possible to use as a dental impression material
                                                              • PROPERTIES
                                                                • Gelation temperature -
                                                                • After tempering the sol should be homogenous and should set to a gel between 37 ndash 500c when cooled
                                                                • Viscoelastic properties -
                                                                • It demonstrates the necessity of deforming the impression rapidly when it removed from the mouth which reduces the amount of the permanent deformation The elastic recovery of the hydrocolloid is never complete amp it does not return entirely to its original dimension after deformation The amount of permanent deformation in clinical is negligible provided that -
                                                                • a) The material has adequately gelled
                                                                • b) The impression has been removed rapidly
                                                                • c) The under cuts present in the cavity preparation are minimal
                                                                • Permanent deformation -
                                                                • The ADA specification requires that the permanent deformation should be less than 15 after the material compressed 10 for 30sec This impression material readily meets this requirement with the value of about 1
                                                                • Distortion during gelation -
                                                                • If the material is held rigidly to the tray then the impression material shrinks toward the center of its mass Rapid cooling may cause a concentration of stress near the tray where gelation first takes place
                                                                • Flexibility -
                                                                • The ADA specification requirement for flexibility allows a range of 4-14 amp most agar materials meet this requirement
                                                                • Strength -
                                                                • The compressive strength of Agar impression material is 8000gmcm2
                                                                • The tear strength of Agar is 7000gmcm2
                                                                • Flow -
                                                                • Agar is sufficiently fluid to allow detailed reproduction of hard amp soft tissue
                                                                • Compatibility with gypsum -
                                                                • Not all the agar impression materials are equally compatible with all gypsum products The impression should be washed of saliva amp any trace of blood which retarded the setting of gypsum
                                                                  • Manipulation of agar impression
                                                                    • The use of agar hydrocolloid involves special equipment called conditioning unit for agar The hydrocolloid is usually supplied In two forms syringe and tray materials The only difference between the materials is the color and the greater fluidity of the syringe material
                                                                      • Impression tray
                                                                        • It is rim locked trays with water circulating device This types of trays should allow a space of 3mm occlusally and laterally and extend distally to cover all the teeth After the tray has been properly positioned water is circulated at 13 degrees through the tray until gelation occurs
                                                                          • Preparation of material
                                                                            • Proper equipment of liquefying and storing the agar impression material is essential
                                                                            • At first reverse the hydrocolloid gel to the sol stage Boiling water is a convenient way of liquefying the material The material must be held at this temperature for a minimum of 10mins Propylene glycol can be added to the water to obtain 100 degrees After it has been liquefied the material must be stored in the tray The material can be stored for several days Usually there are three compartments in the conditioning unit making it possible to liquefy store and temper the material
                                                                              • Conditioning and tempering
                                                                                • Because 55 degree is the maximum tolerable temperature the storage temperature of 65 degrees would be too hot for the oral tissues especially given the bulk of the tray material Therefore the material that is used to fill the tray must be cooled and tempered Eliminating the effect of imbibition is the purpose of placing the gauze pad over the tempering tray materials When the tray material is placed into the tempering bath the gauze is removed and the contaminating surface layer of material clings to the gauze and is removed as well
                                                                                  • Making the impression
                                                                                    • The syringe material is taken directly from the storage compartment and applied to the prepared cavities It is first applied to the base of the preparation and then the reminder of the tooth is covered By the time the cavity preparation and adjoining teeth have been covered the tray material has been properly tempered and is now ready to be placed immediately in the mouth to form the bulk of impression Gelation is accelerated by circulating cool water approximately 18 ndash 21 degrees through the tray for 3 ndash 5 minutes
                                                                                      • Disinfection of hydrocolloid impression
                                                                                        • As the hydrocolloid impression material must be poured within short time after removal from the mouth The disinfection procedure should be relatively rapid to prevent the dimensional change Most manufacturers recommended a specific disinfectant The agent may be iodophor bleach or gluteraldehyde The distortion is minimal if the recommended immersion time is followed and if the impression is poured properly The irreversible hydrocolloid may be disinfected by 10 minute immersion inor spraying with the antimicrobial agent such as NaOCl and glutaraldehyde without sufficient dimensional change The current protocol for disinfecting hydrocolloid impression is to use household bleach iodophor and synthetic phenols as disinfectants After the immersion it is thoroughly rinsed The disinfectant is sprayed liberally o the exposed surface The immersion should not be submerged or soaked in the disinfectant solution
                                                                                          • ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES
                                                                                          • TYPES OF FAILURES
                                                                                            • 1 Distortion- due to
                                                                                            • Delayed pouring of impression
                                                                                            • Movement of tray during setting
                                                                                            • Removal from mouth too early
                                                                                            • 2 Grainy impression- due to
                                                                                            • Inadequate mixing
                                                                                            • Prolonged mixing
                                                                                            • Less water in mix
                                                                                            • 3 Tearing - due to
                                                                                            • Inadequate bulk
                                                                                            • Moisture contamination
                                                                                            • Removal from mouth too early
                                                                                            • Prolonged mixing
                                                                                            • 4 Bubbles- due to
                                                                                            • Early gelation preventing flow
                                                                                            • Air incorporated during mixing
                                                                                            • 5 Irregular voids- due to
                                                                                            • Excess moisture ampdebris on
                                                                                              • 1 Anusavice ldquoSkinners science of dental materialsrdquo Tenth Edition
Page 9: Hydroco Llo Ids / orthodontic courses by Indian dental academy

Hydrocolloids

No chemical or allergic reaction associated with alginate

11 Shelf life -

Alginate impressions have shorter shelf life Strong temp amp moisture contamination are two

factor which effect the self life of alginate

MANIPULATION OF ALGINATE

PREPARING THE MIX

A measured powder is shifted into pre measured water that has been placed in a clean

rubber bowl Care should be taken to avoid whipping air into the mix A vigorous figure 8

motion is best with the mix being swiped or stropped against the side of the mixing rubber

bowl with intermittent rotation ie180 degree of the spatula to press out air bubbles The

mixing time is 45sec -1 min

A variety of mechanical devices are also available for mixing impression material

There benefits are convenience speed amp elimination of human error

MAKING THE IMPRESSION

Before setting the impression the material should have developed sufficient body so

that it doesnrsquot flow out of the try A perforated tray is generally used If plastic try or metal

rim lock try is selected a thin layer of adhesive should be applied amp allowed to dry before

mixing and loading the try The thickness of the alginate between the tray amp tissue should

be at least 3mm

Recent developments

1 Dust-free alginates

Inhaling fine airborne particles from alginate impression material can cause

silicosis and pulmonary hypersensitivity

Page 9

Hydrocolloids

Dustless alginates were introduced which give off or no dust particles so avoiding

dust inhalation This can be achieved by coating the material with glycerine or

glycol This causes the powder to become more denser than in uncoated state

2 Siliconised alginates

It is a two component system in the form of two pastes one containing the

alginate sol and the second containing the calcium reactor

The components incorporate a silicone polymer component which makes material

tear resistant compared to unmodified alginates However the dimensional

stability is reported to be poor

3 Low dust alginate impression material

Introduced by Schunichi Nobutakwatanate in 1997

This composition comprises an alginate a gelation regulator and a filler as major

components which further comprises sepiolite and a tetraflouroethylene resin

having a true specific gravity of from 2-3

The material generates less dust has a mean particle size of 1-40microns

4 Antiseptic alginate impression material

Introduced by Tameyuki Yamamoto Maso Abinu patented in 1990

An antiseptic containing alginate impression material contains 001 to 7 parts by weight

of an antiseptic such as glutaraldehyde and chlohexidine gluconate per 100 parts by

weight of a cured product of an alginate impression material

The antiseptic may be encapsulated in a microcapsule or clathrated in a cyclodextrin

5 CAVEX Color change

Page 10

Hydrocolloids

The alginate impression material with color indications avoiding confusion about setting

time

Color changes are visualizing the major decision points in impression making

end of mixing time

end of setting time ( tray can be removed from mouth)

it indicates two color changes

Violet to pink indicates the end of mixing time

Pink to white indicates end of setting time

Other advantages of this material are

-improved dimensional stability (upto 5 days)

Good tear and deformation resistance

Dust free

Smooth surface optimum gypsum compatibility

ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES

Advantages

1 Easy to mix and manipulate

2 Minimum requirement of equipment

3 Accuracy (if properly handled)

4 Low cost

5 Comfortable to the patient

6 Hygienic (as fresh material is used for each impression)

Disadvantages

1 Cannot be electroplated

2 Distortion occurs easily

3 Poor dimensional stability (poured within 15 min)

4 Poor tear strength

AGAR ndash REVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS

Page 11

Hydrocolloids

When agar hydrocolloids heated they liquefy or go into the sol state amp on cooling they

return to the gel state Because this process can be repeated a gel of this type is

described as Reversible hydrocolloid The preparation of the agar hydrocolloids for

clinical use requires care full control amp yields accurate impression It has been largely

replaced by alginate hydrocolloids amp rubber impression materials

COMPOSITION

Borates - 02 ndash 05 Its works as retarder

water - 855 It is reaction medium

Agar- 13-17 It is main active constituent of reversible

hydrocolloid impression material

Sulfates - 1 ndash 2 Accelerators

Fillers - 05 -1 Diatomaceous earth silica wax rubber etc

used as filler

Bactericide - Thymol amp glycerin are used

Color amp flavor

GELATION PROCESS

The setting of the reversible hydrocolloid is called gelation The reaction can be

expressed a sol- gel reaction The physical changes from to gel does not return to the sol at

the same temp at which it solidified The gel must be heated at the liquefaction temp ie 70 -

100c to form sol Sol transform into a gel at 37-50c the exact gelation temp depended on

several factor including the molecular wt the purity of the material amp the ratio of agar to

other ingredients

The gelation is critical If the temp is high the heat from sol may injury to the soft

tissue or if the surface of the sol transforms to a gel as soon as the sol may injure the oral

tissues a high surface stress may develop If the gelation temp is too far below the oral

temp it will be difficulty or even impossible to chill the material sufficiently to obtain a firm

Page 12

Hydrocolloids

gel to adjacent to the oral tissue The temp lag between the gelation amp liquefaction temp of

the gel makes it possible to use as a dental impression material

PROPERTIES

Gelation temperature -

After tempering the sol should be homogenous and should set to a gel between 37

ndash 500c when cooled

Viscoelastic properties -

It demonstrates the necessity of deforming the impression rapidly when it removed

from the mouth which reduces the amount of the permanent deformation The elastic

recovery of the hydrocolloid is never complete amp it does not return entirely to its original

dimension after deformation The amount of permanent deformation in clinical is

negligible provided that -

a) The material has adequately gelled

b) The impression has been removed rapidly

c) The under cuts present in the cavity preparation are minimal

Permanent deformation -

The ADA specification requires that the permanent deformation should be less than

15 after the material compressed 10 for 30sec This impression material readily meets

this requirement with the value of about 1

Distortion during gelation -

If the material is held rigidly to the tray then the impression material shrinks

toward the center of its mass Rapid cooling may cause a concentration of stress near the

tray where gelation first takes place

Flexibility -

The ADA specification requirement for flexibility allows a range of 4-14 amp most

agar materials meet this requirement

Strength -

The compressive strength of Agar impression material is 8000gmcm2

The tear strength of Agar is 7000gmcm2

Page 13

Hydrocolloids

Flow -

Agar is sufficiently fluid to allow detailed reproduction of hard amp soft tissue

Compatibility with gypsum -

Not all the agar impression materials are equally compatible with all gypsum

products The impression should be washed of saliva amp any trace of blood which

retarded the setting of gypsum

Manipulation of agar impression

The use of agar hydrocolloid involves special equipment called conditioning

unit for agar The hydrocolloid is usually supplied In two forms syringe and tray

materials The only difference between the materials is the color and the greater fluidity of

the syringe material

Impression tray

It is rim locked trays with water circulating device This types of trays should

allow a space of 3mm occlusally and laterally and extend distally to cover all the teeth

After the tray has been properly positioned water is circulated at 13 degrees through the

tray until gelation occurs

Preparation of material

Proper equipment of liquefying and storing the agar impression material is essential

At first reverse the hydrocolloid gel to the sol stage Boiling water is a convenient

way of liquefying the material The material must be held at this temperature for a

minimum of 10mins Propylene glycol can be added to the water to obtain 100 degrees

After it has been liquefied the material must be stored in the tray The material can be

stored for several days Usually there are three compartments in the conditioning unit

making it possible to liquefy store and temper the material

Page 14

Hydrocolloids

Conditioning and tempering

Because 55 degree is the maximum tolerable temperature the storage temperature

of 65 degrees would be too hot for the oral tissues especially given the bulk of the tray

material Therefore the material that is used to fill the tray must be cooled and tempered

Eliminating the effect of imbibition is the purpose of placing the gauze pad over the

tempering tray materials When the tray material is placed into the tempering bath the

gauze is removed and the contaminating surface layer of material clings to the gauze and is

removed as well

Making the impression

The syringe material is taken directly from the storage compartment and applied to

the prepared cavities It is first applied to the base of the preparation and then the reminder

of the tooth is covered By the time the cavity preparation and adjoining teeth have been

covered the tray material has been properly tempered and is now ready to be placed

immediately in the mouth to form the bulk of impression Gelation is accelerated by

circulating cool water approximately 18 ndash 21 degrees through the tray for 3 ndash 5 minutes

Disinfection of hydrocolloid impression

As the hydrocolloid impression material must be poured within short time after

removal from the mouth The disinfection procedure should be relatively rapid to prevent

the dimensional change Most manufacturers recommended a specific disinfectant The

agent may be iodophor bleach or gluteraldehyde The distortion is minimal if the

recommended immersion time is followed and if the impression is poured properly The

irreversible hydrocolloid may be disinfected by 10 minute immersion inor spraying with

the antimicrobial agent such as NaOCl and glutaraldehyde without sufficient dimensional

change The current protocol for disinfecting hydrocolloid impression is to use household

bleach iodophor and synthetic phenols as disinfectants After the immersion it is

thoroughly rinsed The disinfectant is sprayed liberally o the exposed surface The

immersion should not be submerged or soaked in the disinfectant solution

Page 15

Hydrocolloids

Recent techniques

Laminate technique

A recent modification of the conventional procedure is the combined agar alginate

technique The hydrocolloid in the tray is replaced with a mix of chilled alginate

that bonds with the agar expressed from a syringe

The alginate gels by a chemical reaction whereas the agar gels by means of

contact with cool alginate rather than with the water circulating through the tray

Since the agar not the alginate is in contact with the prepared teeth maximum

detail is reproduced

Advantages

syringe agar records tissues more accurately

Water cooled tray is not required

Sets faster

Disadvantages

Agar ndash alginate bond failure can occur

Viscous alginate may displace agar

Technique sensitive

Wet field technique

This is a recent technique

The oral tissues are flooded with warm water The syringe material is then

injected in to the surface to be recorded

Before syringe material gels tray material is seated

Page 16

Hydrocolloids

The hydraulic pressure of the viscous tray material forces the fluid syringe

material down in to the areas to be recorded

The motion displaces the syringe material as well as blood and debris through out

the sulcus

ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES

Advantages

1 Hydrophilic Impression material

2 Good elastic properties Good recovery from distortion

3 Can be re-used as a duplicating material

4 Long working time and low material cost

5 No mixing technique

6 High accuracy and fine detail recording

Disadvantages

1 Only one model can be used

2 Extensive and expensive equipment required

3 It can not be electroplated

4 Impossible to sterilize for reuse

5 Low dimensional stability amp tear resistance

TYPES OF FAILURES

1 Distortion- due to

Delayed pouring of impression

Movement of tray during setting

Removal from mouth too early

2 Grainy impression- due to

Inadequate mixing

Page 17

Hydrocolloids

Prolonged mixing

Less water in mix

3 Tearing - due to

Inadequate bulk

Moisture contamination

Removal from mouth too early

Prolonged mixing

4 Bubbles- due to

Early gelation preventing flow

Air incorporated during mixing

5 Irregular voids- due to

Excess moisture ampdebris on

REFERENCES

1 Anusavice ldquoSkinners science of dental materialsrdquo Tenth Edition

2 Dental materials and their selection-willian jorsquo brien

3 Restorative dental materials-craig

4 Removable prosthodintics- stewart

Page 18

  • Constructing a model or cast is an important step in numerous dental procedures Various types of cast amp models can be made from gypsum products using an impression mold or negative likeness of a dental structure An impression is a negative replica of the tissue of the oral cavity It is used to register or reproduce the form and relation of the teeth amp surrounding tissue
  • HISTORY
    • 1558 - Celline described a wax model to make impression in his book MEMORIES
    • 1700 - Matheus G Purenam suggested that wax models can be used in prosthetic work
    • 1728 ndash Pierre Fauchard described various impression materials in his book LE CHIRURGEEN DENTISTE
    • 1756 ndash Persian Phillip Pfaff first used plaster models prepared from sectional wax impression of the mouth
    • 1810 ndash R C Skinner describe about many materials and techniques in his first American book
    • 1928 ndash ADA developed specification No 19 for impression material
    • 1930 ndash Zinc Oxide Eugenol a rigid impression was introduced
    • 1930 ndash Polysulfide was first used as a commercial synthetic rubber as a copolymer of Ethylene Chloride amp sodium
    • 1937 ndash Agar was introduced by Sears
    • 1949 ndash Alginate was developed during World war II
    • 1950 ndash Polysulfide was used in dentistry
    • 1955 ndash Condensation Silicone was introduced in Germany
    • 1975 ndash Addition Silicone was introduced
    • 1977 ndash Costell introduced Dual tray technique
    • 1980 ndash A Visible light cure Polyether Urethane Dimethacrylate rubber impression material was introduced
    • 1996 ndash Blare amp Wassed considered a no of solution used to disinfecting impression material
      • IDEAL REQUIREMENTS OF IMPRESSION MATERIAL
        • 1 Pleasant taste amp odor
        • 2 Not contain any toxic amp irritating ingredients
        • 3 Adequate shelf life
        • 4 Satisfactory consistency and texture
        • 5 Easy to disinfect with out loss of accuracy
        • 6 Compatible with die and cast material
        • 7 Dimensional stability
        • 8 Good elastic properties
        • 9 Easy manipulation
        • 10 Adequate setting characteristics
        • 11 High degree of reproduction details
        • 12 Adequate strength
        • 13 Should not release any gas
        • 14 Economical
        • 15 Should not be technique sensitive
        • 1 Based on rigidityelasticity -
        • a Rigid (non-elastic)
        • b Elastic
        • 2 Based on viscosity -
        • a Mucostatic
        • b Mucocompressive
        • c Pseudoplastic
          • 3 Based on setting of material -
            • 1 a chemical reaction
            • b Physical change of state
            • 2 a reversible
            • b Irreversible
            • 4Based on interaction with salivawater -
            • 1 Hydrophobic
            • 2 Hydrophilic
              • 5Based on chemistry-
                • 1 Impression Plaster
                • 2 Impression compound
                • 3 Metal oxide (zinc oxide eugenol)
                • 4 Reversible hydrocolloid
                • 5 Irreversible hydrocolloid
                • 6 Poly sulfides
                • 7 Condensation silicones
                • 8 Addition silicones
                • 9 Polyether
                • 10 Visible light curing polyether urethane dimethacrylate
                  • 6Based on use -
                    • 1 Primary impression materials
                    • 2 Secondary impression materials
                    • 3 Duplicating materials
                      • HYDROCOLLOIDS
                        • Colloids are often classified as fourth state of matter the Colloidal state In a solution of sugar in water the sugar molecules are uniformly dispersed in the water amp there is no visible physical separation between the solute amp the solvent molecules If sugar molecules replaced with large amp visible particles such as sand the system is Suspension or if molecules are liquid such vegetable oil then system is Emulsion
                        • True solution exists as a single phase However both the colloid amp the suspension have to phase- The dispersed amp Dispersion phase In the colloid the particles in the dispersed phase consist of molecules held together either by primary or secondary force The size of the particles range is 1 ndash 200nm
                          • Gels
                            • Colloids with a liquid as the dispersion medium can exist in two different forms known as Sol amp Gel
                            • A sol has the appearance amp many characteristic of a various liquid
                            • A gel on the contrary is a semi solid amp produced from a soldering process of gelation by the formation of fibrils or chains called Micelles
                            • Gelation is the conversion of a sol to gel amp the temperature at which this occurs is called Gelation Temperature
                              • Gelation may be brought about in one of these ways
                                • Lowering the temperature- It is done by reducing the thermal energy of effectively These forces are secondary molecular forces The bond between the fibrils is weak amp they break at slightly elevated temperature Gelation temp is 37-50degree centigrade
                                • Liquefaction temperature- It is considerable higher than gelation temp amp this property is known as Hysteresis This temp is between 70 -100 degree centigrade
                                • Chemical reaction- Gelation may also induced by chemical reaction where in the dispersed phase of soil is allowed to react with a substance to give a different type of dispersed phase The process is not reversed by an increased temperature
                                  • Types of Hydrocolloids
                                    • REVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS - Reversible hydrocolloids are those sol can be changed to gel but gel canrsquot be reversed back to the solution
                                    • Eg Alginate impression material
                                    • IRREVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS - Irreversible hydrocolloids are those materials where the change from the sol to gel can be brought by lowering the temp of the sol amp the gel can be converted back to sol condition by heating
                                    • Eg Agar ndash Agar
                                      • ALGINATE IRREVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOID
                                        • The word alginate comes from Algin amp named by a chemist of Scotland It was identified as a liner polymer with numerous carboxyl acid groups It is called as irreversible hydrocolloids because gelation is induced by chemical reaction amp transformation is not possible It is the most widely used dental materials
                                        • The principal factors responsible for the success of this type of impression materials are-
                                        • Easy to manipulate
                                        • Comfortable for the patients
                                        • Relatively inexpensive
                                        • Composition
                                        • Potassium or Sodium Alginate- 15 It is the chief active ingredient
                                        • Calcium Sulfate- 16 It is used as a reactor
                                        • Zinc Oxide amp Diatomaceous Earth- Zinc oxide ndash 4 amp Diatomaceous
                                        • earth 60
                                        • Potassium Titanium Fluoride - 3
                                        • Sodium Phosphate - 2
                                          • Gelation Process
                                            • The typical sol-gel reaction is a soluble alginate with calcium sulfate amp the formation of an insoluble calcium alginate gel Calcium sulfate reacts rapidly to produce the in soluble Ca alginate from the potassium or sodium alginate in a aqueous solution The production of calcium alginate is rapid that it does not allow sufficient working time Thus third water soluble salt such as a trisodium phosphate is added to the solution to prolong the working time Thus the reaction between the calcium sulfate amp the soluble alginate is prevented as long as there is uncreated trisodium phosphate
                                            • 2Na3Po4 +n CaSo4 rarrnKaSo4 +Ca alginate
                                            • When the supply of the trisodium phosphate is exhausted the ca ions begin to react with the potassium alginate to produce calcium alginate Kzn Alg +n CaSo4rarr n KaSo4 + Cal alginate
                                            • The added salt is retarder
                                            • Controlling of gelation time-
                                            • An increase in the temp of water used for mixing shorten the working amp setting time
                                            • The proportion of powder amp water also effect the setting time
                                              • PROPERTIES
                                                • Alginate is of two types
                                                • Type I - Fast setting
                                                • Type II - Normal setting
                                                • According to ADA Specification No 18 properties are-
                                                • 1 Mixing time- Creamy consistency come in 45 ndash 60 sec
                                                • 2 Working time-
                                                • - Fast setting material - 12 ndash 2 min
                                                • - Normal set material - 2 ndash 45 min
                                                • 3 Setting or gelation time-
                                                • - Optimum gelation time - 3-4 min at room temp
                                                • - For fast setting material - 1 -2 min
                                                • - For normal setting material - 2 ndash 45min
                                                • 4 Permanent deformation - ADA specification requires 97 recovery amp where 3 is permanent deformation Alginate has 988 recovery amp 15 permanent deformation
                                                • 5 Flexibility- ADA specification permits10 ndash 20 at the stress of 1000gm cm2 Hard material has value of 5-8
                                                • 6 Strength-
                                                • The compressive strength- 5000-8000gmcm2
                                                • Tear strength - 350-700gmcm2
                                                • 7Viscoelasticity Usually an alginate impression material does not adhere to the oral tissue as strongly as some of the non aqueous elastomers so it is easy to remove the alginate impression rapidly
                                                • 8Accuracy Most alginate is not capable of reproducing the finer details that are absorbed in impression with Agar amp other elastomeric impression material
                                                • 9 Dimensional effects - The gel may loss water by evaporation from its surface amp it shrinks
                                                • - If the gel placed in the water it absorbed water amp gel swells
                                                • - Thermal change also contributes to dimensional change The alginate shrinks slightly due to difference in temp between mouth temp(30c) amp room temp(23c)
                                                • 10 Biocompatibility -
                                                • No chemical or allergic reaction associated with alginate
                                                • 11 Shelf life -
                                                • Alginate impressions have shorter shelf life Strong temp amp moisture contamination are two factor which effect the self life of alginate
                                                  • MANIPULATION OF ALGINATE
                                                    • PREPARING THE MIX
                                                    • A measured powder is shifted into pre measured water that has been placed in a clean rubber bowl Care should be taken to avoid whipping air into the mix A vigorous figure 8 motion is best with the mix being swiped or stropped against the side of the mixing rubber bowl with intermittent rotation ie180 degree of the spatula to press out air bubbles The mixing time is 45sec -1 min
                                                    • A variety of mechanical devices are also available for mixing impression material There benefits are convenience speed amp elimination of human error
                                                    • MAKING THE IMPRESSION
                                                    • Before setting the impression the material should have developed sufficient body so that it doesnrsquot flow out of the try A perforated tray is generally used If plastic try or metal rim lock try is selected a thin layer of adhesive should be applied amp allowed to dry before mixing and loading the try The thickness of the alginate between the tray amp tissue should be at least 3mm
                                                    • ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES
                                                    • Advantages
                                                    • 1 Cannot be electroplated
                                                    • 2 Distortion occurs easily
                                                    • 3 Poor dimensional stability (poured within 15 min)
                                                    • 4 Poor tear strength
                                                    • AGAR ndash REVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS
                                                    • When agar hydrocolloids heated they liquefy or go into the sol state amp on cooling they return to the gel state Because this process can be repeated a gel of this type is described as Reversible hydrocolloid The preparation of the agar hydrocolloids for clinical use requires care full control amp yields accurate impression It has been largely replaced by alginate hydrocolloids amp rubber impression materials
                                                      • COMPOSITION
                                                        • Borates - 02 ndash 05 Its works as retarder
                                                        • water - 855 It is reaction medium
                                                        • Agar- 13-17 It is main active constituent of reversible hydrocolloid impression material
                                                        • Sulfates - 1 ndash 2 Accelerators
                                                        • Fillers - 05 -1 Diatomaceous earth silica wax rubber etc used as filler
                                                        • Bactericide - Thymol amp glycerin are used
                                                        • Color amp flavor
                                                          • GELATION PROCESS
                                                            • The setting of the reversible hydrocolloid is called gelation The reaction can be expressed a sol- gel reaction The physical changes from to gel does not return to the sol at the same temp at which it solidified The gel must be heated at the liquefaction temp ie 70 - 100c to form sol Sol transform into a gel at 37-50c the exact gelation temp depended on several factor including the molecular wt the purity of the material amp the ratio of agar to other ingredients
                                                            • The gelation is critical If the temp is high the heat from sol may injury to the soft tissue or if the surface of the sol transforms to a gel as soon as the sol may injure the oral tissues a high surface stress may develop If the gelation temp is too far below the oral temp it will be difficulty or even impossible to chill the material sufficiently to obtain a firm gel to adjacent to the oral tissue The temp lag between the gelation amp liquefaction temp of the gel makes it possible to use as a dental impression material
                                                              • PROPERTIES
                                                                • Gelation temperature -
                                                                • After tempering the sol should be homogenous and should set to a gel between 37 ndash 500c when cooled
                                                                • Viscoelastic properties -
                                                                • It demonstrates the necessity of deforming the impression rapidly when it removed from the mouth which reduces the amount of the permanent deformation The elastic recovery of the hydrocolloid is never complete amp it does not return entirely to its original dimension after deformation The amount of permanent deformation in clinical is negligible provided that -
                                                                • a) The material has adequately gelled
                                                                • b) The impression has been removed rapidly
                                                                • c) The under cuts present in the cavity preparation are minimal
                                                                • Permanent deformation -
                                                                • The ADA specification requires that the permanent deformation should be less than 15 after the material compressed 10 for 30sec This impression material readily meets this requirement with the value of about 1
                                                                • Distortion during gelation -
                                                                • If the material is held rigidly to the tray then the impression material shrinks toward the center of its mass Rapid cooling may cause a concentration of stress near the tray where gelation first takes place
                                                                • Flexibility -
                                                                • The ADA specification requirement for flexibility allows a range of 4-14 amp most agar materials meet this requirement
                                                                • Strength -
                                                                • The compressive strength of Agar impression material is 8000gmcm2
                                                                • The tear strength of Agar is 7000gmcm2
                                                                • Flow -
                                                                • Agar is sufficiently fluid to allow detailed reproduction of hard amp soft tissue
                                                                • Compatibility with gypsum -
                                                                • Not all the agar impression materials are equally compatible with all gypsum products The impression should be washed of saliva amp any trace of blood which retarded the setting of gypsum
                                                                  • Manipulation of agar impression
                                                                    • The use of agar hydrocolloid involves special equipment called conditioning unit for agar The hydrocolloid is usually supplied In two forms syringe and tray materials The only difference between the materials is the color and the greater fluidity of the syringe material
                                                                      • Impression tray
                                                                        • It is rim locked trays with water circulating device This types of trays should allow a space of 3mm occlusally and laterally and extend distally to cover all the teeth After the tray has been properly positioned water is circulated at 13 degrees through the tray until gelation occurs
                                                                          • Preparation of material
                                                                            • Proper equipment of liquefying and storing the agar impression material is essential
                                                                            • At first reverse the hydrocolloid gel to the sol stage Boiling water is a convenient way of liquefying the material The material must be held at this temperature for a minimum of 10mins Propylene glycol can be added to the water to obtain 100 degrees After it has been liquefied the material must be stored in the tray The material can be stored for several days Usually there are three compartments in the conditioning unit making it possible to liquefy store and temper the material
                                                                              • Conditioning and tempering
                                                                                • Because 55 degree is the maximum tolerable temperature the storage temperature of 65 degrees would be too hot for the oral tissues especially given the bulk of the tray material Therefore the material that is used to fill the tray must be cooled and tempered Eliminating the effect of imbibition is the purpose of placing the gauze pad over the tempering tray materials When the tray material is placed into the tempering bath the gauze is removed and the contaminating surface layer of material clings to the gauze and is removed as well
                                                                                  • Making the impression
                                                                                    • The syringe material is taken directly from the storage compartment and applied to the prepared cavities It is first applied to the base of the preparation and then the reminder of the tooth is covered By the time the cavity preparation and adjoining teeth have been covered the tray material has been properly tempered and is now ready to be placed immediately in the mouth to form the bulk of impression Gelation is accelerated by circulating cool water approximately 18 ndash 21 degrees through the tray for 3 ndash 5 minutes
                                                                                      • Disinfection of hydrocolloid impression
                                                                                        • As the hydrocolloid impression material must be poured within short time after removal from the mouth The disinfection procedure should be relatively rapid to prevent the dimensional change Most manufacturers recommended a specific disinfectant The agent may be iodophor bleach or gluteraldehyde The distortion is minimal if the recommended immersion time is followed and if the impression is poured properly The irreversible hydrocolloid may be disinfected by 10 minute immersion inor spraying with the antimicrobial agent such as NaOCl and glutaraldehyde without sufficient dimensional change The current protocol for disinfecting hydrocolloid impression is to use household bleach iodophor and synthetic phenols as disinfectants After the immersion it is thoroughly rinsed The disinfectant is sprayed liberally o the exposed surface The immersion should not be submerged or soaked in the disinfectant solution
                                                                                          • ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES
                                                                                          • TYPES OF FAILURES
                                                                                            • 1 Distortion- due to
                                                                                            • Delayed pouring of impression
                                                                                            • Movement of tray during setting
                                                                                            • Removal from mouth too early
                                                                                            • 2 Grainy impression- due to
                                                                                            • Inadequate mixing
                                                                                            • Prolonged mixing
                                                                                            • Less water in mix
                                                                                            • 3 Tearing - due to
                                                                                            • Inadequate bulk
                                                                                            • Moisture contamination
                                                                                            • Removal from mouth too early
                                                                                            • Prolonged mixing
                                                                                            • 4 Bubbles- due to
                                                                                            • Early gelation preventing flow
                                                                                            • Air incorporated during mixing
                                                                                            • 5 Irregular voids- due to
                                                                                            • Excess moisture ampdebris on
                                                                                              • 1 Anusavice ldquoSkinners science of dental materialsrdquo Tenth Edition
Page 10: Hydroco Llo Ids / orthodontic courses by Indian dental academy

Hydrocolloids

Dustless alginates were introduced which give off or no dust particles so avoiding

dust inhalation This can be achieved by coating the material with glycerine or

glycol This causes the powder to become more denser than in uncoated state

2 Siliconised alginates

It is a two component system in the form of two pastes one containing the

alginate sol and the second containing the calcium reactor

The components incorporate a silicone polymer component which makes material

tear resistant compared to unmodified alginates However the dimensional

stability is reported to be poor

3 Low dust alginate impression material

Introduced by Schunichi Nobutakwatanate in 1997

This composition comprises an alginate a gelation regulator and a filler as major

components which further comprises sepiolite and a tetraflouroethylene resin

having a true specific gravity of from 2-3

The material generates less dust has a mean particle size of 1-40microns

4 Antiseptic alginate impression material

Introduced by Tameyuki Yamamoto Maso Abinu patented in 1990

An antiseptic containing alginate impression material contains 001 to 7 parts by weight

of an antiseptic such as glutaraldehyde and chlohexidine gluconate per 100 parts by

weight of a cured product of an alginate impression material

The antiseptic may be encapsulated in a microcapsule or clathrated in a cyclodextrin

5 CAVEX Color change

Page 10

Hydrocolloids

The alginate impression material with color indications avoiding confusion about setting

time

Color changes are visualizing the major decision points in impression making

end of mixing time

end of setting time ( tray can be removed from mouth)

it indicates two color changes

Violet to pink indicates the end of mixing time

Pink to white indicates end of setting time

Other advantages of this material are

-improved dimensional stability (upto 5 days)

Good tear and deformation resistance

Dust free

Smooth surface optimum gypsum compatibility

ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES

Advantages

1 Easy to mix and manipulate

2 Minimum requirement of equipment

3 Accuracy (if properly handled)

4 Low cost

5 Comfortable to the patient

6 Hygienic (as fresh material is used for each impression)

Disadvantages

1 Cannot be electroplated

2 Distortion occurs easily

3 Poor dimensional stability (poured within 15 min)

4 Poor tear strength

AGAR ndash REVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS

Page 11

Hydrocolloids

When agar hydrocolloids heated they liquefy or go into the sol state amp on cooling they

return to the gel state Because this process can be repeated a gel of this type is

described as Reversible hydrocolloid The preparation of the agar hydrocolloids for

clinical use requires care full control amp yields accurate impression It has been largely

replaced by alginate hydrocolloids amp rubber impression materials

COMPOSITION

Borates - 02 ndash 05 Its works as retarder

water - 855 It is reaction medium

Agar- 13-17 It is main active constituent of reversible

hydrocolloid impression material

Sulfates - 1 ndash 2 Accelerators

Fillers - 05 -1 Diatomaceous earth silica wax rubber etc

used as filler

Bactericide - Thymol amp glycerin are used

Color amp flavor

GELATION PROCESS

The setting of the reversible hydrocolloid is called gelation The reaction can be

expressed a sol- gel reaction The physical changes from to gel does not return to the sol at

the same temp at which it solidified The gel must be heated at the liquefaction temp ie 70 -

100c to form sol Sol transform into a gel at 37-50c the exact gelation temp depended on

several factor including the molecular wt the purity of the material amp the ratio of agar to

other ingredients

The gelation is critical If the temp is high the heat from sol may injury to the soft

tissue or if the surface of the sol transforms to a gel as soon as the sol may injure the oral

tissues a high surface stress may develop If the gelation temp is too far below the oral

temp it will be difficulty or even impossible to chill the material sufficiently to obtain a firm

Page 12

Hydrocolloids

gel to adjacent to the oral tissue The temp lag between the gelation amp liquefaction temp of

the gel makes it possible to use as a dental impression material

PROPERTIES

Gelation temperature -

After tempering the sol should be homogenous and should set to a gel between 37

ndash 500c when cooled

Viscoelastic properties -

It demonstrates the necessity of deforming the impression rapidly when it removed

from the mouth which reduces the amount of the permanent deformation The elastic

recovery of the hydrocolloid is never complete amp it does not return entirely to its original

dimension after deformation The amount of permanent deformation in clinical is

negligible provided that -

a) The material has adequately gelled

b) The impression has been removed rapidly

c) The under cuts present in the cavity preparation are minimal

Permanent deformation -

The ADA specification requires that the permanent deformation should be less than

15 after the material compressed 10 for 30sec This impression material readily meets

this requirement with the value of about 1

Distortion during gelation -

If the material is held rigidly to the tray then the impression material shrinks

toward the center of its mass Rapid cooling may cause a concentration of stress near the

tray where gelation first takes place

Flexibility -

The ADA specification requirement for flexibility allows a range of 4-14 amp most

agar materials meet this requirement

Strength -

The compressive strength of Agar impression material is 8000gmcm2

The tear strength of Agar is 7000gmcm2

Page 13

Hydrocolloids

Flow -

Agar is sufficiently fluid to allow detailed reproduction of hard amp soft tissue

Compatibility with gypsum -

Not all the agar impression materials are equally compatible with all gypsum

products The impression should be washed of saliva amp any trace of blood which

retarded the setting of gypsum

Manipulation of agar impression

The use of agar hydrocolloid involves special equipment called conditioning

unit for agar The hydrocolloid is usually supplied In two forms syringe and tray

materials The only difference between the materials is the color and the greater fluidity of

the syringe material

Impression tray

It is rim locked trays with water circulating device This types of trays should

allow a space of 3mm occlusally and laterally and extend distally to cover all the teeth

After the tray has been properly positioned water is circulated at 13 degrees through the

tray until gelation occurs

Preparation of material

Proper equipment of liquefying and storing the agar impression material is essential

At first reverse the hydrocolloid gel to the sol stage Boiling water is a convenient

way of liquefying the material The material must be held at this temperature for a

minimum of 10mins Propylene glycol can be added to the water to obtain 100 degrees

After it has been liquefied the material must be stored in the tray The material can be

stored for several days Usually there are three compartments in the conditioning unit

making it possible to liquefy store and temper the material

Page 14

Hydrocolloids

Conditioning and tempering

Because 55 degree is the maximum tolerable temperature the storage temperature

of 65 degrees would be too hot for the oral tissues especially given the bulk of the tray

material Therefore the material that is used to fill the tray must be cooled and tempered

Eliminating the effect of imbibition is the purpose of placing the gauze pad over the

tempering tray materials When the tray material is placed into the tempering bath the

gauze is removed and the contaminating surface layer of material clings to the gauze and is

removed as well

Making the impression

The syringe material is taken directly from the storage compartment and applied to

the prepared cavities It is first applied to the base of the preparation and then the reminder

of the tooth is covered By the time the cavity preparation and adjoining teeth have been

covered the tray material has been properly tempered and is now ready to be placed

immediately in the mouth to form the bulk of impression Gelation is accelerated by

circulating cool water approximately 18 ndash 21 degrees through the tray for 3 ndash 5 minutes

Disinfection of hydrocolloid impression

As the hydrocolloid impression material must be poured within short time after

removal from the mouth The disinfection procedure should be relatively rapid to prevent

the dimensional change Most manufacturers recommended a specific disinfectant The

agent may be iodophor bleach or gluteraldehyde The distortion is minimal if the

recommended immersion time is followed and if the impression is poured properly The

irreversible hydrocolloid may be disinfected by 10 minute immersion inor spraying with

the antimicrobial agent such as NaOCl and glutaraldehyde without sufficient dimensional

change The current protocol for disinfecting hydrocolloid impression is to use household

bleach iodophor and synthetic phenols as disinfectants After the immersion it is

thoroughly rinsed The disinfectant is sprayed liberally o the exposed surface The

immersion should not be submerged or soaked in the disinfectant solution

Page 15

Hydrocolloids

Recent techniques

Laminate technique

A recent modification of the conventional procedure is the combined agar alginate

technique The hydrocolloid in the tray is replaced with a mix of chilled alginate

that bonds with the agar expressed from a syringe

The alginate gels by a chemical reaction whereas the agar gels by means of

contact with cool alginate rather than with the water circulating through the tray

Since the agar not the alginate is in contact with the prepared teeth maximum

detail is reproduced

Advantages

syringe agar records tissues more accurately

Water cooled tray is not required

Sets faster

Disadvantages

Agar ndash alginate bond failure can occur

Viscous alginate may displace agar

Technique sensitive

Wet field technique

This is a recent technique

The oral tissues are flooded with warm water The syringe material is then

injected in to the surface to be recorded

Before syringe material gels tray material is seated

Page 16

Hydrocolloids

The hydraulic pressure of the viscous tray material forces the fluid syringe

material down in to the areas to be recorded

The motion displaces the syringe material as well as blood and debris through out

the sulcus

ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES

Advantages

1 Hydrophilic Impression material

2 Good elastic properties Good recovery from distortion

3 Can be re-used as a duplicating material

4 Long working time and low material cost

5 No mixing technique

6 High accuracy and fine detail recording

Disadvantages

1 Only one model can be used

2 Extensive and expensive equipment required

3 It can not be electroplated

4 Impossible to sterilize for reuse

5 Low dimensional stability amp tear resistance

TYPES OF FAILURES

1 Distortion- due to

Delayed pouring of impression

Movement of tray during setting

Removal from mouth too early

2 Grainy impression- due to

Inadequate mixing

Page 17

Hydrocolloids

Prolonged mixing

Less water in mix

3 Tearing - due to

Inadequate bulk

Moisture contamination

Removal from mouth too early

Prolonged mixing

4 Bubbles- due to

Early gelation preventing flow

Air incorporated during mixing

5 Irregular voids- due to

Excess moisture ampdebris on

REFERENCES

1 Anusavice ldquoSkinners science of dental materialsrdquo Tenth Edition

2 Dental materials and their selection-willian jorsquo brien

3 Restorative dental materials-craig

4 Removable prosthodintics- stewart

Page 18

  • Constructing a model or cast is an important step in numerous dental procedures Various types of cast amp models can be made from gypsum products using an impression mold or negative likeness of a dental structure An impression is a negative replica of the tissue of the oral cavity It is used to register or reproduce the form and relation of the teeth amp surrounding tissue
  • HISTORY
    • 1558 - Celline described a wax model to make impression in his book MEMORIES
    • 1700 - Matheus G Purenam suggested that wax models can be used in prosthetic work
    • 1728 ndash Pierre Fauchard described various impression materials in his book LE CHIRURGEEN DENTISTE
    • 1756 ndash Persian Phillip Pfaff first used plaster models prepared from sectional wax impression of the mouth
    • 1810 ndash R C Skinner describe about many materials and techniques in his first American book
    • 1928 ndash ADA developed specification No 19 for impression material
    • 1930 ndash Zinc Oxide Eugenol a rigid impression was introduced
    • 1930 ndash Polysulfide was first used as a commercial synthetic rubber as a copolymer of Ethylene Chloride amp sodium
    • 1937 ndash Agar was introduced by Sears
    • 1949 ndash Alginate was developed during World war II
    • 1950 ndash Polysulfide was used in dentistry
    • 1955 ndash Condensation Silicone was introduced in Germany
    • 1975 ndash Addition Silicone was introduced
    • 1977 ndash Costell introduced Dual tray technique
    • 1980 ndash A Visible light cure Polyether Urethane Dimethacrylate rubber impression material was introduced
    • 1996 ndash Blare amp Wassed considered a no of solution used to disinfecting impression material
      • IDEAL REQUIREMENTS OF IMPRESSION MATERIAL
        • 1 Pleasant taste amp odor
        • 2 Not contain any toxic amp irritating ingredients
        • 3 Adequate shelf life
        • 4 Satisfactory consistency and texture
        • 5 Easy to disinfect with out loss of accuracy
        • 6 Compatible with die and cast material
        • 7 Dimensional stability
        • 8 Good elastic properties
        • 9 Easy manipulation
        • 10 Adequate setting characteristics
        • 11 High degree of reproduction details
        • 12 Adequate strength
        • 13 Should not release any gas
        • 14 Economical
        • 15 Should not be technique sensitive
        • 1 Based on rigidityelasticity -
        • a Rigid (non-elastic)
        • b Elastic
        • 2 Based on viscosity -
        • a Mucostatic
        • b Mucocompressive
        • c Pseudoplastic
          • 3 Based on setting of material -
            • 1 a chemical reaction
            • b Physical change of state
            • 2 a reversible
            • b Irreversible
            • 4Based on interaction with salivawater -
            • 1 Hydrophobic
            • 2 Hydrophilic
              • 5Based on chemistry-
                • 1 Impression Plaster
                • 2 Impression compound
                • 3 Metal oxide (zinc oxide eugenol)
                • 4 Reversible hydrocolloid
                • 5 Irreversible hydrocolloid
                • 6 Poly sulfides
                • 7 Condensation silicones
                • 8 Addition silicones
                • 9 Polyether
                • 10 Visible light curing polyether urethane dimethacrylate
                  • 6Based on use -
                    • 1 Primary impression materials
                    • 2 Secondary impression materials
                    • 3 Duplicating materials
                      • HYDROCOLLOIDS
                        • Colloids are often classified as fourth state of matter the Colloidal state In a solution of sugar in water the sugar molecules are uniformly dispersed in the water amp there is no visible physical separation between the solute amp the solvent molecules If sugar molecules replaced with large amp visible particles such as sand the system is Suspension or if molecules are liquid such vegetable oil then system is Emulsion
                        • True solution exists as a single phase However both the colloid amp the suspension have to phase- The dispersed amp Dispersion phase In the colloid the particles in the dispersed phase consist of molecules held together either by primary or secondary force The size of the particles range is 1 ndash 200nm
                          • Gels
                            • Colloids with a liquid as the dispersion medium can exist in two different forms known as Sol amp Gel
                            • A sol has the appearance amp many characteristic of a various liquid
                            • A gel on the contrary is a semi solid amp produced from a soldering process of gelation by the formation of fibrils or chains called Micelles
                            • Gelation is the conversion of a sol to gel amp the temperature at which this occurs is called Gelation Temperature
                              • Gelation may be brought about in one of these ways
                                • Lowering the temperature- It is done by reducing the thermal energy of effectively These forces are secondary molecular forces The bond between the fibrils is weak amp they break at slightly elevated temperature Gelation temp is 37-50degree centigrade
                                • Liquefaction temperature- It is considerable higher than gelation temp amp this property is known as Hysteresis This temp is between 70 -100 degree centigrade
                                • Chemical reaction- Gelation may also induced by chemical reaction where in the dispersed phase of soil is allowed to react with a substance to give a different type of dispersed phase The process is not reversed by an increased temperature
                                  • Types of Hydrocolloids
                                    • REVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS - Reversible hydrocolloids are those sol can be changed to gel but gel canrsquot be reversed back to the solution
                                    • Eg Alginate impression material
                                    • IRREVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS - Irreversible hydrocolloids are those materials where the change from the sol to gel can be brought by lowering the temp of the sol amp the gel can be converted back to sol condition by heating
                                    • Eg Agar ndash Agar
                                      • ALGINATE IRREVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOID
                                        • The word alginate comes from Algin amp named by a chemist of Scotland It was identified as a liner polymer with numerous carboxyl acid groups It is called as irreversible hydrocolloids because gelation is induced by chemical reaction amp transformation is not possible It is the most widely used dental materials
                                        • The principal factors responsible for the success of this type of impression materials are-
                                        • Easy to manipulate
                                        • Comfortable for the patients
                                        • Relatively inexpensive
                                        • Composition
                                        • Potassium or Sodium Alginate- 15 It is the chief active ingredient
                                        • Calcium Sulfate- 16 It is used as a reactor
                                        • Zinc Oxide amp Diatomaceous Earth- Zinc oxide ndash 4 amp Diatomaceous
                                        • earth 60
                                        • Potassium Titanium Fluoride - 3
                                        • Sodium Phosphate - 2
                                          • Gelation Process
                                            • The typical sol-gel reaction is a soluble alginate with calcium sulfate amp the formation of an insoluble calcium alginate gel Calcium sulfate reacts rapidly to produce the in soluble Ca alginate from the potassium or sodium alginate in a aqueous solution The production of calcium alginate is rapid that it does not allow sufficient working time Thus third water soluble salt such as a trisodium phosphate is added to the solution to prolong the working time Thus the reaction between the calcium sulfate amp the soluble alginate is prevented as long as there is uncreated trisodium phosphate
                                            • 2Na3Po4 +n CaSo4 rarrnKaSo4 +Ca alginate
                                            • When the supply of the trisodium phosphate is exhausted the ca ions begin to react with the potassium alginate to produce calcium alginate Kzn Alg +n CaSo4rarr n KaSo4 + Cal alginate
                                            • The added salt is retarder
                                            • Controlling of gelation time-
                                            • An increase in the temp of water used for mixing shorten the working amp setting time
                                            • The proportion of powder amp water also effect the setting time
                                              • PROPERTIES
                                                • Alginate is of two types
                                                • Type I - Fast setting
                                                • Type II - Normal setting
                                                • According to ADA Specification No 18 properties are-
                                                • 1 Mixing time- Creamy consistency come in 45 ndash 60 sec
                                                • 2 Working time-
                                                • - Fast setting material - 12 ndash 2 min
                                                • - Normal set material - 2 ndash 45 min
                                                • 3 Setting or gelation time-
                                                • - Optimum gelation time - 3-4 min at room temp
                                                • - For fast setting material - 1 -2 min
                                                • - For normal setting material - 2 ndash 45min
                                                • 4 Permanent deformation - ADA specification requires 97 recovery amp where 3 is permanent deformation Alginate has 988 recovery amp 15 permanent deformation
                                                • 5 Flexibility- ADA specification permits10 ndash 20 at the stress of 1000gm cm2 Hard material has value of 5-8
                                                • 6 Strength-
                                                • The compressive strength- 5000-8000gmcm2
                                                • Tear strength - 350-700gmcm2
                                                • 7Viscoelasticity Usually an alginate impression material does not adhere to the oral tissue as strongly as some of the non aqueous elastomers so it is easy to remove the alginate impression rapidly
                                                • 8Accuracy Most alginate is not capable of reproducing the finer details that are absorbed in impression with Agar amp other elastomeric impression material
                                                • 9 Dimensional effects - The gel may loss water by evaporation from its surface amp it shrinks
                                                • - If the gel placed in the water it absorbed water amp gel swells
                                                • - Thermal change also contributes to dimensional change The alginate shrinks slightly due to difference in temp between mouth temp(30c) amp room temp(23c)
                                                • 10 Biocompatibility -
                                                • No chemical or allergic reaction associated with alginate
                                                • 11 Shelf life -
                                                • Alginate impressions have shorter shelf life Strong temp amp moisture contamination are two factor which effect the self life of alginate
                                                  • MANIPULATION OF ALGINATE
                                                    • PREPARING THE MIX
                                                    • A measured powder is shifted into pre measured water that has been placed in a clean rubber bowl Care should be taken to avoid whipping air into the mix A vigorous figure 8 motion is best with the mix being swiped or stropped against the side of the mixing rubber bowl with intermittent rotation ie180 degree of the spatula to press out air bubbles The mixing time is 45sec -1 min
                                                    • A variety of mechanical devices are also available for mixing impression material There benefits are convenience speed amp elimination of human error
                                                    • MAKING THE IMPRESSION
                                                    • Before setting the impression the material should have developed sufficient body so that it doesnrsquot flow out of the try A perforated tray is generally used If plastic try or metal rim lock try is selected a thin layer of adhesive should be applied amp allowed to dry before mixing and loading the try The thickness of the alginate between the tray amp tissue should be at least 3mm
                                                    • ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES
                                                    • Advantages
                                                    • 1 Cannot be electroplated
                                                    • 2 Distortion occurs easily
                                                    • 3 Poor dimensional stability (poured within 15 min)
                                                    • 4 Poor tear strength
                                                    • AGAR ndash REVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS
                                                    • When agar hydrocolloids heated they liquefy or go into the sol state amp on cooling they return to the gel state Because this process can be repeated a gel of this type is described as Reversible hydrocolloid The preparation of the agar hydrocolloids for clinical use requires care full control amp yields accurate impression It has been largely replaced by alginate hydrocolloids amp rubber impression materials
                                                      • COMPOSITION
                                                        • Borates - 02 ndash 05 Its works as retarder
                                                        • water - 855 It is reaction medium
                                                        • Agar- 13-17 It is main active constituent of reversible hydrocolloid impression material
                                                        • Sulfates - 1 ndash 2 Accelerators
                                                        • Fillers - 05 -1 Diatomaceous earth silica wax rubber etc used as filler
                                                        • Bactericide - Thymol amp glycerin are used
                                                        • Color amp flavor
                                                          • GELATION PROCESS
                                                            • The setting of the reversible hydrocolloid is called gelation The reaction can be expressed a sol- gel reaction The physical changes from to gel does not return to the sol at the same temp at which it solidified The gel must be heated at the liquefaction temp ie 70 - 100c to form sol Sol transform into a gel at 37-50c the exact gelation temp depended on several factor including the molecular wt the purity of the material amp the ratio of agar to other ingredients
                                                            • The gelation is critical If the temp is high the heat from sol may injury to the soft tissue or if the surface of the sol transforms to a gel as soon as the sol may injure the oral tissues a high surface stress may develop If the gelation temp is too far below the oral temp it will be difficulty or even impossible to chill the material sufficiently to obtain a firm gel to adjacent to the oral tissue The temp lag between the gelation amp liquefaction temp of the gel makes it possible to use as a dental impression material
                                                              • PROPERTIES
                                                                • Gelation temperature -
                                                                • After tempering the sol should be homogenous and should set to a gel between 37 ndash 500c when cooled
                                                                • Viscoelastic properties -
                                                                • It demonstrates the necessity of deforming the impression rapidly when it removed from the mouth which reduces the amount of the permanent deformation The elastic recovery of the hydrocolloid is never complete amp it does not return entirely to its original dimension after deformation The amount of permanent deformation in clinical is negligible provided that -
                                                                • a) The material has adequately gelled
                                                                • b) The impression has been removed rapidly
                                                                • c) The under cuts present in the cavity preparation are minimal
                                                                • Permanent deformation -
                                                                • The ADA specification requires that the permanent deformation should be less than 15 after the material compressed 10 for 30sec This impression material readily meets this requirement with the value of about 1
                                                                • Distortion during gelation -
                                                                • If the material is held rigidly to the tray then the impression material shrinks toward the center of its mass Rapid cooling may cause a concentration of stress near the tray where gelation first takes place
                                                                • Flexibility -
                                                                • The ADA specification requirement for flexibility allows a range of 4-14 amp most agar materials meet this requirement
                                                                • Strength -
                                                                • The compressive strength of Agar impression material is 8000gmcm2
                                                                • The tear strength of Agar is 7000gmcm2
                                                                • Flow -
                                                                • Agar is sufficiently fluid to allow detailed reproduction of hard amp soft tissue
                                                                • Compatibility with gypsum -
                                                                • Not all the agar impression materials are equally compatible with all gypsum products The impression should be washed of saliva amp any trace of blood which retarded the setting of gypsum
                                                                  • Manipulation of agar impression
                                                                    • The use of agar hydrocolloid involves special equipment called conditioning unit for agar The hydrocolloid is usually supplied In two forms syringe and tray materials The only difference between the materials is the color and the greater fluidity of the syringe material
                                                                      • Impression tray
                                                                        • It is rim locked trays with water circulating device This types of trays should allow a space of 3mm occlusally and laterally and extend distally to cover all the teeth After the tray has been properly positioned water is circulated at 13 degrees through the tray until gelation occurs
                                                                          • Preparation of material
                                                                            • Proper equipment of liquefying and storing the agar impression material is essential
                                                                            • At first reverse the hydrocolloid gel to the sol stage Boiling water is a convenient way of liquefying the material The material must be held at this temperature for a minimum of 10mins Propylene glycol can be added to the water to obtain 100 degrees After it has been liquefied the material must be stored in the tray The material can be stored for several days Usually there are three compartments in the conditioning unit making it possible to liquefy store and temper the material
                                                                              • Conditioning and tempering
                                                                                • Because 55 degree is the maximum tolerable temperature the storage temperature of 65 degrees would be too hot for the oral tissues especially given the bulk of the tray material Therefore the material that is used to fill the tray must be cooled and tempered Eliminating the effect of imbibition is the purpose of placing the gauze pad over the tempering tray materials When the tray material is placed into the tempering bath the gauze is removed and the contaminating surface layer of material clings to the gauze and is removed as well
                                                                                  • Making the impression
                                                                                    • The syringe material is taken directly from the storage compartment and applied to the prepared cavities It is first applied to the base of the preparation and then the reminder of the tooth is covered By the time the cavity preparation and adjoining teeth have been covered the tray material has been properly tempered and is now ready to be placed immediately in the mouth to form the bulk of impression Gelation is accelerated by circulating cool water approximately 18 ndash 21 degrees through the tray for 3 ndash 5 minutes
                                                                                      • Disinfection of hydrocolloid impression
                                                                                        • As the hydrocolloid impression material must be poured within short time after removal from the mouth The disinfection procedure should be relatively rapid to prevent the dimensional change Most manufacturers recommended a specific disinfectant The agent may be iodophor bleach or gluteraldehyde The distortion is minimal if the recommended immersion time is followed and if the impression is poured properly The irreversible hydrocolloid may be disinfected by 10 minute immersion inor spraying with the antimicrobial agent such as NaOCl and glutaraldehyde without sufficient dimensional change The current protocol for disinfecting hydrocolloid impression is to use household bleach iodophor and synthetic phenols as disinfectants After the immersion it is thoroughly rinsed The disinfectant is sprayed liberally o the exposed surface The immersion should not be submerged or soaked in the disinfectant solution
                                                                                          • ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES
                                                                                          • TYPES OF FAILURES
                                                                                            • 1 Distortion- due to
                                                                                            • Delayed pouring of impression
                                                                                            • Movement of tray during setting
                                                                                            • Removal from mouth too early
                                                                                            • 2 Grainy impression- due to
                                                                                            • Inadequate mixing
                                                                                            • Prolonged mixing
                                                                                            • Less water in mix
                                                                                            • 3 Tearing - due to
                                                                                            • Inadequate bulk
                                                                                            • Moisture contamination
                                                                                            • Removal from mouth too early
                                                                                            • Prolonged mixing
                                                                                            • 4 Bubbles- due to
                                                                                            • Early gelation preventing flow
                                                                                            • Air incorporated during mixing
                                                                                            • 5 Irregular voids- due to
                                                                                            • Excess moisture ampdebris on
                                                                                              • 1 Anusavice ldquoSkinners science of dental materialsrdquo Tenth Edition
Page 11: Hydroco Llo Ids / orthodontic courses by Indian dental academy

Hydrocolloids

The alginate impression material with color indications avoiding confusion about setting

time

Color changes are visualizing the major decision points in impression making

end of mixing time

end of setting time ( tray can be removed from mouth)

it indicates two color changes

Violet to pink indicates the end of mixing time

Pink to white indicates end of setting time

Other advantages of this material are

-improved dimensional stability (upto 5 days)

Good tear and deformation resistance

Dust free

Smooth surface optimum gypsum compatibility

ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES

Advantages

1 Easy to mix and manipulate

2 Minimum requirement of equipment

3 Accuracy (if properly handled)

4 Low cost

5 Comfortable to the patient

6 Hygienic (as fresh material is used for each impression)

Disadvantages

1 Cannot be electroplated

2 Distortion occurs easily

3 Poor dimensional stability (poured within 15 min)

4 Poor tear strength

AGAR ndash REVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS

Page 11

Hydrocolloids

When agar hydrocolloids heated they liquefy or go into the sol state amp on cooling they

return to the gel state Because this process can be repeated a gel of this type is

described as Reversible hydrocolloid The preparation of the agar hydrocolloids for

clinical use requires care full control amp yields accurate impression It has been largely

replaced by alginate hydrocolloids amp rubber impression materials

COMPOSITION

Borates - 02 ndash 05 Its works as retarder

water - 855 It is reaction medium

Agar- 13-17 It is main active constituent of reversible

hydrocolloid impression material

Sulfates - 1 ndash 2 Accelerators

Fillers - 05 -1 Diatomaceous earth silica wax rubber etc

used as filler

Bactericide - Thymol amp glycerin are used

Color amp flavor

GELATION PROCESS

The setting of the reversible hydrocolloid is called gelation The reaction can be

expressed a sol- gel reaction The physical changes from to gel does not return to the sol at

the same temp at which it solidified The gel must be heated at the liquefaction temp ie 70 -

100c to form sol Sol transform into a gel at 37-50c the exact gelation temp depended on

several factor including the molecular wt the purity of the material amp the ratio of agar to

other ingredients

The gelation is critical If the temp is high the heat from sol may injury to the soft

tissue or if the surface of the sol transforms to a gel as soon as the sol may injure the oral

tissues a high surface stress may develop If the gelation temp is too far below the oral

temp it will be difficulty or even impossible to chill the material sufficiently to obtain a firm

Page 12

Hydrocolloids

gel to adjacent to the oral tissue The temp lag between the gelation amp liquefaction temp of

the gel makes it possible to use as a dental impression material

PROPERTIES

Gelation temperature -

After tempering the sol should be homogenous and should set to a gel between 37

ndash 500c when cooled

Viscoelastic properties -

It demonstrates the necessity of deforming the impression rapidly when it removed

from the mouth which reduces the amount of the permanent deformation The elastic

recovery of the hydrocolloid is never complete amp it does not return entirely to its original

dimension after deformation The amount of permanent deformation in clinical is

negligible provided that -

a) The material has adequately gelled

b) The impression has been removed rapidly

c) The under cuts present in the cavity preparation are minimal

Permanent deformation -

The ADA specification requires that the permanent deformation should be less than

15 after the material compressed 10 for 30sec This impression material readily meets

this requirement with the value of about 1

Distortion during gelation -

If the material is held rigidly to the tray then the impression material shrinks

toward the center of its mass Rapid cooling may cause a concentration of stress near the

tray where gelation first takes place

Flexibility -

The ADA specification requirement for flexibility allows a range of 4-14 amp most

agar materials meet this requirement

Strength -

The compressive strength of Agar impression material is 8000gmcm2

The tear strength of Agar is 7000gmcm2

Page 13

Hydrocolloids

Flow -

Agar is sufficiently fluid to allow detailed reproduction of hard amp soft tissue

Compatibility with gypsum -

Not all the agar impression materials are equally compatible with all gypsum

products The impression should be washed of saliva amp any trace of blood which

retarded the setting of gypsum

Manipulation of agar impression

The use of agar hydrocolloid involves special equipment called conditioning

unit for agar The hydrocolloid is usually supplied In two forms syringe and tray

materials The only difference between the materials is the color and the greater fluidity of

the syringe material

Impression tray

It is rim locked trays with water circulating device This types of trays should

allow a space of 3mm occlusally and laterally and extend distally to cover all the teeth

After the tray has been properly positioned water is circulated at 13 degrees through the

tray until gelation occurs

Preparation of material

Proper equipment of liquefying and storing the agar impression material is essential

At first reverse the hydrocolloid gel to the sol stage Boiling water is a convenient

way of liquefying the material The material must be held at this temperature for a

minimum of 10mins Propylene glycol can be added to the water to obtain 100 degrees

After it has been liquefied the material must be stored in the tray The material can be

stored for several days Usually there are three compartments in the conditioning unit

making it possible to liquefy store and temper the material

Page 14

Hydrocolloids

Conditioning and tempering

Because 55 degree is the maximum tolerable temperature the storage temperature

of 65 degrees would be too hot for the oral tissues especially given the bulk of the tray

material Therefore the material that is used to fill the tray must be cooled and tempered

Eliminating the effect of imbibition is the purpose of placing the gauze pad over the

tempering tray materials When the tray material is placed into the tempering bath the

gauze is removed and the contaminating surface layer of material clings to the gauze and is

removed as well

Making the impression

The syringe material is taken directly from the storage compartment and applied to

the prepared cavities It is first applied to the base of the preparation and then the reminder

of the tooth is covered By the time the cavity preparation and adjoining teeth have been

covered the tray material has been properly tempered and is now ready to be placed

immediately in the mouth to form the bulk of impression Gelation is accelerated by

circulating cool water approximately 18 ndash 21 degrees through the tray for 3 ndash 5 minutes

Disinfection of hydrocolloid impression

As the hydrocolloid impression material must be poured within short time after

removal from the mouth The disinfection procedure should be relatively rapid to prevent

the dimensional change Most manufacturers recommended a specific disinfectant The

agent may be iodophor bleach or gluteraldehyde The distortion is minimal if the

recommended immersion time is followed and if the impression is poured properly The

irreversible hydrocolloid may be disinfected by 10 minute immersion inor spraying with

the antimicrobial agent such as NaOCl and glutaraldehyde without sufficient dimensional

change The current protocol for disinfecting hydrocolloid impression is to use household

bleach iodophor and synthetic phenols as disinfectants After the immersion it is

thoroughly rinsed The disinfectant is sprayed liberally o the exposed surface The

immersion should not be submerged or soaked in the disinfectant solution

Page 15

Hydrocolloids

Recent techniques

Laminate technique

A recent modification of the conventional procedure is the combined agar alginate

technique The hydrocolloid in the tray is replaced with a mix of chilled alginate

that bonds with the agar expressed from a syringe

The alginate gels by a chemical reaction whereas the agar gels by means of

contact with cool alginate rather than with the water circulating through the tray

Since the agar not the alginate is in contact with the prepared teeth maximum

detail is reproduced

Advantages

syringe agar records tissues more accurately

Water cooled tray is not required

Sets faster

Disadvantages

Agar ndash alginate bond failure can occur

Viscous alginate may displace agar

Technique sensitive

Wet field technique

This is a recent technique

The oral tissues are flooded with warm water The syringe material is then

injected in to the surface to be recorded

Before syringe material gels tray material is seated

Page 16

Hydrocolloids

The hydraulic pressure of the viscous tray material forces the fluid syringe

material down in to the areas to be recorded

The motion displaces the syringe material as well as blood and debris through out

the sulcus

ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES

Advantages

1 Hydrophilic Impression material

2 Good elastic properties Good recovery from distortion

3 Can be re-used as a duplicating material

4 Long working time and low material cost

5 No mixing technique

6 High accuracy and fine detail recording

Disadvantages

1 Only one model can be used

2 Extensive and expensive equipment required

3 It can not be electroplated

4 Impossible to sterilize for reuse

5 Low dimensional stability amp tear resistance

TYPES OF FAILURES

1 Distortion- due to

Delayed pouring of impression

Movement of tray during setting

Removal from mouth too early

2 Grainy impression- due to

Inadequate mixing

Page 17

Hydrocolloids

Prolonged mixing

Less water in mix

3 Tearing - due to

Inadequate bulk

Moisture contamination

Removal from mouth too early

Prolonged mixing

4 Bubbles- due to

Early gelation preventing flow

Air incorporated during mixing

5 Irregular voids- due to

Excess moisture ampdebris on

REFERENCES

1 Anusavice ldquoSkinners science of dental materialsrdquo Tenth Edition

2 Dental materials and their selection-willian jorsquo brien

3 Restorative dental materials-craig

4 Removable prosthodintics- stewart

Page 18

  • Constructing a model or cast is an important step in numerous dental procedures Various types of cast amp models can be made from gypsum products using an impression mold or negative likeness of a dental structure An impression is a negative replica of the tissue of the oral cavity It is used to register or reproduce the form and relation of the teeth amp surrounding tissue
  • HISTORY
    • 1558 - Celline described a wax model to make impression in his book MEMORIES
    • 1700 - Matheus G Purenam suggested that wax models can be used in prosthetic work
    • 1728 ndash Pierre Fauchard described various impression materials in his book LE CHIRURGEEN DENTISTE
    • 1756 ndash Persian Phillip Pfaff first used plaster models prepared from sectional wax impression of the mouth
    • 1810 ndash R C Skinner describe about many materials and techniques in his first American book
    • 1928 ndash ADA developed specification No 19 for impression material
    • 1930 ndash Zinc Oxide Eugenol a rigid impression was introduced
    • 1930 ndash Polysulfide was first used as a commercial synthetic rubber as a copolymer of Ethylene Chloride amp sodium
    • 1937 ndash Agar was introduced by Sears
    • 1949 ndash Alginate was developed during World war II
    • 1950 ndash Polysulfide was used in dentistry
    • 1955 ndash Condensation Silicone was introduced in Germany
    • 1975 ndash Addition Silicone was introduced
    • 1977 ndash Costell introduced Dual tray technique
    • 1980 ndash A Visible light cure Polyether Urethane Dimethacrylate rubber impression material was introduced
    • 1996 ndash Blare amp Wassed considered a no of solution used to disinfecting impression material
      • IDEAL REQUIREMENTS OF IMPRESSION MATERIAL
        • 1 Pleasant taste amp odor
        • 2 Not contain any toxic amp irritating ingredients
        • 3 Adequate shelf life
        • 4 Satisfactory consistency and texture
        • 5 Easy to disinfect with out loss of accuracy
        • 6 Compatible with die and cast material
        • 7 Dimensional stability
        • 8 Good elastic properties
        • 9 Easy manipulation
        • 10 Adequate setting characteristics
        • 11 High degree of reproduction details
        • 12 Adequate strength
        • 13 Should not release any gas
        • 14 Economical
        • 15 Should not be technique sensitive
        • 1 Based on rigidityelasticity -
        • a Rigid (non-elastic)
        • b Elastic
        • 2 Based on viscosity -
        • a Mucostatic
        • b Mucocompressive
        • c Pseudoplastic
          • 3 Based on setting of material -
            • 1 a chemical reaction
            • b Physical change of state
            • 2 a reversible
            • b Irreversible
            • 4Based on interaction with salivawater -
            • 1 Hydrophobic
            • 2 Hydrophilic
              • 5Based on chemistry-
                • 1 Impression Plaster
                • 2 Impression compound
                • 3 Metal oxide (zinc oxide eugenol)
                • 4 Reversible hydrocolloid
                • 5 Irreversible hydrocolloid
                • 6 Poly sulfides
                • 7 Condensation silicones
                • 8 Addition silicones
                • 9 Polyether
                • 10 Visible light curing polyether urethane dimethacrylate
                  • 6Based on use -
                    • 1 Primary impression materials
                    • 2 Secondary impression materials
                    • 3 Duplicating materials
                      • HYDROCOLLOIDS
                        • Colloids are often classified as fourth state of matter the Colloidal state In a solution of sugar in water the sugar molecules are uniformly dispersed in the water amp there is no visible physical separation between the solute amp the solvent molecules If sugar molecules replaced with large amp visible particles such as sand the system is Suspension or if molecules are liquid such vegetable oil then system is Emulsion
                        • True solution exists as a single phase However both the colloid amp the suspension have to phase- The dispersed amp Dispersion phase In the colloid the particles in the dispersed phase consist of molecules held together either by primary or secondary force The size of the particles range is 1 ndash 200nm
                          • Gels
                            • Colloids with a liquid as the dispersion medium can exist in two different forms known as Sol amp Gel
                            • A sol has the appearance amp many characteristic of a various liquid
                            • A gel on the contrary is a semi solid amp produced from a soldering process of gelation by the formation of fibrils or chains called Micelles
                            • Gelation is the conversion of a sol to gel amp the temperature at which this occurs is called Gelation Temperature
                              • Gelation may be brought about in one of these ways
                                • Lowering the temperature- It is done by reducing the thermal energy of effectively These forces are secondary molecular forces The bond between the fibrils is weak amp they break at slightly elevated temperature Gelation temp is 37-50degree centigrade
                                • Liquefaction temperature- It is considerable higher than gelation temp amp this property is known as Hysteresis This temp is between 70 -100 degree centigrade
                                • Chemical reaction- Gelation may also induced by chemical reaction where in the dispersed phase of soil is allowed to react with a substance to give a different type of dispersed phase The process is not reversed by an increased temperature
                                  • Types of Hydrocolloids
                                    • REVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS - Reversible hydrocolloids are those sol can be changed to gel but gel canrsquot be reversed back to the solution
                                    • Eg Alginate impression material
                                    • IRREVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS - Irreversible hydrocolloids are those materials where the change from the sol to gel can be brought by lowering the temp of the sol amp the gel can be converted back to sol condition by heating
                                    • Eg Agar ndash Agar
                                      • ALGINATE IRREVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOID
                                        • The word alginate comes from Algin amp named by a chemist of Scotland It was identified as a liner polymer with numerous carboxyl acid groups It is called as irreversible hydrocolloids because gelation is induced by chemical reaction amp transformation is not possible It is the most widely used dental materials
                                        • The principal factors responsible for the success of this type of impression materials are-
                                        • Easy to manipulate
                                        • Comfortable for the patients
                                        • Relatively inexpensive
                                        • Composition
                                        • Potassium or Sodium Alginate- 15 It is the chief active ingredient
                                        • Calcium Sulfate- 16 It is used as a reactor
                                        • Zinc Oxide amp Diatomaceous Earth- Zinc oxide ndash 4 amp Diatomaceous
                                        • earth 60
                                        • Potassium Titanium Fluoride - 3
                                        • Sodium Phosphate - 2
                                          • Gelation Process
                                            • The typical sol-gel reaction is a soluble alginate with calcium sulfate amp the formation of an insoluble calcium alginate gel Calcium sulfate reacts rapidly to produce the in soluble Ca alginate from the potassium or sodium alginate in a aqueous solution The production of calcium alginate is rapid that it does not allow sufficient working time Thus third water soluble salt such as a trisodium phosphate is added to the solution to prolong the working time Thus the reaction between the calcium sulfate amp the soluble alginate is prevented as long as there is uncreated trisodium phosphate
                                            • 2Na3Po4 +n CaSo4 rarrnKaSo4 +Ca alginate
                                            • When the supply of the trisodium phosphate is exhausted the ca ions begin to react with the potassium alginate to produce calcium alginate Kzn Alg +n CaSo4rarr n KaSo4 + Cal alginate
                                            • The added salt is retarder
                                            • Controlling of gelation time-
                                            • An increase in the temp of water used for mixing shorten the working amp setting time
                                            • The proportion of powder amp water also effect the setting time
                                              • PROPERTIES
                                                • Alginate is of two types
                                                • Type I - Fast setting
                                                • Type II - Normal setting
                                                • According to ADA Specification No 18 properties are-
                                                • 1 Mixing time- Creamy consistency come in 45 ndash 60 sec
                                                • 2 Working time-
                                                • - Fast setting material - 12 ndash 2 min
                                                • - Normal set material - 2 ndash 45 min
                                                • 3 Setting or gelation time-
                                                • - Optimum gelation time - 3-4 min at room temp
                                                • - For fast setting material - 1 -2 min
                                                • - For normal setting material - 2 ndash 45min
                                                • 4 Permanent deformation - ADA specification requires 97 recovery amp where 3 is permanent deformation Alginate has 988 recovery amp 15 permanent deformation
                                                • 5 Flexibility- ADA specification permits10 ndash 20 at the stress of 1000gm cm2 Hard material has value of 5-8
                                                • 6 Strength-
                                                • The compressive strength- 5000-8000gmcm2
                                                • Tear strength - 350-700gmcm2
                                                • 7Viscoelasticity Usually an alginate impression material does not adhere to the oral tissue as strongly as some of the non aqueous elastomers so it is easy to remove the alginate impression rapidly
                                                • 8Accuracy Most alginate is not capable of reproducing the finer details that are absorbed in impression with Agar amp other elastomeric impression material
                                                • 9 Dimensional effects - The gel may loss water by evaporation from its surface amp it shrinks
                                                • - If the gel placed in the water it absorbed water amp gel swells
                                                • - Thermal change also contributes to dimensional change The alginate shrinks slightly due to difference in temp between mouth temp(30c) amp room temp(23c)
                                                • 10 Biocompatibility -
                                                • No chemical or allergic reaction associated with alginate
                                                • 11 Shelf life -
                                                • Alginate impressions have shorter shelf life Strong temp amp moisture contamination are two factor which effect the self life of alginate
                                                  • MANIPULATION OF ALGINATE
                                                    • PREPARING THE MIX
                                                    • A measured powder is shifted into pre measured water that has been placed in a clean rubber bowl Care should be taken to avoid whipping air into the mix A vigorous figure 8 motion is best with the mix being swiped or stropped against the side of the mixing rubber bowl with intermittent rotation ie180 degree of the spatula to press out air bubbles The mixing time is 45sec -1 min
                                                    • A variety of mechanical devices are also available for mixing impression material There benefits are convenience speed amp elimination of human error
                                                    • MAKING THE IMPRESSION
                                                    • Before setting the impression the material should have developed sufficient body so that it doesnrsquot flow out of the try A perforated tray is generally used If plastic try or metal rim lock try is selected a thin layer of adhesive should be applied amp allowed to dry before mixing and loading the try The thickness of the alginate between the tray amp tissue should be at least 3mm
                                                    • ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES
                                                    • Advantages
                                                    • 1 Cannot be electroplated
                                                    • 2 Distortion occurs easily
                                                    • 3 Poor dimensional stability (poured within 15 min)
                                                    • 4 Poor tear strength
                                                    • AGAR ndash REVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS
                                                    • When agar hydrocolloids heated they liquefy or go into the sol state amp on cooling they return to the gel state Because this process can be repeated a gel of this type is described as Reversible hydrocolloid The preparation of the agar hydrocolloids for clinical use requires care full control amp yields accurate impression It has been largely replaced by alginate hydrocolloids amp rubber impression materials
                                                      • COMPOSITION
                                                        • Borates - 02 ndash 05 Its works as retarder
                                                        • water - 855 It is reaction medium
                                                        • Agar- 13-17 It is main active constituent of reversible hydrocolloid impression material
                                                        • Sulfates - 1 ndash 2 Accelerators
                                                        • Fillers - 05 -1 Diatomaceous earth silica wax rubber etc used as filler
                                                        • Bactericide - Thymol amp glycerin are used
                                                        • Color amp flavor
                                                          • GELATION PROCESS
                                                            • The setting of the reversible hydrocolloid is called gelation The reaction can be expressed a sol- gel reaction The physical changes from to gel does not return to the sol at the same temp at which it solidified The gel must be heated at the liquefaction temp ie 70 - 100c to form sol Sol transform into a gel at 37-50c the exact gelation temp depended on several factor including the molecular wt the purity of the material amp the ratio of agar to other ingredients
                                                            • The gelation is critical If the temp is high the heat from sol may injury to the soft tissue or if the surface of the sol transforms to a gel as soon as the sol may injure the oral tissues a high surface stress may develop If the gelation temp is too far below the oral temp it will be difficulty or even impossible to chill the material sufficiently to obtain a firm gel to adjacent to the oral tissue The temp lag between the gelation amp liquefaction temp of the gel makes it possible to use as a dental impression material
                                                              • PROPERTIES
                                                                • Gelation temperature -
                                                                • After tempering the sol should be homogenous and should set to a gel between 37 ndash 500c when cooled
                                                                • Viscoelastic properties -
                                                                • It demonstrates the necessity of deforming the impression rapidly when it removed from the mouth which reduces the amount of the permanent deformation The elastic recovery of the hydrocolloid is never complete amp it does not return entirely to its original dimension after deformation The amount of permanent deformation in clinical is negligible provided that -
                                                                • a) The material has adequately gelled
                                                                • b) The impression has been removed rapidly
                                                                • c) The under cuts present in the cavity preparation are minimal
                                                                • Permanent deformation -
                                                                • The ADA specification requires that the permanent deformation should be less than 15 after the material compressed 10 for 30sec This impression material readily meets this requirement with the value of about 1
                                                                • Distortion during gelation -
                                                                • If the material is held rigidly to the tray then the impression material shrinks toward the center of its mass Rapid cooling may cause a concentration of stress near the tray where gelation first takes place
                                                                • Flexibility -
                                                                • The ADA specification requirement for flexibility allows a range of 4-14 amp most agar materials meet this requirement
                                                                • Strength -
                                                                • The compressive strength of Agar impression material is 8000gmcm2
                                                                • The tear strength of Agar is 7000gmcm2
                                                                • Flow -
                                                                • Agar is sufficiently fluid to allow detailed reproduction of hard amp soft tissue
                                                                • Compatibility with gypsum -
                                                                • Not all the agar impression materials are equally compatible with all gypsum products The impression should be washed of saliva amp any trace of blood which retarded the setting of gypsum
                                                                  • Manipulation of agar impression
                                                                    • The use of agar hydrocolloid involves special equipment called conditioning unit for agar The hydrocolloid is usually supplied In two forms syringe and tray materials The only difference between the materials is the color and the greater fluidity of the syringe material
                                                                      • Impression tray
                                                                        • It is rim locked trays with water circulating device This types of trays should allow a space of 3mm occlusally and laterally and extend distally to cover all the teeth After the tray has been properly positioned water is circulated at 13 degrees through the tray until gelation occurs
                                                                          • Preparation of material
                                                                            • Proper equipment of liquefying and storing the agar impression material is essential
                                                                            • At first reverse the hydrocolloid gel to the sol stage Boiling water is a convenient way of liquefying the material The material must be held at this temperature for a minimum of 10mins Propylene glycol can be added to the water to obtain 100 degrees After it has been liquefied the material must be stored in the tray The material can be stored for several days Usually there are three compartments in the conditioning unit making it possible to liquefy store and temper the material
                                                                              • Conditioning and tempering
                                                                                • Because 55 degree is the maximum tolerable temperature the storage temperature of 65 degrees would be too hot for the oral tissues especially given the bulk of the tray material Therefore the material that is used to fill the tray must be cooled and tempered Eliminating the effect of imbibition is the purpose of placing the gauze pad over the tempering tray materials When the tray material is placed into the tempering bath the gauze is removed and the contaminating surface layer of material clings to the gauze and is removed as well
                                                                                  • Making the impression
                                                                                    • The syringe material is taken directly from the storage compartment and applied to the prepared cavities It is first applied to the base of the preparation and then the reminder of the tooth is covered By the time the cavity preparation and adjoining teeth have been covered the tray material has been properly tempered and is now ready to be placed immediately in the mouth to form the bulk of impression Gelation is accelerated by circulating cool water approximately 18 ndash 21 degrees through the tray for 3 ndash 5 minutes
                                                                                      • Disinfection of hydrocolloid impression
                                                                                        • As the hydrocolloid impression material must be poured within short time after removal from the mouth The disinfection procedure should be relatively rapid to prevent the dimensional change Most manufacturers recommended a specific disinfectant The agent may be iodophor bleach or gluteraldehyde The distortion is minimal if the recommended immersion time is followed and if the impression is poured properly The irreversible hydrocolloid may be disinfected by 10 minute immersion inor spraying with the antimicrobial agent such as NaOCl and glutaraldehyde without sufficient dimensional change The current protocol for disinfecting hydrocolloid impression is to use household bleach iodophor and synthetic phenols as disinfectants After the immersion it is thoroughly rinsed The disinfectant is sprayed liberally o the exposed surface The immersion should not be submerged or soaked in the disinfectant solution
                                                                                          • ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES
                                                                                          • TYPES OF FAILURES
                                                                                            • 1 Distortion- due to
                                                                                            • Delayed pouring of impression
                                                                                            • Movement of tray during setting
                                                                                            • Removal from mouth too early
                                                                                            • 2 Grainy impression- due to
                                                                                            • Inadequate mixing
                                                                                            • Prolonged mixing
                                                                                            • Less water in mix
                                                                                            • 3 Tearing - due to
                                                                                            • Inadequate bulk
                                                                                            • Moisture contamination
                                                                                            • Removal from mouth too early
                                                                                            • Prolonged mixing
                                                                                            • 4 Bubbles- due to
                                                                                            • Early gelation preventing flow
                                                                                            • Air incorporated during mixing
                                                                                            • 5 Irregular voids- due to
                                                                                            • Excess moisture ampdebris on
                                                                                              • 1 Anusavice ldquoSkinners science of dental materialsrdquo Tenth Edition
Page 12: Hydroco Llo Ids / orthodontic courses by Indian dental academy

Hydrocolloids

When agar hydrocolloids heated they liquefy or go into the sol state amp on cooling they

return to the gel state Because this process can be repeated a gel of this type is

described as Reversible hydrocolloid The preparation of the agar hydrocolloids for

clinical use requires care full control amp yields accurate impression It has been largely

replaced by alginate hydrocolloids amp rubber impression materials

COMPOSITION

Borates - 02 ndash 05 Its works as retarder

water - 855 It is reaction medium

Agar- 13-17 It is main active constituent of reversible

hydrocolloid impression material

Sulfates - 1 ndash 2 Accelerators

Fillers - 05 -1 Diatomaceous earth silica wax rubber etc

used as filler

Bactericide - Thymol amp glycerin are used

Color amp flavor

GELATION PROCESS

The setting of the reversible hydrocolloid is called gelation The reaction can be

expressed a sol- gel reaction The physical changes from to gel does not return to the sol at

the same temp at which it solidified The gel must be heated at the liquefaction temp ie 70 -

100c to form sol Sol transform into a gel at 37-50c the exact gelation temp depended on

several factor including the molecular wt the purity of the material amp the ratio of agar to

other ingredients

The gelation is critical If the temp is high the heat from sol may injury to the soft

tissue or if the surface of the sol transforms to a gel as soon as the sol may injure the oral

tissues a high surface stress may develop If the gelation temp is too far below the oral

temp it will be difficulty or even impossible to chill the material sufficiently to obtain a firm

Page 12

Hydrocolloids

gel to adjacent to the oral tissue The temp lag between the gelation amp liquefaction temp of

the gel makes it possible to use as a dental impression material

PROPERTIES

Gelation temperature -

After tempering the sol should be homogenous and should set to a gel between 37

ndash 500c when cooled

Viscoelastic properties -

It demonstrates the necessity of deforming the impression rapidly when it removed

from the mouth which reduces the amount of the permanent deformation The elastic

recovery of the hydrocolloid is never complete amp it does not return entirely to its original

dimension after deformation The amount of permanent deformation in clinical is

negligible provided that -

a) The material has adequately gelled

b) The impression has been removed rapidly

c) The under cuts present in the cavity preparation are minimal

Permanent deformation -

The ADA specification requires that the permanent deformation should be less than

15 after the material compressed 10 for 30sec This impression material readily meets

this requirement with the value of about 1

Distortion during gelation -

If the material is held rigidly to the tray then the impression material shrinks

toward the center of its mass Rapid cooling may cause a concentration of stress near the

tray where gelation first takes place

Flexibility -

The ADA specification requirement for flexibility allows a range of 4-14 amp most

agar materials meet this requirement

Strength -

The compressive strength of Agar impression material is 8000gmcm2

The tear strength of Agar is 7000gmcm2

Page 13

Hydrocolloids

Flow -

Agar is sufficiently fluid to allow detailed reproduction of hard amp soft tissue

Compatibility with gypsum -

Not all the agar impression materials are equally compatible with all gypsum

products The impression should be washed of saliva amp any trace of blood which

retarded the setting of gypsum

Manipulation of agar impression

The use of agar hydrocolloid involves special equipment called conditioning

unit for agar The hydrocolloid is usually supplied In two forms syringe and tray

materials The only difference between the materials is the color and the greater fluidity of

the syringe material

Impression tray

It is rim locked trays with water circulating device This types of trays should

allow a space of 3mm occlusally and laterally and extend distally to cover all the teeth

After the tray has been properly positioned water is circulated at 13 degrees through the

tray until gelation occurs

Preparation of material

Proper equipment of liquefying and storing the agar impression material is essential

At first reverse the hydrocolloid gel to the sol stage Boiling water is a convenient

way of liquefying the material The material must be held at this temperature for a

minimum of 10mins Propylene glycol can be added to the water to obtain 100 degrees

After it has been liquefied the material must be stored in the tray The material can be

stored for several days Usually there are three compartments in the conditioning unit

making it possible to liquefy store and temper the material

Page 14

Hydrocolloids

Conditioning and tempering

Because 55 degree is the maximum tolerable temperature the storage temperature

of 65 degrees would be too hot for the oral tissues especially given the bulk of the tray

material Therefore the material that is used to fill the tray must be cooled and tempered

Eliminating the effect of imbibition is the purpose of placing the gauze pad over the

tempering tray materials When the tray material is placed into the tempering bath the

gauze is removed and the contaminating surface layer of material clings to the gauze and is

removed as well

Making the impression

The syringe material is taken directly from the storage compartment and applied to

the prepared cavities It is first applied to the base of the preparation and then the reminder

of the tooth is covered By the time the cavity preparation and adjoining teeth have been

covered the tray material has been properly tempered and is now ready to be placed

immediately in the mouth to form the bulk of impression Gelation is accelerated by

circulating cool water approximately 18 ndash 21 degrees through the tray for 3 ndash 5 minutes

Disinfection of hydrocolloid impression

As the hydrocolloid impression material must be poured within short time after

removal from the mouth The disinfection procedure should be relatively rapid to prevent

the dimensional change Most manufacturers recommended a specific disinfectant The

agent may be iodophor bleach or gluteraldehyde The distortion is minimal if the

recommended immersion time is followed and if the impression is poured properly The

irreversible hydrocolloid may be disinfected by 10 minute immersion inor spraying with

the antimicrobial agent such as NaOCl and glutaraldehyde without sufficient dimensional

change The current protocol for disinfecting hydrocolloid impression is to use household

bleach iodophor and synthetic phenols as disinfectants After the immersion it is

thoroughly rinsed The disinfectant is sprayed liberally o the exposed surface The

immersion should not be submerged or soaked in the disinfectant solution

Page 15

Hydrocolloids

Recent techniques

Laminate technique

A recent modification of the conventional procedure is the combined agar alginate

technique The hydrocolloid in the tray is replaced with a mix of chilled alginate

that bonds with the agar expressed from a syringe

The alginate gels by a chemical reaction whereas the agar gels by means of

contact with cool alginate rather than with the water circulating through the tray

Since the agar not the alginate is in contact with the prepared teeth maximum

detail is reproduced

Advantages

syringe agar records tissues more accurately

Water cooled tray is not required

Sets faster

Disadvantages

Agar ndash alginate bond failure can occur

Viscous alginate may displace agar

Technique sensitive

Wet field technique

This is a recent technique

The oral tissues are flooded with warm water The syringe material is then

injected in to the surface to be recorded

Before syringe material gels tray material is seated

Page 16

Hydrocolloids

The hydraulic pressure of the viscous tray material forces the fluid syringe

material down in to the areas to be recorded

The motion displaces the syringe material as well as blood and debris through out

the sulcus

ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES

Advantages

1 Hydrophilic Impression material

2 Good elastic properties Good recovery from distortion

3 Can be re-used as a duplicating material

4 Long working time and low material cost

5 No mixing technique

6 High accuracy and fine detail recording

Disadvantages

1 Only one model can be used

2 Extensive and expensive equipment required

3 It can not be electroplated

4 Impossible to sterilize for reuse

5 Low dimensional stability amp tear resistance

TYPES OF FAILURES

1 Distortion- due to

Delayed pouring of impression

Movement of tray during setting

Removal from mouth too early

2 Grainy impression- due to

Inadequate mixing

Page 17

Hydrocolloids

Prolonged mixing

Less water in mix

3 Tearing - due to

Inadequate bulk

Moisture contamination

Removal from mouth too early

Prolonged mixing

4 Bubbles- due to

Early gelation preventing flow

Air incorporated during mixing

5 Irregular voids- due to

Excess moisture ampdebris on

REFERENCES

1 Anusavice ldquoSkinners science of dental materialsrdquo Tenth Edition

2 Dental materials and their selection-willian jorsquo brien

3 Restorative dental materials-craig

4 Removable prosthodintics- stewart

Page 18

  • Constructing a model or cast is an important step in numerous dental procedures Various types of cast amp models can be made from gypsum products using an impression mold or negative likeness of a dental structure An impression is a negative replica of the tissue of the oral cavity It is used to register or reproduce the form and relation of the teeth amp surrounding tissue
  • HISTORY
    • 1558 - Celline described a wax model to make impression in his book MEMORIES
    • 1700 - Matheus G Purenam suggested that wax models can be used in prosthetic work
    • 1728 ndash Pierre Fauchard described various impression materials in his book LE CHIRURGEEN DENTISTE
    • 1756 ndash Persian Phillip Pfaff first used plaster models prepared from sectional wax impression of the mouth
    • 1810 ndash R C Skinner describe about many materials and techniques in his first American book
    • 1928 ndash ADA developed specification No 19 for impression material
    • 1930 ndash Zinc Oxide Eugenol a rigid impression was introduced
    • 1930 ndash Polysulfide was first used as a commercial synthetic rubber as a copolymer of Ethylene Chloride amp sodium
    • 1937 ndash Agar was introduced by Sears
    • 1949 ndash Alginate was developed during World war II
    • 1950 ndash Polysulfide was used in dentistry
    • 1955 ndash Condensation Silicone was introduced in Germany
    • 1975 ndash Addition Silicone was introduced
    • 1977 ndash Costell introduced Dual tray technique
    • 1980 ndash A Visible light cure Polyether Urethane Dimethacrylate rubber impression material was introduced
    • 1996 ndash Blare amp Wassed considered a no of solution used to disinfecting impression material
      • IDEAL REQUIREMENTS OF IMPRESSION MATERIAL
        • 1 Pleasant taste amp odor
        • 2 Not contain any toxic amp irritating ingredients
        • 3 Adequate shelf life
        • 4 Satisfactory consistency and texture
        • 5 Easy to disinfect with out loss of accuracy
        • 6 Compatible with die and cast material
        • 7 Dimensional stability
        • 8 Good elastic properties
        • 9 Easy manipulation
        • 10 Adequate setting characteristics
        • 11 High degree of reproduction details
        • 12 Adequate strength
        • 13 Should not release any gas
        • 14 Economical
        • 15 Should not be technique sensitive
        • 1 Based on rigidityelasticity -
        • a Rigid (non-elastic)
        • b Elastic
        • 2 Based on viscosity -
        • a Mucostatic
        • b Mucocompressive
        • c Pseudoplastic
          • 3 Based on setting of material -
            • 1 a chemical reaction
            • b Physical change of state
            • 2 a reversible
            • b Irreversible
            • 4Based on interaction with salivawater -
            • 1 Hydrophobic
            • 2 Hydrophilic
              • 5Based on chemistry-
                • 1 Impression Plaster
                • 2 Impression compound
                • 3 Metal oxide (zinc oxide eugenol)
                • 4 Reversible hydrocolloid
                • 5 Irreversible hydrocolloid
                • 6 Poly sulfides
                • 7 Condensation silicones
                • 8 Addition silicones
                • 9 Polyether
                • 10 Visible light curing polyether urethane dimethacrylate
                  • 6Based on use -
                    • 1 Primary impression materials
                    • 2 Secondary impression materials
                    • 3 Duplicating materials
                      • HYDROCOLLOIDS
                        • Colloids are often classified as fourth state of matter the Colloidal state In a solution of sugar in water the sugar molecules are uniformly dispersed in the water amp there is no visible physical separation between the solute amp the solvent molecules If sugar molecules replaced with large amp visible particles such as sand the system is Suspension or if molecules are liquid such vegetable oil then system is Emulsion
                        • True solution exists as a single phase However both the colloid amp the suspension have to phase- The dispersed amp Dispersion phase In the colloid the particles in the dispersed phase consist of molecules held together either by primary or secondary force The size of the particles range is 1 ndash 200nm
                          • Gels
                            • Colloids with a liquid as the dispersion medium can exist in two different forms known as Sol amp Gel
                            • A sol has the appearance amp many characteristic of a various liquid
                            • A gel on the contrary is a semi solid amp produced from a soldering process of gelation by the formation of fibrils or chains called Micelles
                            • Gelation is the conversion of a sol to gel amp the temperature at which this occurs is called Gelation Temperature
                              • Gelation may be brought about in one of these ways
                                • Lowering the temperature- It is done by reducing the thermal energy of effectively These forces are secondary molecular forces The bond between the fibrils is weak amp they break at slightly elevated temperature Gelation temp is 37-50degree centigrade
                                • Liquefaction temperature- It is considerable higher than gelation temp amp this property is known as Hysteresis This temp is between 70 -100 degree centigrade
                                • Chemical reaction- Gelation may also induced by chemical reaction where in the dispersed phase of soil is allowed to react with a substance to give a different type of dispersed phase The process is not reversed by an increased temperature
                                  • Types of Hydrocolloids
                                    • REVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS - Reversible hydrocolloids are those sol can be changed to gel but gel canrsquot be reversed back to the solution
                                    • Eg Alginate impression material
                                    • IRREVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS - Irreversible hydrocolloids are those materials where the change from the sol to gel can be brought by lowering the temp of the sol amp the gel can be converted back to sol condition by heating
                                    • Eg Agar ndash Agar
                                      • ALGINATE IRREVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOID
                                        • The word alginate comes from Algin amp named by a chemist of Scotland It was identified as a liner polymer with numerous carboxyl acid groups It is called as irreversible hydrocolloids because gelation is induced by chemical reaction amp transformation is not possible It is the most widely used dental materials
                                        • The principal factors responsible for the success of this type of impression materials are-
                                        • Easy to manipulate
                                        • Comfortable for the patients
                                        • Relatively inexpensive
                                        • Composition
                                        • Potassium or Sodium Alginate- 15 It is the chief active ingredient
                                        • Calcium Sulfate- 16 It is used as a reactor
                                        • Zinc Oxide amp Diatomaceous Earth- Zinc oxide ndash 4 amp Diatomaceous
                                        • earth 60
                                        • Potassium Titanium Fluoride - 3
                                        • Sodium Phosphate - 2
                                          • Gelation Process
                                            • The typical sol-gel reaction is a soluble alginate with calcium sulfate amp the formation of an insoluble calcium alginate gel Calcium sulfate reacts rapidly to produce the in soluble Ca alginate from the potassium or sodium alginate in a aqueous solution The production of calcium alginate is rapid that it does not allow sufficient working time Thus third water soluble salt such as a trisodium phosphate is added to the solution to prolong the working time Thus the reaction between the calcium sulfate amp the soluble alginate is prevented as long as there is uncreated trisodium phosphate
                                            • 2Na3Po4 +n CaSo4 rarrnKaSo4 +Ca alginate
                                            • When the supply of the trisodium phosphate is exhausted the ca ions begin to react with the potassium alginate to produce calcium alginate Kzn Alg +n CaSo4rarr n KaSo4 + Cal alginate
                                            • The added salt is retarder
                                            • Controlling of gelation time-
                                            • An increase in the temp of water used for mixing shorten the working amp setting time
                                            • The proportion of powder amp water also effect the setting time
                                              • PROPERTIES
                                                • Alginate is of two types
                                                • Type I - Fast setting
                                                • Type II - Normal setting
                                                • According to ADA Specification No 18 properties are-
                                                • 1 Mixing time- Creamy consistency come in 45 ndash 60 sec
                                                • 2 Working time-
                                                • - Fast setting material - 12 ndash 2 min
                                                • - Normal set material - 2 ndash 45 min
                                                • 3 Setting or gelation time-
                                                • - Optimum gelation time - 3-4 min at room temp
                                                • - For fast setting material - 1 -2 min
                                                • - For normal setting material - 2 ndash 45min
                                                • 4 Permanent deformation - ADA specification requires 97 recovery amp where 3 is permanent deformation Alginate has 988 recovery amp 15 permanent deformation
                                                • 5 Flexibility- ADA specification permits10 ndash 20 at the stress of 1000gm cm2 Hard material has value of 5-8
                                                • 6 Strength-
                                                • The compressive strength- 5000-8000gmcm2
                                                • Tear strength - 350-700gmcm2
                                                • 7Viscoelasticity Usually an alginate impression material does not adhere to the oral tissue as strongly as some of the non aqueous elastomers so it is easy to remove the alginate impression rapidly
                                                • 8Accuracy Most alginate is not capable of reproducing the finer details that are absorbed in impression with Agar amp other elastomeric impression material
                                                • 9 Dimensional effects - The gel may loss water by evaporation from its surface amp it shrinks
                                                • - If the gel placed in the water it absorbed water amp gel swells
                                                • - Thermal change also contributes to dimensional change The alginate shrinks slightly due to difference in temp between mouth temp(30c) amp room temp(23c)
                                                • 10 Biocompatibility -
                                                • No chemical or allergic reaction associated with alginate
                                                • 11 Shelf life -
                                                • Alginate impressions have shorter shelf life Strong temp amp moisture contamination are two factor which effect the self life of alginate
                                                  • MANIPULATION OF ALGINATE
                                                    • PREPARING THE MIX
                                                    • A measured powder is shifted into pre measured water that has been placed in a clean rubber bowl Care should be taken to avoid whipping air into the mix A vigorous figure 8 motion is best with the mix being swiped or stropped against the side of the mixing rubber bowl with intermittent rotation ie180 degree of the spatula to press out air bubbles The mixing time is 45sec -1 min
                                                    • A variety of mechanical devices are also available for mixing impression material There benefits are convenience speed amp elimination of human error
                                                    • MAKING THE IMPRESSION
                                                    • Before setting the impression the material should have developed sufficient body so that it doesnrsquot flow out of the try A perforated tray is generally used If plastic try or metal rim lock try is selected a thin layer of adhesive should be applied amp allowed to dry before mixing and loading the try The thickness of the alginate between the tray amp tissue should be at least 3mm
                                                    • ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES
                                                    • Advantages
                                                    • 1 Cannot be electroplated
                                                    • 2 Distortion occurs easily
                                                    • 3 Poor dimensional stability (poured within 15 min)
                                                    • 4 Poor tear strength
                                                    • AGAR ndash REVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS
                                                    • When agar hydrocolloids heated they liquefy or go into the sol state amp on cooling they return to the gel state Because this process can be repeated a gel of this type is described as Reversible hydrocolloid The preparation of the agar hydrocolloids for clinical use requires care full control amp yields accurate impression It has been largely replaced by alginate hydrocolloids amp rubber impression materials
                                                      • COMPOSITION
                                                        • Borates - 02 ndash 05 Its works as retarder
                                                        • water - 855 It is reaction medium
                                                        • Agar- 13-17 It is main active constituent of reversible hydrocolloid impression material
                                                        • Sulfates - 1 ndash 2 Accelerators
                                                        • Fillers - 05 -1 Diatomaceous earth silica wax rubber etc used as filler
                                                        • Bactericide - Thymol amp glycerin are used
                                                        • Color amp flavor
                                                          • GELATION PROCESS
                                                            • The setting of the reversible hydrocolloid is called gelation The reaction can be expressed a sol- gel reaction The physical changes from to gel does not return to the sol at the same temp at which it solidified The gel must be heated at the liquefaction temp ie 70 - 100c to form sol Sol transform into a gel at 37-50c the exact gelation temp depended on several factor including the molecular wt the purity of the material amp the ratio of agar to other ingredients
                                                            • The gelation is critical If the temp is high the heat from sol may injury to the soft tissue or if the surface of the sol transforms to a gel as soon as the sol may injure the oral tissues a high surface stress may develop If the gelation temp is too far below the oral temp it will be difficulty or even impossible to chill the material sufficiently to obtain a firm gel to adjacent to the oral tissue The temp lag between the gelation amp liquefaction temp of the gel makes it possible to use as a dental impression material
                                                              • PROPERTIES
                                                                • Gelation temperature -
                                                                • After tempering the sol should be homogenous and should set to a gel between 37 ndash 500c when cooled
                                                                • Viscoelastic properties -
                                                                • It demonstrates the necessity of deforming the impression rapidly when it removed from the mouth which reduces the amount of the permanent deformation The elastic recovery of the hydrocolloid is never complete amp it does not return entirely to its original dimension after deformation The amount of permanent deformation in clinical is negligible provided that -
                                                                • a) The material has adequately gelled
                                                                • b) The impression has been removed rapidly
                                                                • c) The under cuts present in the cavity preparation are minimal
                                                                • Permanent deformation -
                                                                • The ADA specification requires that the permanent deformation should be less than 15 after the material compressed 10 for 30sec This impression material readily meets this requirement with the value of about 1
                                                                • Distortion during gelation -
                                                                • If the material is held rigidly to the tray then the impression material shrinks toward the center of its mass Rapid cooling may cause a concentration of stress near the tray where gelation first takes place
                                                                • Flexibility -
                                                                • The ADA specification requirement for flexibility allows a range of 4-14 amp most agar materials meet this requirement
                                                                • Strength -
                                                                • The compressive strength of Agar impression material is 8000gmcm2
                                                                • The tear strength of Agar is 7000gmcm2
                                                                • Flow -
                                                                • Agar is sufficiently fluid to allow detailed reproduction of hard amp soft tissue
                                                                • Compatibility with gypsum -
                                                                • Not all the agar impression materials are equally compatible with all gypsum products The impression should be washed of saliva amp any trace of blood which retarded the setting of gypsum
                                                                  • Manipulation of agar impression
                                                                    • The use of agar hydrocolloid involves special equipment called conditioning unit for agar The hydrocolloid is usually supplied In two forms syringe and tray materials The only difference between the materials is the color and the greater fluidity of the syringe material
                                                                      • Impression tray
                                                                        • It is rim locked trays with water circulating device This types of trays should allow a space of 3mm occlusally and laterally and extend distally to cover all the teeth After the tray has been properly positioned water is circulated at 13 degrees through the tray until gelation occurs
                                                                          • Preparation of material
                                                                            • Proper equipment of liquefying and storing the agar impression material is essential
                                                                            • At first reverse the hydrocolloid gel to the sol stage Boiling water is a convenient way of liquefying the material The material must be held at this temperature for a minimum of 10mins Propylene glycol can be added to the water to obtain 100 degrees After it has been liquefied the material must be stored in the tray The material can be stored for several days Usually there are three compartments in the conditioning unit making it possible to liquefy store and temper the material
                                                                              • Conditioning and tempering
                                                                                • Because 55 degree is the maximum tolerable temperature the storage temperature of 65 degrees would be too hot for the oral tissues especially given the bulk of the tray material Therefore the material that is used to fill the tray must be cooled and tempered Eliminating the effect of imbibition is the purpose of placing the gauze pad over the tempering tray materials When the tray material is placed into the tempering bath the gauze is removed and the contaminating surface layer of material clings to the gauze and is removed as well
                                                                                  • Making the impression
                                                                                    • The syringe material is taken directly from the storage compartment and applied to the prepared cavities It is first applied to the base of the preparation and then the reminder of the tooth is covered By the time the cavity preparation and adjoining teeth have been covered the tray material has been properly tempered and is now ready to be placed immediately in the mouth to form the bulk of impression Gelation is accelerated by circulating cool water approximately 18 ndash 21 degrees through the tray for 3 ndash 5 minutes
                                                                                      • Disinfection of hydrocolloid impression
                                                                                        • As the hydrocolloid impression material must be poured within short time after removal from the mouth The disinfection procedure should be relatively rapid to prevent the dimensional change Most manufacturers recommended a specific disinfectant The agent may be iodophor bleach or gluteraldehyde The distortion is minimal if the recommended immersion time is followed and if the impression is poured properly The irreversible hydrocolloid may be disinfected by 10 minute immersion inor spraying with the antimicrobial agent such as NaOCl and glutaraldehyde without sufficient dimensional change The current protocol for disinfecting hydrocolloid impression is to use household bleach iodophor and synthetic phenols as disinfectants After the immersion it is thoroughly rinsed The disinfectant is sprayed liberally o the exposed surface The immersion should not be submerged or soaked in the disinfectant solution
                                                                                          • ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES
                                                                                          • TYPES OF FAILURES
                                                                                            • 1 Distortion- due to
                                                                                            • Delayed pouring of impression
                                                                                            • Movement of tray during setting
                                                                                            • Removal from mouth too early
                                                                                            • 2 Grainy impression- due to
                                                                                            • Inadequate mixing
                                                                                            • Prolonged mixing
                                                                                            • Less water in mix
                                                                                            • 3 Tearing - due to
                                                                                            • Inadequate bulk
                                                                                            • Moisture contamination
                                                                                            • Removal from mouth too early
                                                                                            • Prolonged mixing
                                                                                            • 4 Bubbles- due to
                                                                                            • Early gelation preventing flow
                                                                                            • Air incorporated during mixing
                                                                                            • 5 Irregular voids- due to
                                                                                            • Excess moisture ampdebris on
                                                                                              • 1 Anusavice ldquoSkinners science of dental materialsrdquo Tenth Edition
Page 13: Hydroco Llo Ids / orthodontic courses by Indian dental academy

Hydrocolloids

gel to adjacent to the oral tissue The temp lag between the gelation amp liquefaction temp of

the gel makes it possible to use as a dental impression material

PROPERTIES

Gelation temperature -

After tempering the sol should be homogenous and should set to a gel between 37

ndash 500c when cooled

Viscoelastic properties -

It demonstrates the necessity of deforming the impression rapidly when it removed

from the mouth which reduces the amount of the permanent deformation The elastic

recovery of the hydrocolloid is never complete amp it does not return entirely to its original

dimension after deformation The amount of permanent deformation in clinical is

negligible provided that -

a) The material has adequately gelled

b) The impression has been removed rapidly

c) The under cuts present in the cavity preparation are minimal

Permanent deformation -

The ADA specification requires that the permanent deformation should be less than

15 after the material compressed 10 for 30sec This impression material readily meets

this requirement with the value of about 1

Distortion during gelation -

If the material is held rigidly to the tray then the impression material shrinks

toward the center of its mass Rapid cooling may cause a concentration of stress near the

tray where gelation first takes place

Flexibility -

The ADA specification requirement for flexibility allows a range of 4-14 amp most

agar materials meet this requirement

Strength -

The compressive strength of Agar impression material is 8000gmcm2

The tear strength of Agar is 7000gmcm2

Page 13

Hydrocolloids

Flow -

Agar is sufficiently fluid to allow detailed reproduction of hard amp soft tissue

Compatibility with gypsum -

Not all the agar impression materials are equally compatible with all gypsum

products The impression should be washed of saliva amp any trace of blood which

retarded the setting of gypsum

Manipulation of agar impression

The use of agar hydrocolloid involves special equipment called conditioning

unit for agar The hydrocolloid is usually supplied In two forms syringe and tray

materials The only difference between the materials is the color and the greater fluidity of

the syringe material

Impression tray

It is rim locked trays with water circulating device This types of trays should

allow a space of 3mm occlusally and laterally and extend distally to cover all the teeth

After the tray has been properly positioned water is circulated at 13 degrees through the

tray until gelation occurs

Preparation of material

Proper equipment of liquefying and storing the agar impression material is essential

At first reverse the hydrocolloid gel to the sol stage Boiling water is a convenient

way of liquefying the material The material must be held at this temperature for a

minimum of 10mins Propylene glycol can be added to the water to obtain 100 degrees

After it has been liquefied the material must be stored in the tray The material can be

stored for several days Usually there are three compartments in the conditioning unit

making it possible to liquefy store and temper the material

Page 14

Hydrocolloids

Conditioning and tempering

Because 55 degree is the maximum tolerable temperature the storage temperature

of 65 degrees would be too hot for the oral tissues especially given the bulk of the tray

material Therefore the material that is used to fill the tray must be cooled and tempered

Eliminating the effect of imbibition is the purpose of placing the gauze pad over the

tempering tray materials When the tray material is placed into the tempering bath the

gauze is removed and the contaminating surface layer of material clings to the gauze and is

removed as well

Making the impression

The syringe material is taken directly from the storage compartment and applied to

the prepared cavities It is first applied to the base of the preparation and then the reminder

of the tooth is covered By the time the cavity preparation and adjoining teeth have been

covered the tray material has been properly tempered and is now ready to be placed

immediately in the mouth to form the bulk of impression Gelation is accelerated by

circulating cool water approximately 18 ndash 21 degrees through the tray for 3 ndash 5 minutes

Disinfection of hydrocolloid impression

As the hydrocolloid impression material must be poured within short time after

removal from the mouth The disinfection procedure should be relatively rapid to prevent

the dimensional change Most manufacturers recommended a specific disinfectant The

agent may be iodophor bleach or gluteraldehyde The distortion is minimal if the

recommended immersion time is followed and if the impression is poured properly The

irreversible hydrocolloid may be disinfected by 10 minute immersion inor spraying with

the antimicrobial agent such as NaOCl and glutaraldehyde without sufficient dimensional

change The current protocol for disinfecting hydrocolloid impression is to use household

bleach iodophor and synthetic phenols as disinfectants After the immersion it is

thoroughly rinsed The disinfectant is sprayed liberally o the exposed surface The

immersion should not be submerged or soaked in the disinfectant solution

Page 15

Hydrocolloids

Recent techniques

Laminate technique

A recent modification of the conventional procedure is the combined agar alginate

technique The hydrocolloid in the tray is replaced with a mix of chilled alginate

that bonds with the agar expressed from a syringe

The alginate gels by a chemical reaction whereas the agar gels by means of

contact with cool alginate rather than with the water circulating through the tray

Since the agar not the alginate is in contact with the prepared teeth maximum

detail is reproduced

Advantages

syringe agar records tissues more accurately

Water cooled tray is not required

Sets faster

Disadvantages

Agar ndash alginate bond failure can occur

Viscous alginate may displace agar

Technique sensitive

Wet field technique

This is a recent technique

The oral tissues are flooded with warm water The syringe material is then

injected in to the surface to be recorded

Before syringe material gels tray material is seated

Page 16

Hydrocolloids

The hydraulic pressure of the viscous tray material forces the fluid syringe

material down in to the areas to be recorded

The motion displaces the syringe material as well as blood and debris through out

the sulcus

ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES

Advantages

1 Hydrophilic Impression material

2 Good elastic properties Good recovery from distortion

3 Can be re-used as a duplicating material

4 Long working time and low material cost

5 No mixing technique

6 High accuracy and fine detail recording

Disadvantages

1 Only one model can be used

2 Extensive and expensive equipment required

3 It can not be electroplated

4 Impossible to sterilize for reuse

5 Low dimensional stability amp tear resistance

TYPES OF FAILURES

1 Distortion- due to

Delayed pouring of impression

Movement of tray during setting

Removal from mouth too early

2 Grainy impression- due to

Inadequate mixing

Page 17

Hydrocolloids

Prolonged mixing

Less water in mix

3 Tearing - due to

Inadequate bulk

Moisture contamination

Removal from mouth too early

Prolonged mixing

4 Bubbles- due to

Early gelation preventing flow

Air incorporated during mixing

5 Irregular voids- due to

Excess moisture ampdebris on

REFERENCES

1 Anusavice ldquoSkinners science of dental materialsrdquo Tenth Edition

2 Dental materials and their selection-willian jorsquo brien

3 Restorative dental materials-craig

4 Removable prosthodintics- stewart

Page 18

  • Constructing a model or cast is an important step in numerous dental procedures Various types of cast amp models can be made from gypsum products using an impression mold or negative likeness of a dental structure An impression is a negative replica of the tissue of the oral cavity It is used to register or reproduce the form and relation of the teeth amp surrounding tissue
  • HISTORY
    • 1558 - Celline described a wax model to make impression in his book MEMORIES
    • 1700 - Matheus G Purenam suggested that wax models can be used in prosthetic work
    • 1728 ndash Pierre Fauchard described various impression materials in his book LE CHIRURGEEN DENTISTE
    • 1756 ndash Persian Phillip Pfaff first used plaster models prepared from sectional wax impression of the mouth
    • 1810 ndash R C Skinner describe about many materials and techniques in his first American book
    • 1928 ndash ADA developed specification No 19 for impression material
    • 1930 ndash Zinc Oxide Eugenol a rigid impression was introduced
    • 1930 ndash Polysulfide was first used as a commercial synthetic rubber as a copolymer of Ethylene Chloride amp sodium
    • 1937 ndash Agar was introduced by Sears
    • 1949 ndash Alginate was developed during World war II
    • 1950 ndash Polysulfide was used in dentistry
    • 1955 ndash Condensation Silicone was introduced in Germany
    • 1975 ndash Addition Silicone was introduced
    • 1977 ndash Costell introduced Dual tray technique
    • 1980 ndash A Visible light cure Polyether Urethane Dimethacrylate rubber impression material was introduced
    • 1996 ndash Blare amp Wassed considered a no of solution used to disinfecting impression material
      • IDEAL REQUIREMENTS OF IMPRESSION MATERIAL
        • 1 Pleasant taste amp odor
        • 2 Not contain any toxic amp irritating ingredients
        • 3 Adequate shelf life
        • 4 Satisfactory consistency and texture
        • 5 Easy to disinfect with out loss of accuracy
        • 6 Compatible with die and cast material
        • 7 Dimensional stability
        • 8 Good elastic properties
        • 9 Easy manipulation
        • 10 Adequate setting characteristics
        • 11 High degree of reproduction details
        • 12 Adequate strength
        • 13 Should not release any gas
        • 14 Economical
        • 15 Should not be technique sensitive
        • 1 Based on rigidityelasticity -
        • a Rigid (non-elastic)
        • b Elastic
        • 2 Based on viscosity -
        • a Mucostatic
        • b Mucocompressive
        • c Pseudoplastic
          • 3 Based on setting of material -
            • 1 a chemical reaction
            • b Physical change of state
            • 2 a reversible
            • b Irreversible
            • 4Based on interaction with salivawater -
            • 1 Hydrophobic
            • 2 Hydrophilic
              • 5Based on chemistry-
                • 1 Impression Plaster
                • 2 Impression compound
                • 3 Metal oxide (zinc oxide eugenol)
                • 4 Reversible hydrocolloid
                • 5 Irreversible hydrocolloid
                • 6 Poly sulfides
                • 7 Condensation silicones
                • 8 Addition silicones
                • 9 Polyether
                • 10 Visible light curing polyether urethane dimethacrylate
                  • 6Based on use -
                    • 1 Primary impression materials
                    • 2 Secondary impression materials
                    • 3 Duplicating materials
                      • HYDROCOLLOIDS
                        • Colloids are often classified as fourth state of matter the Colloidal state In a solution of sugar in water the sugar molecules are uniformly dispersed in the water amp there is no visible physical separation between the solute amp the solvent molecules If sugar molecules replaced with large amp visible particles such as sand the system is Suspension or if molecules are liquid such vegetable oil then system is Emulsion
                        • True solution exists as a single phase However both the colloid amp the suspension have to phase- The dispersed amp Dispersion phase In the colloid the particles in the dispersed phase consist of molecules held together either by primary or secondary force The size of the particles range is 1 ndash 200nm
                          • Gels
                            • Colloids with a liquid as the dispersion medium can exist in two different forms known as Sol amp Gel
                            • A sol has the appearance amp many characteristic of a various liquid
                            • A gel on the contrary is a semi solid amp produced from a soldering process of gelation by the formation of fibrils or chains called Micelles
                            • Gelation is the conversion of a sol to gel amp the temperature at which this occurs is called Gelation Temperature
                              • Gelation may be brought about in one of these ways
                                • Lowering the temperature- It is done by reducing the thermal energy of effectively These forces are secondary molecular forces The bond between the fibrils is weak amp they break at slightly elevated temperature Gelation temp is 37-50degree centigrade
                                • Liquefaction temperature- It is considerable higher than gelation temp amp this property is known as Hysteresis This temp is between 70 -100 degree centigrade
                                • Chemical reaction- Gelation may also induced by chemical reaction where in the dispersed phase of soil is allowed to react with a substance to give a different type of dispersed phase The process is not reversed by an increased temperature
                                  • Types of Hydrocolloids
                                    • REVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS - Reversible hydrocolloids are those sol can be changed to gel but gel canrsquot be reversed back to the solution
                                    • Eg Alginate impression material
                                    • IRREVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS - Irreversible hydrocolloids are those materials where the change from the sol to gel can be brought by lowering the temp of the sol amp the gel can be converted back to sol condition by heating
                                    • Eg Agar ndash Agar
                                      • ALGINATE IRREVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOID
                                        • The word alginate comes from Algin amp named by a chemist of Scotland It was identified as a liner polymer with numerous carboxyl acid groups It is called as irreversible hydrocolloids because gelation is induced by chemical reaction amp transformation is not possible It is the most widely used dental materials
                                        • The principal factors responsible for the success of this type of impression materials are-
                                        • Easy to manipulate
                                        • Comfortable for the patients
                                        • Relatively inexpensive
                                        • Composition
                                        • Potassium or Sodium Alginate- 15 It is the chief active ingredient
                                        • Calcium Sulfate- 16 It is used as a reactor
                                        • Zinc Oxide amp Diatomaceous Earth- Zinc oxide ndash 4 amp Diatomaceous
                                        • earth 60
                                        • Potassium Titanium Fluoride - 3
                                        • Sodium Phosphate - 2
                                          • Gelation Process
                                            • The typical sol-gel reaction is a soluble alginate with calcium sulfate amp the formation of an insoluble calcium alginate gel Calcium sulfate reacts rapidly to produce the in soluble Ca alginate from the potassium or sodium alginate in a aqueous solution The production of calcium alginate is rapid that it does not allow sufficient working time Thus third water soluble salt such as a trisodium phosphate is added to the solution to prolong the working time Thus the reaction between the calcium sulfate amp the soluble alginate is prevented as long as there is uncreated trisodium phosphate
                                            • 2Na3Po4 +n CaSo4 rarrnKaSo4 +Ca alginate
                                            • When the supply of the trisodium phosphate is exhausted the ca ions begin to react with the potassium alginate to produce calcium alginate Kzn Alg +n CaSo4rarr n KaSo4 + Cal alginate
                                            • The added salt is retarder
                                            • Controlling of gelation time-
                                            • An increase in the temp of water used for mixing shorten the working amp setting time
                                            • The proportion of powder amp water also effect the setting time
                                              • PROPERTIES
                                                • Alginate is of two types
                                                • Type I - Fast setting
                                                • Type II - Normal setting
                                                • According to ADA Specification No 18 properties are-
                                                • 1 Mixing time- Creamy consistency come in 45 ndash 60 sec
                                                • 2 Working time-
                                                • - Fast setting material - 12 ndash 2 min
                                                • - Normal set material - 2 ndash 45 min
                                                • 3 Setting or gelation time-
                                                • - Optimum gelation time - 3-4 min at room temp
                                                • - For fast setting material - 1 -2 min
                                                • - For normal setting material - 2 ndash 45min
                                                • 4 Permanent deformation - ADA specification requires 97 recovery amp where 3 is permanent deformation Alginate has 988 recovery amp 15 permanent deformation
                                                • 5 Flexibility- ADA specification permits10 ndash 20 at the stress of 1000gm cm2 Hard material has value of 5-8
                                                • 6 Strength-
                                                • The compressive strength- 5000-8000gmcm2
                                                • Tear strength - 350-700gmcm2
                                                • 7Viscoelasticity Usually an alginate impression material does not adhere to the oral tissue as strongly as some of the non aqueous elastomers so it is easy to remove the alginate impression rapidly
                                                • 8Accuracy Most alginate is not capable of reproducing the finer details that are absorbed in impression with Agar amp other elastomeric impression material
                                                • 9 Dimensional effects - The gel may loss water by evaporation from its surface amp it shrinks
                                                • - If the gel placed in the water it absorbed water amp gel swells
                                                • - Thermal change also contributes to dimensional change The alginate shrinks slightly due to difference in temp between mouth temp(30c) amp room temp(23c)
                                                • 10 Biocompatibility -
                                                • No chemical or allergic reaction associated with alginate
                                                • 11 Shelf life -
                                                • Alginate impressions have shorter shelf life Strong temp amp moisture contamination are two factor which effect the self life of alginate
                                                  • MANIPULATION OF ALGINATE
                                                    • PREPARING THE MIX
                                                    • A measured powder is shifted into pre measured water that has been placed in a clean rubber bowl Care should be taken to avoid whipping air into the mix A vigorous figure 8 motion is best with the mix being swiped or stropped against the side of the mixing rubber bowl with intermittent rotation ie180 degree of the spatula to press out air bubbles The mixing time is 45sec -1 min
                                                    • A variety of mechanical devices are also available for mixing impression material There benefits are convenience speed amp elimination of human error
                                                    • MAKING THE IMPRESSION
                                                    • Before setting the impression the material should have developed sufficient body so that it doesnrsquot flow out of the try A perforated tray is generally used If plastic try or metal rim lock try is selected a thin layer of adhesive should be applied amp allowed to dry before mixing and loading the try The thickness of the alginate between the tray amp tissue should be at least 3mm
                                                    • ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES
                                                    • Advantages
                                                    • 1 Cannot be electroplated
                                                    • 2 Distortion occurs easily
                                                    • 3 Poor dimensional stability (poured within 15 min)
                                                    • 4 Poor tear strength
                                                    • AGAR ndash REVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS
                                                    • When agar hydrocolloids heated they liquefy or go into the sol state amp on cooling they return to the gel state Because this process can be repeated a gel of this type is described as Reversible hydrocolloid The preparation of the agar hydrocolloids for clinical use requires care full control amp yields accurate impression It has been largely replaced by alginate hydrocolloids amp rubber impression materials
                                                      • COMPOSITION
                                                        • Borates - 02 ndash 05 Its works as retarder
                                                        • water - 855 It is reaction medium
                                                        • Agar- 13-17 It is main active constituent of reversible hydrocolloid impression material
                                                        • Sulfates - 1 ndash 2 Accelerators
                                                        • Fillers - 05 -1 Diatomaceous earth silica wax rubber etc used as filler
                                                        • Bactericide - Thymol amp glycerin are used
                                                        • Color amp flavor
                                                          • GELATION PROCESS
                                                            • The setting of the reversible hydrocolloid is called gelation The reaction can be expressed a sol- gel reaction The physical changes from to gel does not return to the sol at the same temp at which it solidified The gel must be heated at the liquefaction temp ie 70 - 100c to form sol Sol transform into a gel at 37-50c the exact gelation temp depended on several factor including the molecular wt the purity of the material amp the ratio of agar to other ingredients
                                                            • The gelation is critical If the temp is high the heat from sol may injury to the soft tissue or if the surface of the sol transforms to a gel as soon as the sol may injure the oral tissues a high surface stress may develop If the gelation temp is too far below the oral temp it will be difficulty or even impossible to chill the material sufficiently to obtain a firm gel to adjacent to the oral tissue The temp lag between the gelation amp liquefaction temp of the gel makes it possible to use as a dental impression material
                                                              • PROPERTIES
                                                                • Gelation temperature -
                                                                • After tempering the sol should be homogenous and should set to a gel between 37 ndash 500c when cooled
                                                                • Viscoelastic properties -
                                                                • It demonstrates the necessity of deforming the impression rapidly when it removed from the mouth which reduces the amount of the permanent deformation The elastic recovery of the hydrocolloid is never complete amp it does not return entirely to its original dimension after deformation The amount of permanent deformation in clinical is negligible provided that -
                                                                • a) The material has adequately gelled
                                                                • b) The impression has been removed rapidly
                                                                • c) The under cuts present in the cavity preparation are minimal
                                                                • Permanent deformation -
                                                                • The ADA specification requires that the permanent deformation should be less than 15 after the material compressed 10 for 30sec This impression material readily meets this requirement with the value of about 1
                                                                • Distortion during gelation -
                                                                • If the material is held rigidly to the tray then the impression material shrinks toward the center of its mass Rapid cooling may cause a concentration of stress near the tray where gelation first takes place
                                                                • Flexibility -
                                                                • The ADA specification requirement for flexibility allows a range of 4-14 amp most agar materials meet this requirement
                                                                • Strength -
                                                                • The compressive strength of Agar impression material is 8000gmcm2
                                                                • The tear strength of Agar is 7000gmcm2
                                                                • Flow -
                                                                • Agar is sufficiently fluid to allow detailed reproduction of hard amp soft tissue
                                                                • Compatibility with gypsum -
                                                                • Not all the agar impression materials are equally compatible with all gypsum products The impression should be washed of saliva amp any trace of blood which retarded the setting of gypsum
                                                                  • Manipulation of agar impression
                                                                    • The use of agar hydrocolloid involves special equipment called conditioning unit for agar The hydrocolloid is usually supplied In two forms syringe and tray materials The only difference between the materials is the color and the greater fluidity of the syringe material
                                                                      • Impression tray
                                                                        • It is rim locked trays with water circulating device This types of trays should allow a space of 3mm occlusally and laterally and extend distally to cover all the teeth After the tray has been properly positioned water is circulated at 13 degrees through the tray until gelation occurs
                                                                          • Preparation of material
                                                                            • Proper equipment of liquefying and storing the agar impression material is essential
                                                                            • At first reverse the hydrocolloid gel to the sol stage Boiling water is a convenient way of liquefying the material The material must be held at this temperature for a minimum of 10mins Propylene glycol can be added to the water to obtain 100 degrees After it has been liquefied the material must be stored in the tray The material can be stored for several days Usually there are three compartments in the conditioning unit making it possible to liquefy store and temper the material
                                                                              • Conditioning and tempering
                                                                                • Because 55 degree is the maximum tolerable temperature the storage temperature of 65 degrees would be too hot for the oral tissues especially given the bulk of the tray material Therefore the material that is used to fill the tray must be cooled and tempered Eliminating the effect of imbibition is the purpose of placing the gauze pad over the tempering tray materials When the tray material is placed into the tempering bath the gauze is removed and the contaminating surface layer of material clings to the gauze and is removed as well
                                                                                  • Making the impression
                                                                                    • The syringe material is taken directly from the storage compartment and applied to the prepared cavities It is first applied to the base of the preparation and then the reminder of the tooth is covered By the time the cavity preparation and adjoining teeth have been covered the tray material has been properly tempered and is now ready to be placed immediately in the mouth to form the bulk of impression Gelation is accelerated by circulating cool water approximately 18 ndash 21 degrees through the tray for 3 ndash 5 minutes
                                                                                      • Disinfection of hydrocolloid impression
                                                                                        • As the hydrocolloid impression material must be poured within short time after removal from the mouth The disinfection procedure should be relatively rapid to prevent the dimensional change Most manufacturers recommended a specific disinfectant The agent may be iodophor bleach or gluteraldehyde The distortion is minimal if the recommended immersion time is followed and if the impression is poured properly The irreversible hydrocolloid may be disinfected by 10 minute immersion inor spraying with the antimicrobial agent such as NaOCl and glutaraldehyde without sufficient dimensional change The current protocol for disinfecting hydrocolloid impression is to use household bleach iodophor and synthetic phenols as disinfectants After the immersion it is thoroughly rinsed The disinfectant is sprayed liberally o the exposed surface The immersion should not be submerged or soaked in the disinfectant solution
                                                                                          • ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES
                                                                                          • TYPES OF FAILURES
                                                                                            • 1 Distortion- due to
                                                                                            • Delayed pouring of impression
                                                                                            • Movement of tray during setting
                                                                                            • Removal from mouth too early
                                                                                            • 2 Grainy impression- due to
                                                                                            • Inadequate mixing
                                                                                            • Prolonged mixing
                                                                                            • Less water in mix
                                                                                            • 3 Tearing - due to
                                                                                            • Inadequate bulk
                                                                                            • Moisture contamination
                                                                                            • Removal from mouth too early
                                                                                            • Prolonged mixing
                                                                                            • 4 Bubbles- due to
                                                                                            • Early gelation preventing flow
                                                                                            • Air incorporated during mixing
                                                                                            • 5 Irregular voids- due to
                                                                                            • Excess moisture ampdebris on
                                                                                              • 1 Anusavice ldquoSkinners science of dental materialsrdquo Tenth Edition
Page 14: Hydroco Llo Ids / orthodontic courses by Indian dental academy

Hydrocolloids

Flow -

Agar is sufficiently fluid to allow detailed reproduction of hard amp soft tissue

Compatibility with gypsum -

Not all the agar impression materials are equally compatible with all gypsum

products The impression should be washed of saliva amp any trace of blood which

retarded the setting of gypsum

Manipulation of agar impression

The use of agar hydrocolloid involves special equipment called conditioning

unit for agar The hydrocolloid is usually supplied In two forms syringe and tray

materials The only difference between the materials is the color and the greater fluidity of

the syringe material

Impression tray

It is rim locked trays with water circulating device This types of trays should

allow a space of 3mm occlusally and laterally and extend distally to cover all the teeth

After the tray has been properly positioned water is circulated at 13 degrees through the

tray until gelation occurs

Preparation of material

Proper equipment of liquefying and storing the agar impression material is essential

At first reverse the hydrocolloid gel to the sol stage Boiling water is a convenient

way of liquefying the material The material must be held at this temperature for a

minimum of 10mins Propylene glycol can be added to the water to obtain 100 degrees

After it has been liquefied the material must be stored in the tray The material can be

stored for several days Usually there are three compartments in the conditioning unit

making it possible to liquefy store and temper the material

Page 14

Hydrocolloids

Conditioning and tempering

Because 55 degree is the maximum tolerable temperature the storage temperature

of 65 degrees would be too hot for the oral tissues especially given the bulk of the tray

material Therefore the material that is used to fill the tray must be cooled and tempered

Eliminating the effect of imbibition is the purpose of placing the gauze pad over the

tempering tray materials When the tray material is placed into the tempering bath the

gauze is removed and the contaminating surface layer of material clings to the gauze and is

removed as well

Making the impression

The syringe material is taken directly from the storage compartment and applied to

the prepared cavities It is first applied to the base of the preparation and then the reminder

of the tooth is covered By the time the cavity preparation and adjoining teeth have been

covered the tray material has been properly tempered and is now ready to be placed

immediately in the mouth to form the bulk of impression Gelation is accelerated by

circulating cool water approximately 18 ndash 21 degrees through the tray for 3 ndash 5 minutes

Disinfection of hydrocolloid impression

As the hydrocolloid impression material must be poured within short time after

removal from the mouth The disinfection procedure should be relatively rapid to prevent

the dimensional change Most manufacturers recommended a specific disinfectant The

agent may be iodophor bleach or gluteraldehyde The distortion is minimal if the

recommended immersion time is followed and if the impression is poured properly The

irreversible hydrocolloid may be disinfected by 10 minute immersion inor spraying with

the antimicrobial agent such as NaOCl and glutaraldehyde without sufficient dimensional

change The current protocol for disinfecting hydrocolloid impression is to use household

bleach iodophor and synthetic phenols as disinfectants After the immersion it is

thoroughly rinsed The disinfectant is sprayed liberally o the exposed surface The

immersion should not be submerged or soaked in the disinfectant solution

Page 15

Hydrocolloids

Recent techniques

Laminate technique

A recent modification of the conventional procedure is the combined agar alginate

technique The hydrocolloid in the tray is replaced with a mix of chilled alginate

that bonds with the agar expressed from a syringe

The alginate gels by a chemical reaction whereas the agar gels by means of

contact with cool alginate rather than with the water circulating through the tray

Since the agar not the alginate is in contact with the prepared teeth maximum

detail is reproduced

Advantages

syringe agar records tissues more accurately

Water cooled tray is not required

Sets faster

Disadvantages

Agar ndash alginate bond failure can occur

Viscous alginate may displace agar

Technique sensitive

Wet field technique

This is a recent technique

The oral tissues are flooded with warm water The syringe material is then

injected in to the surface to be recorded

Before syringe material gels tray material is seated

Page 16

Hydrocolloids

The hydraulic pressure of the viscous tray material forces the fluid syringe

material down in to the areas to be recorded

The motion displaces the syringe material as well as blood and debris through out

the sulcus

ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES

Advantages

1 Hydrophilic Impression material

2 Good elastic properties Good recovery from distortion

3 Can be re-used as a duplicating material

4 Long working time and low material cost

5 No mixing technique

6 High accuracy and fine detail recording

Disadvantages

1 Only one model can be used

2 Extensive and expensive equipment required

3 It can not be electroplated

4 Impossible to sterilize for reuse

5 Low dimensional stability amp tear resistance

TYPES OF FAILURES

1 Distortion- due to

Delayed pouring of impression

Movement of tray during setting

Removal from mouth too early

2 Grainy impression- due to

Inadequate mixing

Page 17

Hydrocolloids

Prolonged mixing

Less water in mix

3 Tearing - due to

Inadequate bulk

Moisture contamination

Removal from mouth too early

Prolonged mixing

4 Bubbles- due to

Early gelation preventing flow

Air incorporated during mixing

5 Irregular voids- due to

Excess moisture ampdebris on

REFERENCES

1 Anusavice ldquoSkinners science of dental materialsrdquo Tenth Edition

2 Dental materials and their selection-willian jorsquo brien

3 Restorative dental materials-craig

4 Removable prosthodintics- stewart

Page 18

  • Constructing a model or cast is an important step in numerous dental procedures Various types of cast amp models can be made from gypsum products using an impression mold or negative likeness of a dental structure An impression is a negative replica of the tissue of the oral cavity It is used to register or reproduce the form and relation of the teeth amp surrounding tissue
  • HISTORY
    • 1558 - Celline described a wax model to make impression in his book MEMORIES
    • 1700 - Matheus G Purenam suggested that wax models can be used in prosthetic work
    • 1728 ndash Pierre Fauchard described various impression materials in his book LE CHIRURGEEN DENTISTE
    • 1756 ndash Persian Phillip Pfaff first used plaster models prepared from sectional wax impression of the mouth
    • 1810 ndash R C Skinner describe about many materials and techniques in his first American book
    • 1928 ndash ADA developed specification No 19 for impression material
    • 1930 ndash Zinc Oxide Eugenol a rigid impression was introduced
    • 1930 ndash Polysulfide was first used as a commercial synthetic rubber as a copolymer of Ethylene Chloride amp sodium
    • 1937 ndash Agar was introduced by Sears
    • 1949 ndash Alginate was developed during World war II
    • 1950 ndash Polysulfide was used in dentistry
    • 1955 ndash Condensation Silicone was introduced in Germany
    • 1975 ndash Addition Silicone was introduced
    • 1977 ndash Costell introduced Dual tray technique
    • 1980 ndash A Visible light cure Polyether Urethane Dimethacrylate rubber impression material was introduced
    • 1996 ndash Blare amp Wassed considered a no of solution used to disinfecting impression material
      • IDEAL REQUIREMENTS OF IMPRESSION MATERIAL
        • 1 Pleasant taste amp odor
        • 2 Not contain any toxic amp irritating ingredients
        • 3 Adequate shelf life
        • 4 Satisfactory consistency and texture
        • 5 Easy to disinfect with out loss of accuracy
        • 6 Compatible with die and cast material
        • 7 Dimensional stability
        • 8 Good elastic properties
        • 9 Easy manipulation
        • 10 Adequate setting characteristics
        • 11 High degree of reproduction details
        • 12 Adequate strength
        • 13 Should not release any gas
        • 14 Economical
        • 15 Should not be technique sensitive
        • 1 Based on rigidityelasticity -
        • a Rigid (non-elastic)
        • b Elastic
        • 2 Based on viscosity -
        • a Mucostatic
        • b Mucocompressive
        • c Pseudoplastic
          • 3 Based on setting of material -
            • 1 a chemical reaction
            • b Physical change of state
            • 2 a reversible
            • b Irreversible
            • 4Based on interaction with salivawater -
            • 1 Hydrophobic
            • 2 Hydrophilic
              • 5Based on chemistry-
                • 1 Impression Plaster
                • 2 Impression compound
                • 3 Metal oxide (zinc oxide eugenol)
                • 4 Reversible hydrocolloid
                • 5 Irreversible hydrocolloid
                • 6 Poly sulfides
                • 7 Condensation silicones
                • 8 Addition silicones
                • 9 Polyether
                • 10 Visible light curing polyether urethane dimethacrylate
                  • 6Based on use -
                    • 1 Primary impression materials
                    • 2 Secondary impression materials
                    • 3 Duplicating materials
                      • HYDROCOLLOIDS
                        • Colloids are often classified as fourth state of matter the Colloidal state In a solution of sugar in water the sugar molecules are uniformly dispersed in the water amp there is no visible physical separation between the solute amp the solvent molecules If sugar molecules replaced with large amp visible particles such as sand the system is Suspension or if molecules are liquid such vegetable oil then system is Emulsion
                        • True solution exists as a single phase However both the colloid amp the suspension have to phase- The dispersed amp Dispersion phase In the colloid the particles in the dispersed phase consist of molecules held together either by primary or secondary force The size of the particles range is 1 ndash 200nm
                          • Gels
                            • Colloids with a liquid as the dispersion medium can exist in two different forms known as Sol amp Gel
                            • A sol has the appearance amp many characteristic of a various liquid
                            • A gel on the contrary is a semi solid amp produced from a soldering process of gelation by the formation of fibrils or chains called Micelles
                            • Gelation is the conversion of a sol to gel amp the temperature at which this occurs is called Gelation Temperature
                              • Gelation may be brought about in one of these ways
                                • Lowering the temperature- It is done by reducing the thermal energy of effectively These forces are secondary molecular forces The bond between the fibrils is weak amp they break at slightly elevated temperature Gelation temp is 37-50degree centigrade
                                • Liquefaction temperature- It is considerable higher than gelation temp amp this property is known as Hysteresis This temp is between 70 -100 degree centigrade
                                • Chemical reaction- Gelation may also induced by chemical reaction where in the dispersed phase of soil is allowed to react with a substance to give a different type of dispersed phase The process is not reversed by an increased temperature
                                  • Types of Hydrocolloids
                                    • REVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS - Reversible hydrocolloids are those sol can be changed to gel but gel canrsquot be reversed back to the solution
                                    • Eg Alginate impression material
                                    • IRREVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS - Irreversible hydrocolloids are those materials where the change from the sol to gel can be brought by lowering the temp of the sol amp the gel can be converted back to sol condition by heating
                                    • Eg Agar ndash Agar
                                      • ALGINATE IRREVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOID
                                        • The word alginate comes from Algin amp named by a chemist of Scotland It was identified as a liner polymer with numerous carboxyl acid groups It is called as irreversible hydrocolloids because gelation is induced by chemical reaction amp transformation is not possible It is the most widely used dental materials
                                        • The principal factors responsible for the success of this type of impression materials are-
                                        • Easy to manipulate
                                        • Comfortable for the patients
                                        • Relatively inexpensive
                                        • Composition
                                        • Potassium or Sodium Alginate- 15 It is the chief active ingredient
                                        • Calcium Sulfate- 16 It is used as a reactor
                                        • Zinc Oxide amp Diatomaceous Earth- Zinc oxide ndash 4 amp Diatomaceous
                                        • earth 60
                                        • Potassium Titanium Fluoride - 3
                                        • Sodium Phosphate - 2
                                          • Gelation Process
                                            • The typical sol-gel reaction is a soluble alginate with calcium sulfate amp the formation of an insoluble calcium alginate gel Calcium sulfate reacts rapidly to produce the in soluble Ca alginate from the potassium or sodium alginate in a aqueous solution The production of calcium alginate is rapid that it does not allow sufficient working time Thus third water soluble salt such as a trisodium phosphate is added to the solution to prolong the working time Thus the reaction between the calcium sulfate amp the soluble alginate is prevented as long as there is uncreated trisodium phosphate
                                            • 2Na3Po4 +n CaSo4 rarrnKaSo4 +Ca alginate
                                            • When the supply of the trisodium phosphate is exhausted the ca ions begin to react with the potassium alginate to produce calcium alginate Kzn Alg +n CaSo4rarr n KaSo4 + Cal alginate
                                            • The added salt is retarder
                                            • Controlling of gelation time-
                                            • An increase in the temp of water used for mixing shorten the working amp setting time
                                            • The proportion of powder amp water also effect the setting time
                                              • PROPERTIES
                                                • Alginate is of two types
                                                • Type I - Fast setting
                                                • Type II - Normal setting
                                                • According to ADA Specification No 18 properties are-
                                                • 1 Mixing time- Creamy consistency come in 45 ndash 60 sec
                                                • 2 Working time-
                                                • - Fast setting material - 12 ndash 2 min
                                                • - Normal set material - 2 ndash 45 min
                                                • 3 Setting or gelation time-
                                                • - Optimum gelation time - 3-4 min at room temp
                                                • - For fast setting material - 1 -2 min
                                                • - For normal setting material - 2 ndash 45min
                                                • 4 Permanent deformation - ADA specification requires 97 recovery amp where 3 is permanent deformation Alginate has 988 recovery amp 15 permanent deformation
                                                • 5 Flexibility- ADA specification permits10 ndash 20 at the stress of 1000gm cm2 Hard material has value of 5-8
                                                • 6 Strength-
                                                • The compressive strength- 5000-8000gmcm2
                                                • Tear strength - 350-700gmcm2
                                                • 7Viscoelasticity Usually an alginate impression material does not adhere to the oral tissue as strongly as some of the non aqueous elastomers so it is easy to remove the alginate impression rapidly
                                                • 8Accuracy Most alginate is not capable of reproducing the finer details that are absorbed in impression with Agar amp other elastomeric impression material
                                                • 9 Dimensional effects - The gel may loss water by evaporation from its surface amp it shrinks
                                                • - If the gel placed in the water it absorbed water amp gel swells
                                                • - Thermal change also contributes to dimensional change The alginate shrinks slightly due to difference in temp between mouth temp(30c) amp room temp(23c)
                                                • 10 Biocompatibility -
                                                • No chemical or allergic reaction associated with alginate
                                                • 11 Shelf life -
                                                • Alginate impressions have shorter shelf life Strong temp amp moisture contamination are two factor which effect the self life of alginate
                                                  • MANIPULATION OF ALGINATE
                                                    • PREPARING THE MIX
                                                    • A measured powder is shifted into pre measured water that has been placed in a clean rubber bowl Care should be taken to avoid whipping air into the mix A vigorous figure 8 motion is best with the mix being swiped or stropped against the side of the mixing rubber bowl with intermittent rotation ie180 degree of the spatula to press out air bubbles The mixing time is 45sec -1 min
                                                    • A variety of mechanical devices are also available for mixing impression material There benefits are convenience speed amp elimination of human error
                                                    • MAKING THE IMPRESSION
                                                    • Before setting the impression the material should have developed sufficient body so that it doesnrsquot flow out of the try A perforated tray is generally used If plastic try or metal rim lock try is selected a thin layer of adhesive should be applied amp allowed to dry before mixing and loading the try The thickness of the alginate between the tray amp tissue should be at least 3mm
                                                    • ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES
                                                    • Advantages
                                                    • 1 Cannot be electroplated
                                                    • 2 Distortion occurs easily
                                                    • 3 Poor dimensional stability (poured within 15 min)
                                                    • 4 Poor tear strength
                                                    • AGAR ndash REVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS
                                                    • When agar hydrocolloids heated they liquefy or go into the sol state amp on cooling they return to the gel state Because this process can be repeated a gel of this type is described as Reversible hydrocolloid The preparation of the agar hydrocolloids for clinical use requires care full control amp yields accurate impression It has been largely replaced by alginate hydrocolloids amp rubber impression materials
                                                      • COMPOSITION
                                                        • Borates - 02 ndash 05 Its works as retarder
                                                        • water - 855 It is reaction medium
                                                        • Agar- 13-17 It is main active constituent of reversible hydrocolloid impression material
                                                        • Sulfates - 1 ndash 2 Accelerators
                                                        • Fillers - 05 -1 Diatomaceous earth silica wax rubber etc used as filler
                                                        • Bactericide - Thymol amp glycerin are used
                                                        • Color amp flavor
                                                          • GELATION PROCESS
                                                            • The setting of the reversible hydrocolloid is called gelation The reaction can be expressed a sol- gel reaction The physical changes from to gel does not return to the sol at the same temp at which it solidified The gel must be heated at the liquefaction temp ie 70 - 100c to form sol Sol transform into a gel at 37-50c the exact gelation temp depended on several factor including the molecular wt the purity of the material amp the ratio of agar to other ingredients
                                                            • The gelation is critical If the temp is high the heat from sol may injury to the soft tissue or if the surface of the sol transforms to a gel as soon as the sol may injure the oral tissues a high surface stress may develop If the gelation temp is too far below the oral temp it will be difficulty or even impossible to chill the material sufficiently to obtain a firm gel to adjacent to the oral tissue The temp lag between the gelation amp liquefaction temp of the gel makes it possible to use as a dental impression material
                                                              • PROPERTIES
                                                                • Gelation temperature -
                                                                • After tempering the sol should be homogenous and should set to a gel between 37 ndash 500c when cooled
                                                                • Viscoelastic properties -
                                                                • It demonstrates the necessity of deforming the impression rapidly when it removed from the mouth which reduces the amount of the permanent deformation The elastic recovery of the hydrocolloid is never complete amp it does not return entirely to its original dimension after deformation The amount of permanent deformation in clinical is negligible provided that -
                                                                • a) The material has adequately gelled
                                                                • b) The impression has been removed rapidly
                                                                • c) The under cuts present in the cavity preparation are minimal
                                                                • Permanent deformation -
                                                                • The ADA specification requires that the permanent deformation should be less than 15 after the material compressed 10 for 30sec This impression material readily meets this requirement with the value of about 1
                                                                • Distortion during gelation -
                                                                • If the material is held rigidly to the tray then the impression material shrinks toward the center of its mass Rapid cooling may cause a concentration of stress near the tray where gelation first takes place
                                                                • Flexibility -
                                                                • The ADA specification requirement for flexibility allows a range of 4-14 amp most agar materials meet this requirement
                                                                • Strength -
                                                                • The compressive strength of Agar impression material is 8000gmcm2
                                                                • The tear strength of Agar is 7000gmcm2
                                                                • Flow -
                                                                • Agar is sufficiently fluid to allow detailed reproduction of hard amp soft tissue
                                                                • Compatibility with gypsum -
                                                                • Not all the agar impression materials are equally compatible with all gypsum products The impression should be washed of saliva amp any trace of blood which retarded the setting of gypsum
                                                                  • Manipulation of agar impression
                                                                    • The use of agar hydrocolloid involves special equipment called conditioning unit for agar The hydrocolloid is usually supplied In two forms syringe and tray materials The only difference between the materials is the color and the greater fluidity of the syringe material
                                                                      • Impression tray
                                                                        • It is rim locked trays with water circulating device This types of trays should allow a space of 3mm occlusally and laterally and extend distally to cover all the teeth After the tray has been properly positioned water is circulated at 13 degrees through the tray until gelation occurs
                                                                          • Preparation of material
                                                                            • Proper equipment of liquefying and storing the agar impression material is essential
                                                                            • At first reverse the hydrocolloid gel to the sol stage Boiling water is a convenient way of liquefying the material The material must be held at this temperature for a minimum of 10mins Propylene glycol can be added to the water to obtain 100 degrees After it has been liquefied the material must be stored in the tray The material can be stored for several days Usually there are three compartments in the conditioning unit making it possible to liquefy store and temper the material
                                                                              • Conditioning and tempering
                                                                                • Because 55 degree is the maximum tolerable temperature the storage temperature of 65 degrees would be too hot for the oral tissues especially given the bulk of the tray material Therefore the material that is used to fill the tray must be cooled and tempered Eliminating the effect of imbibition is the purpose of placing the gauze pad over the tempering tray materials When the tray material is placed into the tempering bath the gauze is removed and the contaminating surface layer of material clings to the gauze and is removed as well
                                                                                  • Making the impression
                                                                                    • The syringe material is taken directly from the storage compartment and applied to the prepared cavities It is first applied to the base of the preparation and then the reminder of the tooth is covered By the time the cavity preparation and adjoining teeth have been covered the tray material has been properly tempered and is now ready to be placed immediately in the mouth to form the bulk of impression Gelation is accelerated by circulating cool water approximately 18 ndash 21 degrees through the tray for 3 ndash 5 minutes
                                                                                      • Disinfection of hydrocolloid impression
                                                                                        • As the hydrocolloid impression material must be poured within short time after removal from the mouth The disinfection procedure should be relatively rapid to prevent the dimensional change Most manufacturers recommended a specific disinfectant The agent may be iodophor bleach or gluteraldehyde The distortion is minimal if the recommended immersion time is followed and if the impression is poured properly The irreversible hydrocolloid may be disinfected by 10 minute immersion inor spraying with the antimicrobial agent such as NaOCl and glutaraldehyde without sufficient dimensional change The current protocol for disinfecting hydrocolloid impression is to use household bleach iodophor and synthetic phenols as disinfectants After the immersion it is thoroughly rinsed The disinfectant is sprayed liberally o the exposed surface The immersion should not be submerged or soaked in the disinfectant solution
                                                                                          • ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES
                                                                                          • TYPES OF FAILURES
                                                                                            • 1 Distortion- due to
                                                                                            • Delayed pouring of impression
                                                                                            • Movement of tray during setting
                                                                                            • Removal from mouth too early
                                                                                            • 2 Grainy impression- due to
                                                                                            • Inadequate mixing
                                                                                            • Prolonged mixing
                                                                                            • Less water in mix
                                                                                            • 3 Tearing - due to
                                                                                            • Inadequate bulk
                                                                                            • Moisture contamination
                                                                                            • Removal from mouth too early
                                                                                            • Prolonged mixing
                                                                                            • 4 Bubbles- due to
                                                                                            • Early gelation preventing flow
                                                                                            • Air incorporated during mixing
                                                                                            • 5 Irregular voids- due to
                                                                                            • Excess moisture ampdebris on
                                                                                              • 1 Anusavice ldquoSkinners science of dental materialsrdquo Tenth Edition
Page 15: Hydroco Llo Ids / orthodontic courses by Indian dental academy

Hydrocolloids

Conditioning and tempering

Because 55 degree is the maximum tolerable temperature the storage temperature

of 65 degrees would be too hot for the oral tissues especially given the bulk of the tray

material Therefore the material that is used to fill the tray must be cooled and tempered

Eliminating the effect of imbibition is the purpose of placing the gauze pad over the

tempering tray materials When the tray material is placed into the tempering bath the

gauze is removed and the contaminating surface layer of material clings to the gauze and is

removed as well

Making the impression

The syringe material is taken directly from the storage compartment and applied to

the prepared cavities It is first applied to the base of the preparation and then the reminder

of the tooth is covered By the time the cavity preparation and adjoining teeth have been

covered the tray material has been properly tempered and is now ready to be placed

immediately in the mouth to form the bulk of impression Gelation is accelerated by

circulating cool water approximately 18 ndash 21 degrees through the tray for 3 ndash 5 minutes

Disinfection of hydrocolloid impression

As the hydrocolloid impression material must be poured within short time after

removal from the mouth The disinfection procedure should be relatively rapid to prevent

the dimensional change Most manufacturers recommended a specific disinfectant The

agent may be iodophor bleach or gluteraldehyde The distortion is minimal if the

recommended immersion time is followed and if the impression is poured properly The

irreversible hydrocolloid may be disinfected by 10 minute immersion inor spraying with

the antimicrobial agent such as NaOCl and glutaraldehyde without sufficient dimensional

change The current protocol for disinfecting hydrocolloid impression is to use household

bleach iodophor and synthetic phenols as disinfectants After the immersion it is

thoroughly rinsed The disinfectant is sprayed liberally o the exposed surface The

immersion should not be submerged or soaked in the disinfectant solution

Page 15

Hydrocolloids

Recent techniques

Laminate technique

A recent modification of the conventional procedure is the combined agar alginate

technique The hydrocolloid in the tray is replaced with a mix of chilled alginate

that bonds with the agar expressed from a syringe

The alginate gels by a chemical reaction whereas the agar gels by means of

contact with cool alginate rather than with the water circulating through the tray

Since the agar not the alginate is in contact with the prepared teeth maximum

detail is reproduced

Advantages

syringe agar records tissues more accurately

Water cooled tray is not required

Sets faster

Disadvantages

Agar ndash alginate bond failure can occur

Viscous alginate may displace agar

Technique sensitive

Wet field technique

This is a recent technique

The oral tissues are flooded with warm water The syringe material is then

injected in to the surface to be recorded

Before syringe material gels tray material is seated

Page 16

Hydrocolloids

The hydraulic pressure of the viscous tray material forces the fluid syringe

material down in to the areas to be recorded

The motion displaces the syringe material as well as blood and debris through out

the sulcus

ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES

Advantages

1 Hydrophilic Impression material

2 Good elastic properties Good recovery from distortion

3 Can be re-used as a duplicating material

4 Long working time and low material cost

5 No mixing technique

6 High accuracy and fine detail recording

Disadvantages

1 Only one model can be used

2 Extensive and expensive equipment required

3 It can not be electroplated

4 Impossible to sterilize for reuse

5 Low dimensional stability amp tear resistance

TYPES OF FAILURES

1 Distortion- due to

Delayed pouring of impression

Movement of tray during setting

Removal from mouth too early

2 Grainy impression- due to

Inadequate mixing

Page 17

Hydrocolloids

Prolonged mixing

Less water in mix

3 Tearing - due to

Inadequate bulk

Moisture contamination

Removal from mouth too early

Prolonged mixing

4 Bubbles- due to

Early gelation preventing flow

Air incorporated during mixing

5 Irregular voids- due to

Excess moisture ampdebris on

REFERENCES

1 Anusavice ldquoSkinners science of dental materialsrdquo Tenth Edition

2 Dental materials and their selection-willian jorsquo brien

3 Restorative dental materials-craig

4 Removable prosthodintics- stewart

Page 18

  • Constructing a model or cast is an important step in numerous dental procedures Various types of cast amp models can be made from gypsum products using an impression mold or negative likeness of a dental structure An impression is a negative replica of the tissue of the oral cavity It is used to register or reproduce the form and relation of the teeth amp surrounding tissue
  • HISTORY
    • 1558 - Celline described a wax model to make impression in his book MEMORIES
    • 1700 - Matheus G Purenam suggested that wax models can be used in prosthetic work
    • 1728 ndash Pierre Fauchard described various impression materials in his book LE CHIRURGEEN DENTISTE
    • 1756 ndash Persian Phillip Pfaff first used plaster models prepared from sectional wax impression of the mouth
    • 1810 ndash R C Skinner describe about many materials and techniques in his first American book
    • 1928 ndash ADA developed specification No 19 for impression material
    • 1930 ndash Zinc Oxide Eugenol a rigid impression was introduced
    • 1930 ndash Polysulfide was first used as a commercial synthetic rubber as a copolymer of Ethylene Chloride amp sodium
    • 1937 ndash Agar was introduced by Sears
    • 1949 ndash Alginate was developed during World war II
    • 1950 ndash Polysulfide was used in dentistry
    • 1955 ndash Condensation Silicone was introduced in Germany
    • 1975 ndash Addition Silicone was introduced
    • 1977 ndash Costell introduced Dual tray technique
    • 1980 ndash A Visible light cure Polyether Urethane Dimethacrylate rubber impression material was introduced
    • 1996 ndash Blare amp Wassed considered a no of solution used to disinfecting impression material
      • IDEAL REQUIREMENTS OF IMPRESSION MATERIAL
        • 1 Pleasant taste amp odor
        • 2 Not contain any toxic amp irritating ingredients
        • 3 Adequate shelf life
        • 4 Satisfactory consistency and texture
        • 5 Easy to disinfect with out loss of accuracy
        • 6 Compatible with die and cast material
        • 7 Dimensional stability
        • 8 Good elastic properties
        • 9 Easy manipulation
        • 10 Adequate setting characteristics
        • 11 High degree of reproduction details
        • 12 Adequate strength
        • 13 Should not release any gas
        • 14 Economical
        • 15 Should not be technique sensitive
        • 1 Based on rigidityelasticity -
        • a Rigid (non-elastic)
        • b Elastic
        • 2 Based on viscosity -
        • a Mucostatic
        • b Mucocompressive
        • c Pseudoplastic
          • 3 Based on setting of material -
            • 1 a chemical reaction
            • b Physical change of state
            • 2 a reversible
            • b Irreversible
            • 4Based on interaction with salivawater -
            • 1 Hydrophobic
            • 2 Hydrophilic
              • 5Based on chemistry-
                • 1 Impression Plaster
                • 2 Impression compound
                • 3 Metal oxide (zinc oxide eugenol)
                • 4 Reversible hydrocolloid
                • 5 Irreversible hydrocolloid
                • 6 Poly sulfides
                • 7 Condensation silicones
                • 8 Addition silicones
                • 9 Polyether
                • 10 Visible light curing polyether urethane dimethacrylate
                  • 6Based on use -
                    • 1 Primary impression materials
                    • 2 Secondary impression materials
                    • 3 Duplicating materials
                      • HYDROCOLLOIDS
                        • Colloids are often classified as fourth state of matter the Colloidal state In a solution of sugar in water the sugar molecules are uniformly dispersed in the water amp there is no visible physical separation between the solute amp the solvent molecules If sugar molecules replaced with large amp visible particles such as sand the system is Suspension or if molecules are liquid such vegetable oil then system is Emulsion
                        • True solution exists as a single phase However both the colloid amp the suspension have to phase- The dispersed amp Dispersion phase In the colloid the particles in the dispersed phase consist of molecules held together either by primary or secondary force The size of the particles range is 1 ndash 200nm
                          • Gels
                            • Colloids with a liquid as the dispersion medium can exist in two different forms known as Sol amp Gel
                            • A sol has the appearance amp many characteristic of a various liquid
                            • A gel on the contrary is a semi solid amp produced from a soldering process of gelation by the formation of fibrils or chains called Micelles
                            • Gelation is the conversion of a sol to gel amp the temperature at which this occurs is called Gelation Temperature
                              • Gelation may be brought about in one of these ways
                                • Lowering the temperature- It is done by reducing the thermal energy of effectively These forces are secondary molecular forces The bond between the fibrils is weak amp they break at slightly elevated temperature Gelation temp is 37-50degree centigrade
                                • Liquefaction temperature- It is considerable higher than gelation temp amp this property is known as Hysteresis This temp is between 70 -100 degree centigrade
                                • Chemical reaction- Gelation may also induced by chemical reaction where in the dispersed phase of soil is allowed to react with a substance to give a different type of dispersed phase The process is not reversed by an increased temperature
                                  • Types of Hydrocolloids
                                    • REVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS - Reversible hydrocolloids are those sol can be changed to gel but gel canrsquot be reversed back to the solution
                                    • Eg Alginate impression material
                                    • IRREVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS - Irreversible hydrocolloids are those materials where the change from the sol to gel can be brought by lowering the temp of the sol amp the gel can be converted back to sol condition by heating
                                    • Eg Agar ndash Agar
                                      • ALGINATE IRREVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOID
                                        • The word alginate comes from Algin amp named by a chemist of Scotland It was identified as a liner polymer with numerous carboxyl acid groups It is called as irreversible hydrocolloids because gelation is induced by chemical reaction amp transformation is not possible It is the most widely used dental materials
                                        • The principal factors responsible for the success of this type of impression materials are-
                                        • Easy to manipulate
                                        • Comfortable for the patients
                                        • Relatively inexpensive
                                        • Composition
                                        • Potassium or Sodium Alginate- 15 It is the chief active ingredient
                                        • Calcium Sulfate- 16 It is used as a reactor
                                        • Zinc Oxide amp Diatomaceous Earth- Zinc oxide ndash 4 amp Diatomaceous
                                        • earth 60
                                        • Potassium Titanium Fluoride - 3
                                        • Sodium Phosphate - 2
                                          • Gelation Process
                                            • The typical sol-gel reaction is a soluble alginate with calcium sulfate amp the formation of an insoluble calcium alginate gel Calcium sulfate reacts rapidly to produce the in soluble Ca alginate from the potassium or sodium alginate in a aqueous solution The production of calcium alginate is rapid that it does not allow sufficient working time Thus third water soluble salt such as a trisodium phosphate is added to the solution to prolong the working time Thus the reaction between the calcium sulfate amp the soluble alginate is prevented as long as there is uncreated trisodium phosphate
                                            • 2Na3Po4 +n CaSo4 rarrnKaSo4 +Ca alginate
                                            • When the supply of the trisodium phosphate is exhausted the ca ions begin to react with the potassium alginate to produce calcium alginate Kzn Alg +n CaSo4rarr n KaSo4 + Cal alginate
                                            • The added salt is retarder
                                            • Controlling of gelation time-
                                            • An increase in the temp of water used for mixing shorten the working amp setting time
                                            • The proportion of powder amp water also effect the setting time
                                              • PROPERTIES
                                                • Alginate is of two types
                                                • Type I - Fast setting
                                                • Type II - Normal setting
                                                • According to ADA Specification No 18 properties are-
                                                • 1 Mixing time- Creamy consistency come in 45 ndash 60 sec
                                                • 2 Working time-
                                                • - Fast setting material - 12 ndash 2 min
                                                • - Normal set material - 2 ndash 45 min
                                                • 3 Setting or gelation time-
                                                • - Optimum gelation time - 3-4 min at room temp
                                                • - For fast setting material - 1 -2 min
                                                • - For normal setting material - 2 ndash 45min
                                                • 4 Permanent deformation - ADA specification requires 97 recovery amp where 3 is permanent deformation Alginate has 988 recovery amp 15 permanent deformation
                                                • 5 Flexibility- ADA specification permits10 ndash 20 at the stress of 1000gm cm2 Hard material has value of 5-8
                                                • 6 Strength-
                                                • The compressive strength- 5000-8000gmcm2
                                                • Tear strength - 350-700gmcm2
                                                • 7Viscoelasticity Usually an alginate impression material does not adhere to the oral tissue as strongly as some of the non aqueous elastomers so it is easy to remove the alginate impression rapidly
                                                • 8Accuracy Most alginate is not capable of reproducing the finer details that are absorbed in impression with Agar amp other elastomeric impression material
                                                • 9 Dimensional effects - The gel may loss water by evaporation from its surface amp it shrinks
                                                • - If the gel placed in the water it absorbed water amp gel swells
                                                • - Thermal change also contributes to dimensional change The alginate shrinks slightly due to difference in temp between mouth temp(30c) amp room temp(23c)
                                                • 10 Biocompatibility -
                                                • No chemical or allergic reaction associated with alginate
                                                • 11 Shelf life -
                                                • Alginate impressions have shorter shelf life Strong temp amp moisture contamination are two factor which effect the self life of alginate
                                                  • MANIPULATION OF ALGINATE
                                                    • PREPARING THE MIX
                                                    • A measured powder is shifted into pre measured water that has been placed in a clean rubber bowl Care should be taken to avoid whipping air into the mix A vigorous figure 8 motion is best with the mix being swiped or stropped against the side of the mixing rubber bowl with intermittent rotation ie180 degree of the spatula to press out air bubbles The mixing time is 45sec -1 min
                                                    • A variety of mechanical devices are also available for mixing impression material There benefits are convenience speed amp elimination of human error
                                                    • MAKING THE IMPRESSION
                                                    • Before setting the impression the material should have developed sufficient body so that it doesnrsquot flow out of the try A perforated tray is generally used If plastic try or metal rim lock try is selected a thin layer of adhesive should be applied amp allowed to dry before mixing and loading the try The thickness of the alginate between the tray amp tissue should be at least 3mm
                                                    • ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES
                                                    • Advantages
                                                    • 1 Cannot be electroplated
                                                    • 2 Distortion occurs easily
                                                    • 3 Poor dimensional stability (poured within 15 min)
                                                    • 4 Poor tear strength
                                                    • AGAR ndash REVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS
                                                    • When agar hydrocolloids heated they liquefy or go into the sol state amp on cooling they return to the gel state Because this process can be repeated a gel of this type is described as Reversible hydrocolloid The preparation of the agar hydrocolloids for clinical use requires care full control amp yields accurate impression It has been largely replaced by alginate hydrocolloids amp rubber impression materials
                                                      • COMPOSITION
                                                        • Borates - 02 ndash 05 Its works as retarder
                                                        • water - 855 It is reaction medium
                                                        • Agar- 13-17 It is main active constituent of reversible hydrocolloid impression material
                                                        • Sulfates - 1 ndash 2 Accelerators
                                                        • Fillers - 05 -1 Diatomaceous earth silica wax rubber etc used as filler
                                                        • Bactericide - Thymol amp glycerin are used
                                                        • Color amp flavor
                                                          • GELATION PROCESS
                                                            • The setting of the reversible hydrocolloid is called gelation The reaction can be expressed a sol- gel reaction The physical changes from to gel does not return to the sol at the same temp at which it solidified The gel must be heated at the liquefaction temp ie 70 - 100c to form sol Sol transform into a gel at 37-50c the exact gelation temp depended on several factor including the molecular wt the purity of the material amp the ratio of agar to other ingredients
                                                            • The gelation is critical If the temp is high the heat from sol may injury to the soft tissue or if the surface of the sol transforms to a gel as soon as the sol may injure the oral tissues a high surface stress may develop If the gelation temp is too far below the oral temp it will be difficulty or even impossible to chill the material sufficiently to obtain a firm gel to adjacent to the oral tissue The temp lag between the gelation amp liquefaction temp of the gel makes it possible to use as a dental impression material
                                                              • PROPERTIES
                                                                • Gelation temperature -
                                                                • After tempering the sol should be homogenous and should set to a gel between 37 ndash 500c when cooled
                                                                • Viscoelastic properties -
                                                                • It demonstrates the necessity of deforming the impression rapidly when it removed from the mouth which reduces the amount of the permanent deformation The elastic recovery of the hydrocolloid is never complete amp it does not return entirely to its original dimension after deformation The amount of permanent deformation in clinical is negligible provided that -
                                                                • a) The material has adequately gelled
                                                                • b) The impression has been removed rapidly
                                                                • c) The under cuts present in the cavity preparation are minimal
                                                                • Permanent deformation -
                                                                • The ADA specification requires that the permanent deformation should be less than 15 after the material compressed 10 for 30sec This impression material readily meets this requirement with the value of about 1
                                                                • Distortion during gelation -
                                                                • If the material is held rigidly to the tray then the impression material shrinks toward the center of its mass Rapid cooling may cause a concentration of stress near the tray where gelation first takes place
                                                                • Flexibility -
                                                                • The ADA specification requirement for flexibility allows a range of 4-14 amp most agar materials meet this requirement
                                                                • Strength -
                                                                • The compressive strength of Agar impression material is 8000gmcm2
                                                                • The tear strength of Agar is 7000gmcm2
                                                                • Flow -
                                                                • Agar is sufficiently fluid to allow detailed reproduction of hard amp soft tissue
                                                                • Compatibility with gypsum -
                                                                • Not all the agar impression materials are equally compatible with all gypsum products The impression should be washed of saliva amp any trace of blood which retarded the setting of gypsum
                                                                  • Manipulation of agar impression
                                                                    • The use of agar hydrocolloid involves special equipment called conditioning unit for agar The hydrocolloid is usually supplied In two forms syringe and tray materials The only difference between the materials is the color and the greater fluidity of the syringe material
                                                                      • Impression tray
                                                                        • It is rim locked trays with water circulating device This types of trays should allow a space of 3mm occlusally and laterally and extend distally to cover all the teeth After the tray has been properly positioned water is circulated at 13 degrees through the tray until gelation occurs
                                                                          • Preparation of material
                                                                            • Proper equipment of liquefying and storing the agar impression material is essential
                                                                            • At first reverse the hydrocolloid gel to the sol stage Boiling water is a convenient way of liquefying the material The material must be held at this temperature for a minimum of 10mins Propylene glycol can be added to the water to obtain 100 degrees After it has been liquefied the material must be stored in the tray The material can be stored for several days Usually there are three compartments in the conditioning unit making it possible to liquefy store and temper the material
                                                                              • Conditioning and tempering
                                                                                • Because 55 degree is the maximum tolerable temperature the storage temperature of 65 degrees would be too hot for the oral tissues especially given the bulk of the tray material Therefore the material that is used to fill the tray must be cooled and tempered Eliminating the effect of imbibition is the purpose of placing the gauze pad over the tempering tray materials When the tray material is placed into the tempering bath the gauze is removed and the contaminating surface layer of material clings to the gauze and is removed as well
                                                                                  • Making the impression
                                                                                    • The syringe material is taken directly from the storage compartment and applied to the prepared cavities It is first applied to the base of the preparation and then the reminder of the tooth is covered By the time the cavity preparation and adjoining teeth have been covered the tray material has been properly tempered and is now ready to be placed immediately in the mouth to form the bulk of impression Gelation is accelerated by circulating cool water approximately 18 ndash 21 degrees through the tray for 3 ndash 5 minutes
                                                                                      • Disinfection of hydrocolloid impression
                                                                                        • As the hydrocolloid impression material must be poured within short time after removal from the mouth The disinfection procedure should be relatively rapid to prevent the dimensional change Most manufacturers recommended a specific disinfectant The agent may be iodophor bleach or gluteraldehyde The distortion is minimal if the recommended immersion time is followed and if the impression is poured properly The irreversible hydrocolloid may be disinfected by 10 minute immersion inor spraying with the antimicrobial agent such as NaOCl and glutaraldehyde without sufficient dimensional change The current protocol for disinfecting hydrocolloid impression is to use household bleach iodophor and synthetic phenols as disinfectants After the immersion it is thoroughly rinsed The disinfectant is sprayed liberally o the exposed surface The immersion should not be submerged or soaked in the disinfectant solution
                                                                                          • ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES
                                                                                          • TYPES OF FAILURES
                                                                                            • 1 Distortion- due to
                                                                                            • Delayed pouring of impression
                                                                                            • Movement of tray during setting
                                                                                            • Removal from mouth too early
                                                                                            • 2 Grainy impression- due to
                                                                                            • Inadequate mixing
                                                                                            • Prolonged mixing
                                                                                            • Less water in mix
                                                                                            • 3 Tearing - due to
                                                                                            • Inadequate bulk
                                                                                            • Moisture contamination
                                                                                            • Removal from mouth too early
                                                                                            • Prolonged mixing
                                                                                            • 4 Bubbles- due to
                                                                                            • Early gelation preventing flow
                                                                                            • Air incorporated during mixing
                                                                                            • 5 Irregular voids- due to
                                                                                            • Excess moisture ampdebris on
                                                                                              • 1 Anusavice ldquoSkinners science of dental materialsrdquo Tenth Edition
Page 16: Hydroco Llo Ids / orthodontic courses by Indian dental academy

Hydrocolloids

Recent techniques

Laminate technique

A recent modification of the conventional procedure is the combined agar alginate

technique The hydrocolloid in the tray is replaced with a mix of chilled alginate

that bonds with the agar expressed from a syringe

The alginate gels by a chemical reaction whereas the agar gels by means of

contact with cool alginate rather than with the water circulating through the tray

Since the agar not the alginate is in contact with the prepared teeth maximum

detail is reproduced

Advantages

syringe agar records tissues more accurately

Water cooled tray is not required

Sets faster

Disadvantages

Agar ndash alginate bond failure can occur

Viscous alginate may displace agar

Technique sensitive

Wet field technique

This is a recent technique

The oral tissues are flooded with warm water The syringe material is then

injected in to the surface to be recorded

Before syringe material gels tray material is seated

Page 16

Hydrocolloids

The hydraulic pressure of the viscous tray material forces the fluid syringe

material down in to the areas to be recorded

The motion displaces the syringe material as well as blood and debris through out

the sulcus

ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES

Advantages

1 Hydrophilic Impression material

2 Good elastic properties Good recovery from distortion

3 Can be re-used as a duplicating material

4 Long working time and low material cost

5 No mixing technique

6 High accuracy and fine detail recording

Disadvantages

1 Only one model can be used

2 Extensive and expensive equipment required

3 It can not be electroplated

4 Impossible to sterilize for reuse

5 Low dimensional stability amp tear resistance

TYPES OF FAILURES

1 Distortion- due to

Delayed pouring of impression

Movement of tray during setting

Removal from mouth too early

2 Grainy impression- due to

Inadequate mixing

Page 17

Hydrocolloids

Prolonged mixing

Less water in mix

3 Tearing - due to

Inadequate bulk

Moisture contamination

Removal from mouth too early

Prolonged mixing

4 Bubbles- due to

Early gelation preventing flow

Air incorporated during mixing

5 Irregular voids- due to

Excess moisture ampdebris on

REFERENCES

1 Anusavice ldquoSkinners science of dental materialsrdquo Tenth Edition

2 Dental materials and their selection-willian jorsquo brien

3 Restorative dental materials-craig

4 Removable prosthodintics- stewart

Page 18

  • Constructing a model or cast is an important step in numerous dental procedures Various types of cast amp models can be made from gypsum products using an impression mold or negative likeness of a dental structure An impression is a negative replica of the tissue of the oral cavity It is used to register or reproduce the form and relation of the teeth amp surrounding tissue
  • HISTORY
    • 1558 - Celline described a wax model to make impression in his book MEMORIES
    • 1700 - Matheus G Purenam suggested that wax models can be used in prosthetic work
    • 1728 ndash Pierre Fauchard described various impression materials in his book LE CHIRURGEEN DENTISTE
    • 1756 ndash Persian Phillip Pfaff first used plaster models prepared from sectional wax impression of the mouth
    • 1810 ndash R C Skinner describe about many materials and techniques in his first American book
    • 1928 ndash ADA developed specification No 19 for impression material
    • 1930 ndash Zinc Oxide Eugenol a rigid impression was introduced
    • 1930 ndash Polysulfide was first used as a commercial synthetic rubber as a copolymer of Ethylene Chloride amp sodium
    • 1937 ndash Agar was introduced by Sears
    • 1949 ndash Alginate was developed during World war II
    • 1950 ndash Polysulfide was used in dentistry
    • 1955 ndash Condensation Silicone was introduced in Germany
    • 1975 ndash Addition Silicone was introduced
    • 1977 ndash Costell introduced Dual tray technique
    • 1980 ndash A Visible light cure Polyether Urethane Dimethacrylate rubber impression material was introduced
    • 1996 ndash Blare amp Wassed considered a no of solution used to disinfecting impression material
      • IDEAL REQUIREMENTS OF IMPRESSION MATERIAL
        • 1 Pleasant taste amp odor
        • 2 Not contain any toxic amp irritating ingredients
        • 3 Adequate shelf life
        • 4 Satisfactory consistency and texture
        • 5 Easy to disinfect with out loss of accuracy
        • 6 Compatible with die and cast material
        • 7 Dimensional stability
        • 8 Good elastic properties
        • 9 Easy manipulation
        • 10 Adequate setting characteristics
        • 11 High degree of reproduction details
        • 12 Adequate strength
        • 13 Should not release any gas
        • 14 Economical
        • 15 Should not be technique sensitive
        • 1 Based on rigidityelasticity -
        • a Rigid (non-elastic)
        • b Elastic
        • 2 Based on viscosity -
        • a Mucostatic
        • b Mucocompressive
        • c Pseudoplastic
          • 3 Based on setting of material -
            • 1 a chemical reaction
            • b Physical change of state
            • 2 a reversible
            • b Irreversible
            • 4Based on interaction with salivawater -
            • 1 Hydrophobic
            • 2 Hydrophilic
              • 5Based on chemistry-
                • 1 Impression Plaster
                • 2 Impression compound
                • 3 Metal oxide (zinc oxide eugenol)
                • 4 Reversible hydrocolloid
                • 5 Irreversible hydrocolloid
                • 6 Poly sulfides
                • 7 Condensation silicones
                • 8 Addition silicones
                • 9 Polyether
                • 10 Visible light curing polyether urethane dimethacrylate
                  • 6Based on use -
                    • 1 Primary impression materials
                    • 2 Secondary impression materials
                    • 3 Duplicating materials
                      • HYDROCOLLOIDS
                        • Colloids are often classified as fourth state of matter the Colloidal state In a solution of sugar in water the sugar molecules are uniformly dispersed in the water amp there is no visible physical separation between the solute amp the solvent molecules If sugar molecules replaced with large amp visible particles such as sand the system is Suspension or if molecules are liquid such vegetable oil then system is Emulsion
                        • True solution exists as a single phase However both the colloid amp the suspension have to phase- The dispersed amp Dispersion phase In the colloid the particles in the dispersed phase consist of molecules held together either by primary or secondary force The size of the particles range is 1 ndash 200nm
                          • Gels
                            • Colloids with a liquid as the dispersion medium can exist in two different forms known as Sol amp Gel
                            • A sol has the appearance amp many characteristic of a various liquid
                            • A gel on the contrary is a semi solid amp produced from a soldering process of gelation by the formation of fibrils or chains called Micelles
                            • Gelation is the conversion of a sol to gel amp the temperature at which this occurs is called Gelation Temperature
                              • Gelation may be brought about in one of these ways
                                • Lowering the temperature- It is done by reducing the thermal energy of effectively These forces are secondary molecular forces The bond between the fibrils is weak amp they break at slightly elevated temperature Gelation temp is 37-50degree centigrade
                                • Liquefaction temperature- It is considerable higher than gelation temp amp this property is known as Hysteresis This temp is between 70 -100 degree centigrade
                                • Chemical reaction- Gelation may also induced by chemical reaction where in the dispersed phase of soil is allowed to react with a substance to give a different type of dispersed phase The process is not reversed by an increased temperature
                                  • Types of Hydrocolloids
                                    • REVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS - Reversible hydrocolloids are those sol can be changed to gel but gel canrsquot be reversed back to the solution
                                    • Eg Alginate impression material
                                    • IRREVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS - Irreversible hydrocolloids are those materials where the change from the sol to gel can be brought by lowering the temp of the sol amp the gel can be converted back to sol condition by heating
                                    • Eg Agar ndash Agar
                                      • ALGINATE IRREVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOID
                                        • The word alginate comes from Algin amp named by a chemist of Scotland It was identified as a liner polymer with numerous carboxyl acid groups It is called as irreversible hydrocolloids because gelation is induced by chemical reaction amp transformation is not possible It is the most widely used dental materials
                                        • The principal factors responsible for the success of this type of impression materials are-
                                        • Easy to manipulate
                                        • Comfortable for the patients
                                        • Relatively inexpensive
                                        • Composition
                                        • Potassium or Sodium Alginate- 15 It is the chief active ingredient
                                        • Calcium Sulfate- 16 It is used as a reactor
                                        • Zinc Oxide amp Diatomaceous Earth- Zinc oxide ndash 4 amp Diatomaceous
                                        • earth 60
                                        • Potassium Titanium Fluoride - 3
                                        • Sodium Phosphate - 2
                                          • Gelation Process
                                            • The typical sol-gel reaction is a soluble alginate with calcium sulfate amp the formation of an insoluble calcium alginate gel Calcium sulfate reacts rapidly to produce the in soluble Ca alginate from the potassium or sodium alginate in a aqueous solution The production of calcium alginate is rapid that it does not allow sufficient working time Thus third water soluble salt such as a trisodium phosphate is added to the solution to prolong the working time Thus the reaction between the calcium sulfate amp the soluble alginate is prevented as long as there is uncreated trisodium phosphate
                                            • 2Na3Po4 +n CaSo4 rarrnKaSo4 +Ca alginate
                                            • When the supply of the trisodium phosphate is exhausted the ca ions begin to react with the potassium alginate to produce calcium alginate Kzn Alg +n CaSo4rarr n KaSo4 + Cal alginate
                                            • The added salt is retarder
                                            • Controlling of gelation time-
                                            • An increase in the temp of water used for mixing shorten the working amp setting time
                                            • The proportion of powder amp water also effect the setting time
                                              • PROPERTIES
                                                • Alginate is of two types
                                                • Type I - Fast setting
                                                • Type II - Normal setting
                                                • According to ADA Specification No 18 properties are-
                                                • 1 Mixing time- Creamy consistency come in 45 ndash 60 sec
                                                • 2 Working time-
                                                • - Fast setting material - 12 ndash 2 min
                                                • - Normal set material - 2 ndash 45 min
                                                • 3 Setting or gelation time-
                                                • - Optimum gelation time - 3-4 min at room temp
                                                • - For fast setting material - 1 -2 min
                                                • - For normal setting material - 2 ndash 45min
                                                • 4 Permanent deformation - ADA specification requires 97 recovery amp where 3 is permanent deformation Alginate has 988 recovery amp 15 permanent deformation
                                                • 5 Flexibility- ADA specification permits10 ndash 20 at the stress of 1000gm cm2 Hard material has value of 5-8
                                                • 6 Strength-
                                                • The compressive strength- 5000-8000gmcm2
                                                • Tear strength - 350-700gmcm2
                                                • 7Viscoelasticity Usually an alginate impression material does not adhere to the oral tissue as strongly as some of the non aqueous elastomers so it is easy to remove the alginate impression rapidly
                                                • 8Accuracy Most alginate is not capable of reproducing the finer details that are absorbed in impression with Agar amp other elastomeric impression material
                                                • 9 Dimensional effects - The gel may loss water by evaporation from its surface amp it shrinks
                                                • - If the gel placed in the water it absorbed water amp gel swells
                                                • - Thermal change also contributes to dimensional change The alginate shrinks slightly due to difference in temp between mouth temp(30c) amp room temp(23c)
                                                • 10 Biocompatibility -
                                                • No chemical or allergic reaction associated with alginate
                                                • 11 Shelf life -
                                                • Alginate impressions have shorter shelf life Strong temp amp moisture contamination are two factor which effect the self life of alginate
                                                  • MANIPULATION OF ALGINATE
                                                    • PREPARING THE MIX
                                                    • A measured powder is shifted into pre measured water that has been placed in a clean rubber bowl Care should be taken to avoid whipping air into the mix A vigorous figure 8 motion is best with the mix being swiped or stropped against the side of the mixing rubber bowl with intermittent rotation ie180 degree of the spatula to press out air bubbles The mixing time is 45sec -1 min
                                                    • A variety of mechanical devices are also available for mixing impression material There benefits are convenience speed amp elimination of human error
                                                    • MAKING THE IMPRESSION
                                                    • Before setting the impression the material should have developed sufficient body so that it doesnrsquot flow out of the try A perforated tray is generally used If plastic try or metal rim lock try is selected a thin layer of adhesive should be applied amp allowed to dry before mixing and loading the try The thickness of the alginate between the tray amp tissue should be at least 3mm
                                                    • ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES
                                                    • Advantages
                                                    • 1 Cannot be electroplated
                                                    • 2 Distortion occurs easily
                                                    • 3 Poor dimensional stability (poured within 15 min)
                                                    • 4 Poor tear strength
                                                    • AGAR ndash REVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS
                                                    • When agar hydrocolloids heated they liquefy or go into the sol state amp on cooling they return to the gel state Because this process can be repeated a gel of this type is described as Reversible hydrocolloid The preparation of the agar hydrocolloids for clinical use requires care full control amp yields accurate impression It has been largely replaced by alginate hydrocolloids amp rubber impression materials
                                                      • COMPOSITION
                                                        • Borates - 02 ndash 05 Its works as retarder
                                                        • water - 855 It is reaction medium
                                                        • Agar- 13-17 It is main active constituent of reversible hydrocolloid impression material
                                                        • Sulfates - 1 ndash 2 Accelerators
                                                        • Fillers - 05 -1 Diatomaceous earth silica wax rubber etc used as filler
                                                        • Bactericide - Thymol amp glycerin are used
                                                        • Color amp flavor
                                                          • GELATION PROCESS
                                                            • The setting of the reversible hydrocolloid is called gelation The reaction can be expressed a sol- gel reaction The physical changes from to gel does not return to the sol at the same temp at which it solidified The gel must be heated at the liquefaction temp ie 70 - 100c to form sol Sol transform into a gel at 37-50c the exact gelation temp depended on several factor including the molecular wt the purity of the material amp the ratio of agar to other ingredients
                                                            • The gelation is critical If the temp is high the heat from sol may injury to the soft tissue or if the surface of the sol transforms to a gel as soon as the sol may injure the oral tissues a high surface stress may develop If the gelation temp is too far below the oral temp it will be difficulty or even impossible to chill the material sufficiently to obtain a firm gel to adjacent to the oral tissue The temp lag between the gelation amp liquefaction temp of the gel makes it possible to use as a dental impression material
                                                              • PROPERTIES
                                                                • Gelation temperature -
                                                                • After tempering the sol should be homogenous and should set to a gel between 37 ndash 500c when cooled
                                                                • Viscoelastic properties -
                                                                • It demonstrates the necessity of deforming the impression rapidly when it removed from the mouth which reduces the amount of the permanent deformation The elastic recovery of the hydrocolloid is never complete amp it does not return entirely to its original dimension after deformation The amount of permanent deformation in clinical is negligible provided that -
                                                                • a) The material has adequately gelled
                                                                • b) The impression has been removed rapidly
                                                                • c) The under cuts present in the cavity preparation are minimal
                                                                • Permanent deformation -
                                                                • The ADA specification requires that the permanent deformation should be less than 15 after the material compressed 10 for 30sec This impression material readily meets this requirement with the value of about 1
                                                                • Distortion during gelation -
                                                                • If the material is held rigidly to the tray then the impression material shrinks toward the center of its mass Rapid cooling may cause a concentration of stress near the tray where gelation first takes place
                                                                • Flexibility -
                                                                • The ADA specification requirement for flexibility allows a range of 4-14 amp most agar materials meet this requirement
                                                                • Strength -
                                                                • The compressive strength of Agar impression material is 8000gmcm2
                                                                • The tear strength of Agar is 7000gmcm2
                                                                • Flow -
                                                                • Agar is sufficiently fluid to allow detailed reproduction of hard amp soft tissue
                                                                • Compatibility with gypsum -
                                                                • Not all the agar impression materials are equally compatible with all gypsum products The impression should be washed of saliva amp any trace of blood which retarded the setting of gypsum
                                                                  • Manipulation of agar impression
                                                                    • The use of agar hydrocolloid involves special equipment called conditioning unit for agar The hydrocolloid is usually supplied In two forms syringe and tray materials The only difference between the materials is the color and the greater fluidity of the syringe material
                                                                      • Impression tray
                                                                        • It is rim locked trays with water circulating device This types of trays should allow a space of 3mm occlusally and laterally and extend distally to cover all the teeth After the tray has been properly positioned water is circulated at 13 degrees through the tray until gelation occurs
                                                                          • Preparation of material
                                                                            • Proper equipment of liquefying and storing the agar impression material is essential
                                                                            • At first reverse the hydrocolloid gel to the sol stage Boiling water is a convenient way of liquefying the material The material must be held at this temperature for a minimum of 10mins Propylene glycol can be added to the water to obtain 100 degrees After it has been liquefied the material must be stored in the tray The material can be stored for several days Usually there are three compartments in the conditioning unit making it possible to liquefy store and temper the material
                                                                              • Conditioning and tempering
                                                                                • Because 55 degree is the maximum tolerable temperature the storage temperature of 65 degrees would be too hot for the oral tissues especially given the bulk of the tray material Therefore the material that is used to fill the tray must be cooled and tempered Eliminating the effect of imbibition is the purpose of placing the gauze pad over the tempering tray materials When the tray material is placed into the tempering bath the gauze is removed and the contaminating surface layer of material clings to the gauze and is removed as well
                                                                                  • Making the impression
                                                                                    • The syringe material is taken directly from the storage compartment and applied to the prepared cavities It is first applied to the base of the preparation and then the reminder of the tooth is covered By the time the cavity preparation and adjoining teeth have been covered the tray material has been properly tempered and is now ready to be placed immediately in the mouth to form the bulk of impression Gelation is accelerated by circulating cool water approximately 18 ndash 21 degrees through the tray for 3 ndash 5 minutes
                                                                                      • Disinfection of hydrocolloid impression
                                                                                        • As the hydrocolloid impression material must be poured within short time after removal from the mouth The disinfection procedure should be relatively rapid to prevent the dimensional change Most manufacturers recommended a specific disinfectant The agent may be iodophor bleach or gluteraldehyde The distortion is minimal if the recommended immersion time is followed and if the impression is poured properly The irreversible hydrocolloid may be disinfected by 10 minute immersion inor spraying with the antimicrobial agent such as NaOCl and glutaraldehyde without sufficient dimensional change The current protocol for disinfecting hydrocolloid impression is to use household bleach iodophor and synthetic phenols as disinfectants After the immersion it is thoroughly rinsed The disinfectant is sprayed liberally o the exposed surface The immersion should not be submerged or soaked in the disinfectant solution
                                                                                          • ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES
                                                                                          • TYPES OF FAILURES
                                                                                            • 1 Distortion- due to
                                                                                            • Delayed pouring of impression
                                                                                            • Movement of tray during setting
                                                                                            • Removal from mouth too early
                                                                                            • 2 Grainy impression- due to
                                                                                            • Inadequate mixing
                                                                                            • Prolonged mixing
                                                                                            • Less water in mix
                                                                                            • 3 Tearing - due to
                                                                                            • Inadequate bulk
                                                                                            • Moisture contamination
                                                                                            • Removal from mouth too early
                                                                                            • Prolonged mixing
                                                                                            • 4 Bubbles- due to
                                                                                            • Early gelation preventing flow
                                                                                            • Air incorporated during mixing
                                                                                            • 5 Irregular voids- due to
                                                                                            • Excess moisture ampdebris on
                                                                                              • 1 Anusavice ldquoSkinners science of dental materialsrdquo Tenth Edition
Page 17: Hydroco Llo Ids / orthodontic courses by Indian dental academy

Hydrocolloids

The hydraulic pressure of the viscous tray material forces the fluid syringe

material down in to the areas to be recorded

The motion displaces the syringe material as well as blood and debris through out

the sulcus

ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES

Advantages

1 Hydrophilic Impression material

2 Good elastic properties Good recovery from distortion

3 Can be re-used as a duplicating material

4 Long working time and low material cost

5 No mixing technique

6 High accuracy and fine detail recording

Disadvantages

1 Only one model can be used

2 Extensive and expensive equipment required

3 It can not be electroplated

4 Impossible to sterilize for reuse

5 Low dimensional stability amp tear resistance

TYPES OF FAILURES

1 Distortion- due to

Delayed pouring of impression

Movement of tray during setting

Removal from mouth too early

2 Grainy impression- due to

Inadequate mixing

Page 17

Hydrocolloids

Prolonged mixing

Less water in mix

3 Tearing - due to

Inadequate bulk

Moisture contamination

Removal from mouth too early

Prolonged mixing

4 Bubbles- due to

Early gelation preventing flow

Air incorporated during mixing

5 Irregular voids- due to

Excess moisture ampdebris on

REFERENCES

1 Anusavice ldquoSkinners science of dental materialsrdquo Tenth Edition

2 Dental materials and their selection-willian jorsquo brien

3 Restorative dental materials-craig

4 Removable prosthodintics- stewart

Page 18

  • Constructing a model or cast is an important step in numerous dental procedures Various types of cast amp models can be made from gypsum products using an impression mold or negative likeness of a dental structure An impression is a negative replica of the tissue of the oral cavity It is used to register or reproduce the form and relation of the teeth amp surrounding tissue
  • HISTORY
    • 1558 - Celline described a wax model to make impression in his book MEMORIES
    • 1700 - Matheus G Purenam suggested that wax models can be used in prosthetic work
    • 1728 ndash Pierre Fauchard described various impression materials in his book LE CHIRURGEEN DENTISTE
    • 1756 ndash Persian Phillip Pfaff first used plaster models prepared from sectional wax impression of the mouth
    • 1810 ndash R C Skinner describe about many materials and techniques in his first American book
    • 1928 ndash ADA developed specification No 19 for impression material
    • 1930 ndash Zinc Oxide Eugenol a rigid impression was introduced
    • 1930 ndash Polysulfide was first used as a commercial synthetic rubber as a copolymer of Ethylene Chloride amp sodium
    • 1937 ndash Agar was introduced by Sears
    • 1949 ndash Alginate was developed during World war II
    • 1950 ndash Polysulfide was used in dentistry
    • 1955 ndash Condensation Silicone was introduced in Germany
    • 1975 ndash Addition Silicone was introduced
    • 1977 ndash Costell introduced Dual tray technique
    • 1980 ndash A Visible light cure Polyether Urethane Dimethacrylate rubber impression material was introduced
    • 1996 ndash Blare amp Wassed considered a no of solution used to disinfecting impression material
      • IDEAL REQUIREMENTS OF IMPRESSION MATERIAL
        • 1 Pleasant taste amp odor
        • 2 Not contain any toxic amp irritating ingredients
        • 3 Adequate shelf life
        • 4 Satisfactory consistency and texture
        • 5 Easy to disinfect with out loss of accuracy
        • 6 Compatible with die and cast material
        • 7 Dimensional stability
        • 8 Good elastic properties
        • 9 Easy manipulation
        • 10 Adequate setting characteristics
        • 11 High degree of reproduction details
        • 12 Adequate strength
        • 13 Should not release any gas
        • 14 Economical
        • 15 Should not be technique sensitive
        • 1 Based on rigidityelasticity -
        • a Rigid (non-elastic)
        • b Elastic
        • 2 Based on viscosity -
        • a Mucostatic
        • b Mucocompressive
        • c Pseudoplastic
          • 3 Based on setting of material -
            • 1 a chemical reaction
            • b Physical change of state
            • 2 a reversible
            • b Irreversible
            • 4Based on interaction with salivawater -
            • 1 Hydrophobic
            • 2 Hydrophilic
              • 5Based on chemistry-
                • 1 Impression Plaster
                • 2 Impression compound
                • 3 Metal oxide (zinc oxide eugenol)
                • 4 Reversible hydrocolloid
                • 5 Irreversible hydrocolloid
                • 6 Poly sulfides
                • 7 Condensation silicones
                • 8 Addition silicones
                • 9 Polyether
                • 10 Visible light curing polyether urethane dimethacrylate
                  • 6Based on use -
                    • 1 Primary impression materials
                    • 2 Secondary impression materials
                    • 3 Duplicating materials
                      • HYDROCOLLOIDS
                        • Colloids are often classified as fourth state of matter the Colloidal state In a solution of sugar in water the sugar molecules are uniformly dispersed in the water amp there is no visible physical separation between the solute amp the solvent molecules If sugar molecules replaced with large amp visible particles such as sand the system is Suspension or if molecules are liquid such vegetable oil then system is Emulsion
                        • True solution exists as a single phase However both the colloid amp the suspension have to phase- The dispersed amp Dispersion phase In the colloid the particles in the dispersed phase consist of molecules held together either by primary or secondary force The size of the particles range is 1 ndash 200nm
                          • Gels
                            • Colloids with a liquid as the dispersion medium can exist in two different forms known as Sol amp Gel
                            • A sol has the appearance amp many characteristic of a various liquid
                            • A gel on the contrary is a semi solid amp produced from a soldering process of gelation by the formation of fibrils or chains called Micelles
                            • Gelation is the conversion of a sol to gel amp the temperature at which this occurs is called Gelation Temperature
                              • Gelation may be brought about in one of these ways
                                • Lowering the temperature- It is done by reducing the thermal energy of effectively These forces are secondary molecular forces The bond between the fibrils is weak amp they break at slightly elevated temperature Gelation temp is 37-50degree centigrade
                                • Liquefaction temperature- It is considerable higher than gelation temp amp this property is known as Hysteresis This temp is between 70 -100 degree centigrade
                                • Chemical reaction- Gelation may also induced by chemical reaction where in the dispersed phase of soil is allowed to react with a substance to give a different type of dispersed phase The process is not reversed by an increased temperature
                                  • Types of Hydrocolloids
                                    • REVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS - Reversible hydrocolloids are those sol can be changed to gel but gel canrsquot be reversed back to the solution
                                    • Eg Alginate impression material
                                    • IRREVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS - Irreversible hydrocolloids are those materials where the change from the sol to gel can be brought by lowering the temp of the sol amp the gel can be converted back to sol condition by heating
                                    • Eg Agar ndash Agar
                                      • ALGINATE IRREVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOID
                                        • The word alginate comes from Algin amp named by a chemist of Scotland It was identified as a liner polymer with numerous carboxyl acid groups It is called as irreversible hydrocolloids because gelation is induced by chemical reaction amp transformation is not possible It is the most widely used dental materials
                                        • The principal factors responsible for the success of this type of impression materials are-
                                        • Easy to manipulate
                                        • Comfortable for the patients
                                        • Relatively inexpensive
                                        • Composition
                                        • Potassium or Sodium Alginate- 15 It is the chief active ingredient
                                        • Calcium Sulfate- 16 It is used as a reactor
                                        • Zinc Oxide amp Diatomaceous Earth- Zinc oxide ndash 4 amp Diatomaceous
                                        • earth 60
                                        • Potassium Titanium Fluoride - 3
                                        • Sodium Phosphate - 2
                                          • Gelation Process
                                            • The typical sol-gel reaction is a soluble alginate with calcium sulfate amp the formation of an insoluble calcium alginate gel Calcium sulfate reacts rapidly to produce the in soluble Ca alginate from the potassium or sodium alginate in a aqueous solution The production of calcium alginate is rapid that it does not allow sufficient working time Thus third water soluble salt such as a trisodium phosphate is added to the solution to prolong the working time Thus the reaction between the calcium sulfate amp the soluble alginate is prevented as long as there is uncreated trisodium phosphate
                                            • 2Na3Po4 +n CaSo4 rarrnKaSo4 +Ca alginate
                                            • When the supply of the trisodium phosphate is exhausted the ca ions begin to react with the potassium alginate to produce calcium alginate Kzn Alg +n CaSo4rarr n KaSo4 + Cal alginate
                                            • The added salt is retarder
                                            • Controlling of gelation time-
                                            • An increase in the temp of water used for mixing shorten the working amp setting time
                                            • The proportion of powder amp water also effect the setting time
                                              • PROPERTIES
                                                • Alginate is of two types
                                                • Type I - Fast setting
                                                • Type II - Normal setting
                                                • According to ADA Specification No 18 properties are-
                                                • 1 Mixing time- Creamy consistency come in 45 ndash 60 sec
                                                • 2 Working time-
                                                • - Fast setting material - 12 ndash 2 min
                                                • - Normal set material - 2 ndash 45 min
                                                • 3 Setting or gelation time-
                                                • - Optimum gelation time - 3-4 min at room temp
                                                • - For fast setting material - 1 -2 min
                                                • - For normal setting material - 2 ndash 45min
                                                • 4 Permanent deformation - ADA specification requires 97 recovery amp where 3 is permanent deformation Alginate has 988 recovery amp 15 permanent deformation
                                                • 5 Flexibility- ADA specification permits10 ndash 20 at the stress of 1000gm cm2 Hard material has value of 5-8
                                                • 6 Strength-
                                                • The compressive strength- 5000-8000gmcm2
                                                • Tear strength - 350-700gmcm2
                                                • 7Viscoelasticity Usually an alginate impression material does not adhere to the oral tissue as strongly as some of the non aqueous elastomers so it is easy to remove the alginate impression rapidly
                                                • 8Accuracy Most alginate is not capable of reproducing the finer details that are absorbed in impression with Agar amp other elastomeric impression material
                                                • 9 Dimensional effects - The gel may loss water by evaporation from its surface amp it shrinks
                                                • - If the gel placed in the water it absorbed water amp gel swells
                                                • - Thermal change also contributes to dimensional change The alginate shrinks slightly due to difference in temp between mouth temp(30c) amp room temp(23c)
                                                • 10 Biocompatibility -
                                                • No chemical or allergic reaction associated with alginate
                                                • 11 Shelf life -
                                                • Alginate impressions have shorter shelf life Strong temp amp moisture contamination are two factor which effect the self life of alginate
                                                  • MANIPULATION OF ALGINATE
                                                    • PREPARING THE MIX
                                                    • A measured powder is shifted into pre measured water that has been placed in a clean rubber bowl Care should be taken to avoid whipping air into the mix A vigorous figure 8 motion is best with the mix being swiped or stropped against the side of the mixing rubber bowl with intermittent rotation ie180 degree of the spatula to press out air bubbles The mixing time is 45sec -1 min
                                                    • A variety of mechanical devices are also available for mixing impression material There benefits are convenience speed amp elimination of human error
                                                    • MAKING THE IMPRESSION
                                                    • Before setting the impression the material should have developed sufficient body so that it doesnrsquot flow out of the try A perforated tray is generally used If plastic try or metal rim lock try is selected a thin layer of adhesive should be applied amp allowed to dry before mixing and loading the try The thickness of the alginate between the tray amp tissue should be at least 3mm
                                                    • ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES
                                                    • Advantages
                                                    • 1 Cannot be electroplated
                                                    • 2 Distortion occurs easily
                                                    • 3 Poor dimensional stability (poured within 15 min)
                                                    • 4 Poor tear strength
                                                    • AGAR ndash REVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS
                                                    • When agar hydrocolloids heated they liquefy or go into the sol state amp on cooling they return to the gel state Because this process can be repeated a gel of this type is described as Reversible hydrocolloid The preparation of the agar hydrocolloids for clinical use requires care full control amp yields accurate impression It has been largely replaced by alginate hydrocolloids amp rubber impression materials
                                                      • COMPOSITION
                                                        • Borates - 02 ndash 05 Its works as retarder
                                                        • water - 855 It is reaction medium
                                                        • Agar- 13-17 It is main active constituent of reversible hydrocolloid impression material
                                                        • Sulfates - 1 ndash 2 Accelerators
                                                        • Fillers - 05 -1 Diatomaceous earth silica wax rubber etc used as filler
                                                        • Bactericide - Thymol amp glycerin are used
                                                        • Color amp flavor
                                                          • GELATION PROCESS
                                                            • The setting of the reversible hydrocolloid is called gelation The reaction can be expressed a sol- gel reaction The physical changes from to gel does not return to the sol at the same temp at which it solidified The gel must be heated at the liquefaction temp ie 70 - 100c to form sol Sol transform into a gel at 37-50c the exact gelation temp depended on several factor including the molecular wt the purity of the material amp the ratio of agar to other ingredients
                                                            • The gelation is critical If the temp is high the heat from sol may injury to the soft tissue or if the surface of the sol transforms to a gel as soon as the sol may injure the oral tissues a high surface stress may develop If the gelation temp is too far below the oral temp it will be difficulty or even impossible to chill the material sufficiently to obtain a firm gel to adjacent to the oral tissue The temp lag between the gelation amp liquefaction temp of the gel makes it possible to use as a dental impression material
                                                              • PROPERTIES
                                                                • Gelation temperature -
                                                                • After tempering the sol should be homogenous and should set to a gel between 37 ndash 500c when cooled
                                                                • Viscoelastic properties -
                                                                • It demonstrates the necessity of deforming the impression rapidly when it removed from the mouth which reduces the amount of the permanent deformation The elastic recovery of the hydrocolloid is never complete amp it does not return entirely to its original dimension after deformation The amount of permanent deformation in clinical is negligible provided that -
                                                                • a) The material has adequately gelled
                                                                • b) The impression has been removed rapidly
                                                                • c) The under cuts present in the cavity preparation are minimal
                                                                • Permanent deformation -
                                                                • The ADA specification requires that the permanent deformation should be less than 15 after the material compressed 10 for 30sec This impression material readily meets this requirement with the value of about 1
                                                                • Distortion during gelation -
                                                                • If the material is held rigidly to the tray then the impression material shrinks toward the center of its mass Rapid cooling may cause a concentration of stress near the tray where gelation first takes place
                                                                • Flexibility -
                                                                • The ADA specification requirement for flexibility allows a range of 4-14 amp most agar materials meet this requirement
                                                                • Strength -
                                                                • The compressive strength of Agar impression material is 8000gmcm2
                                                                • The tear strength of Agar is 7000gmcm2
                                                                • Flow -
                                                                • Agar is sufficiently fluid to allow detailed reproduction of hard amp soft tissue
                                                                • Compatibility with gypsum -
                                                                • Not all the agar impression materials are equally compatible with all gypsum products The impression should be washed of saliva amp any trace of blood which retarded the setting of gypsum
                                                                  • Manipulation of agar impression
                                                                    • The use of agar hydrocolloid involves special equipment called conditioning unit for agar The hydrocolloid is usually supplied In two forms syringe and tray materials The only difference between the materials is the color and the greater fluidity of the syringe material
                                                                      • Impression tray
                                                                        • It is rim locked trays with water circulating device This types of trays should allow a space of 3mm occlusally and laterally and extend distally to cover all the teeth After the tray has been properly positioned water is circulated at 13 degrees through the tray until gelation occurs
                                                                          • Preparation of material
                                                                            • Proper equipment of liquefying and storing the agar impression material is essential
                                                                            • At first reverse the hydrocolloid gel to the sol stage Boiling water is a convenient way of liquefying the material The material must be held at this temperature for a minimum of 10mins Propylene glycol can be added to the water to obtain 100 degrees After it has been liquefied the material must be stored in the tray The material can be stored for several days Usually there are three compartments in the conditioning unit making it possible to liquefy store and temper the material
                                                                              • Conditioning and tempering
                                                                                • Because 55 degree is the maximum tolerable temperature the storage temperature of 65 degrees would be too hot for the oral tissues especially given the bulk of the tray material Therefore the material that is used to fill the tray must be cooled and tempered Eliminating the effect of imbibition is the purpose of placing the gauze pad over the tempering tray materials When the tray material is placed into the tempering bath the gauze is removed and the contaminating surface layer of material clings to the gauze and is removed as well
                                                                                  • Making the impression
                                                                                    • The syringe material is taken directly from the storage compartment and applied to the prepared cavities It is first applied to the base of the preparation and then the reminder of the tooth is covered By the time the cavity preparation and adjoining teeth have been covered the tray material has been properly tempered and is now ready to be placed immediately in the mouth to form the bulk of impression Gelation is accelerated by circulating cool water approximately 18 ndash 21 degrees through the tray for 3 ndash 5 minutes
                                                                                      • Disinfection of hydrocolloid impression
                                                                                        • As the hydrocolloid impression material must be poured within short time after removal from the mouth The disinfection procedure should be relatively rapid to prevent the dimensional change Most manufacturers recommended a specific disinfectant The agent may be iodophor bleach or gluteraldehyde The distortion is minimal if the recommended immersion time is followed and if the impression is poured properly The irreversible hydrocolloid may be disinfected by 10 minute immersion inor spraying with the antimicrobial agent such as NaOCl and glutaraldehyde without sufficient dimensional change The current protocol for disinfecting hydrocolloid impression is to use household bleach iodophor and synthetic phenols as disinfectants After the immersion it is thoroughly rinsed The disinfectant is sprayed liberally o the exposed surface The immersion should not be submerged or soaked in the disinfectant solution
                                                                                          • ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES
                                                                                          • TYPES OF FAILURES
                                                                                            • 1 Distortion- due to
                                                                                            • Delayed pouring of impression
                                                                                            • Movement of tray during setting
                                                                                            • Removal from mouth too early
                                                                                            • 2 Grainy impression- due to
                                                                                            • Inadequate mixing
                                                                                            • Prolonged mixing
                                                                                            • Less water in mix
                                                                                            • 3 Tearing - due to
                                                                                            • Inadequate bulk
                                                                                            • Moisture contamination
                                                                                            • Removal from mouth too early
                                                                                            • Prolonged mixing
                                                                                            • 4 Bubbles- due to
                                                                                            • Early gelation preventing flow
                                                                                            • Air incorporated during mixing
                                                                                            • 5 Irregular voids- due to
                                                                                            • Excess moisture ampdebris on
                                                                                              • 1 Anusavice ldquoSkinners science of dental materialsrdquo Tenth Edition
Page 18: Hydroco Llo Ids / orthodontic courses by Indian dental academy

Hydrocolloids

Prolonged mixing

Less water in mix

3 Tearing - due to

Inadequate bulk

Moisture contamination

Removal from mouth too early

Prolonged mixing

4 Bubbles- due to

Early gelation preventing flow

Air incorporated during mixing

5 Irregular voids- due to

Excess moisture ampdebris on

REFERENCES

1 Anusavice ldquoSkinners science of dental materialsrdquo Tenth Edition

2 Dental materials and their selection-willian jorsquo brien

3 Restorative dental materials-craig

4 Removable prosthodintics- stewart

Page 18

  • Constructing a model or cast is an important step in numerous dental procedures Various types of cast amp models can be made from gypsum products using an impression mold or negative likeness of a dental structure An impression is a negative replica of the tissue of the oral cavity It is used to register or reproduce the form and relation of the teeth amp surrounding tissue
  • HISTORY
    • 1558 - Celline described a wax model to make impression in his book MEMORIES
    • 1700 - Matheus G Purenam suggested that wax models can be used in prosthetic work
    • 1728 ndash Pierre Fauchard described various impression materials in his book LE CHIRURGEEN DENTISTE
    • 1756 ndash Persian Phillip Pfaff first used plaster models prepared from sectional wax impression of the mouth
    • 1810 ndash R C Skinner describe about many materials and techniques in his first American book
    • 1928 ndash ADA developed specification No 19 for impression material
    • 1930 ndash Zinc Oxide Eugenol a rigid impression was introduced
    • 1930 ndash Polysulfide was first used as a commercial synthetic rubber as a copolymer of Ethylene Chloride amp sodium
    • 1937 ndash Agar was introduced by Sears
    • 1949 ndash Alginate was developed during World war II
    • 1950 ndash Polysulfide was used in dentistry
    • 1955 ndash Condensation Silicone was introduced in Germany
    • 1975 ndash Addition Silicone was introduced
    • 1977 ndash Costell introduced Dual tray technique
    • 1980 ndash A Visible light cure Polyether Urethane Dimethacrylate rubber impression material was introduced
    • 1996 ndash Blare amp Wassed considered a no of solution used to disinfecting impression material
      • IDEAL REQUIREMENTS OF IMPRESSION MATERIAL
        • 1 Pleasant taste amp odor
        • 2 Not contain any toxic amp irritating ingredients
        • 3 Adequate shelf life
        • 4 Satisfactory consistency and texture
        • 5 Easy to disinfect with out loss of accuracy
        • 6 Compatible with die and cast material
        • 7 Dimensional stability
        • 8 Good elastic properties
        • 9 Easy manipulation
        • 10 Adequate setting characteristics
        • 11 High degree of reproduction details
        • 12 Adequate strength
        • 13 Should not release any gas
        • 14 Economical
        • 15 Should not be technique sensitive
        • 1 Based on rigidityelasticity -
        • a Rigid (non-elastic)
        • b Elastic
        • 2 Based on viscosity -
        • a Mucostatic
        • b Mucocompressive
        • c Pseudoplastic
          • 3 Based on setting of material -
            • 1 a chemical reaction
            • b Physical change of state
            • 2 a reversible
            • b Irreversible
            • 4Based on interaction with salivawater -
            • 1 Hydrophobic
            • 2 Hydrophilic
              • 5Based on chemistry-
                • 1 Impression Plaster
                • 2 Impression compound
                • 3 Metal oxide (zinc oxide eugenol)
                • 4 Reversible hydrocolloid
                • 5 Irreversible hydrocolloid
                • 6 Poly sulfides
                • 7 Condensation silicones
                • 8 Addition silicones
                • 9 Polyether
                • 10 Visible light curing polyether urethane dimethacrylate
                  • 6Based on use -
                    • 1 Primary impression materials
                    • 2 Secondary impression materials
                    • 3 Duplicating materials
                      • HYDROCOLLOIDS
                        • Colloids are often classified as fourth state of matter the Colloidal state In a solution of sugar in water the sugar molecules are uniformly dispersed in the water amp there is no visible physical separation between the solute amp the solvent molecules If sugar molecules replaced with large amp visible particles such as sand the system is Suspension or if molecules are liquid such vegetable oil then system is Emulsion
                        • True solution exists as a single phase However both the colloid amp the suspension have to phase- The dispersed amp Dispersion phase In the colloid the particles in the dispersed phase consist of molecules held together either by primary or secondary force The size of the particles range is 1 ndash 200nm
                          • Gels
                            • Colloids with a liquid as the dispersion medium can exist in two different forms known as Sol amp Gel
                            • A sol has the appearance amp many characteristic of a various liquid
                            • A gel on the contrary is a semi solid amp produced from a soldering process of gelation by the formation of fibrils or chains called Micelles
                            • Gelation is the conversion of a sol to gel amp the temperature at which this occurs is called Gelation Temperature
                              • Gelation may be brought about in one of these ways
                                • Lowering the temperature- It is done by reducing the thermal energy of effectively These forces are secondary molecular forces The bond between the fibrils is weak amp they break at slightly elevated temperature Gelation temp is 37-50degree centigrade
                                • Liquefaction temperature- It is considerable higher than gelation temp amp this property is known as Hysteresis This temp is between 70 -100 degree centigrade
                                • Chemical reaction- Gelation may also induced by chemical reaction where in the dispersed phase of soil is allowed to react with a substance to give a different type of dispersed phase The process is not reversed by an increased temperature
                                  • Types of Hydrocolloids
                                    • REVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS - Reversible hydrocolloids are those sol can be changed to gel but gel canrsquot be reversed back to the solution
                                    • Eg Alginate impression material
                                    • IRREVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS - Irreversible hydrocolloids are those materials where the change from the sol to gel can be brought by lowering the temp of the sol amp the gel can be converted back to sol condition by heating
                                    • Eg Agar ndash Agar
                                      • ALGINATE IRREVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOID
                                        • The word alginate comes from Algin amp named by a chemist of Scotland It was identified as a liner polymer with numerous carboxyl acid groups It is called as irreversible hydrocolloids because gelation is induced by chemical reaction amp transformation is not possible It is the most widely used dental materials
                                        • The principal factors responsible for the success of this type of impression materials are-
                                        • Easy to manipulate
                                        • Comfortable for the patients
                                        • Relatively inexpensive
                                        • Composition
                                        • Potassium or Sodium Alginate- 15 It is the chief active ingredient
                                        • Calcium Sulfate- 16 It is used as a reactor
                                        • Zinc Oxide amp Diatomaceous Earth- Zinc oxide ndash 4 amp Diatomaceous
                                        • earth 60
                                        • Potassium Titanium Fluoride - 3
                                        • Sodium Phosphate - 2
                                          • Gelation Process
                                            • The typical sol-gel reaction is a soluble alginate with calcium sulfate amp the formation of an insoluble calcium alginate gel Calcium sulfate reacts rapidly to produce the in soluble Ca alginate from the potassium or sodium alginate in a aqueous solution The production of calcium alginate is rapid that it does not allow sufficient working time Thus third water soluble salt such as a trisodium phosphate is added to the solution to prolong the working time Thus the reaction between the calcium sulfate amp the soluble alginate is prevented as long as there is uncreated trisodium phosphate
                                            • 2Na3Po4 +n CaSo4 rarrnKaSo4 +Ca alginate
                                            • When the supply of the trisodium phosphate is exhausted the ca ions begin to react with the potassium alginate to produce calcium alginate Kzn Alg +n CaSo4rarr n KaSo4 + Cal alginate
                                            • The added salt is retarder
                                            • Controlling of gelation time-
                                            • An increase in the temp of water used for mixing shorten the working amp setting time
                                            • The proportion of powder amp water also effect the setting time
                                              • PROPERTIES
                                                • Alginate is of two types
                                                • Type I - Fast setting
                                                • Type II - Normal setting
                                                • According to ADA Specification No 18 properties are-
                                                • 1 Mixing time- Creamy consistency come in 45 ndash 60 sec
                                                • 2 Working time-
                                                • - Fast setting material - 12 ndash 2 min
                                                • - Normal set material - 2 ndash 45 min
                                                • 3 Setting or gelation time-
                                                • - Optimum gelation time - 3-4 min at room temp
                                                • - For fast setting material - 1 -2 min
                                                • - For normal setting material - 2 ndash 45min
                                                • 4 Permanent deformation - ADA specification requires 97 recovery amp where 3 is permanent deformation Alginate has 988 recovery amp 15 permanent deformation
                                                • 5 Flexibility- ADA specification permits10 ndash 20 at the stress of 1000gm cm2 Hard material has value of 5-8
                                                • 6 Strength-
                                                • The compressive strength- 5000-8000gmcm2
                                                • Tear strength - 350-700gmcm2
                                                • 7Viscoelasticity Usually an alginate impression material does not adhere to the oral tissue as strongly as some of the non aqueous elastomers so it is easy to remove the alginate impression rapidly
                                                • 8Accuracy Most alginate is not capable of reproducing the finer details that are absorbed in impression with Agar amp other elastomeric impression material
                                                • 9 Dimensional effects - The gel may loss water by evaporation from its surface amp it shrinks
                                                • - If the gel placed in the water it absorbed water amp gel swells
                                                • - Thermal change also contributes to dimensional change The alginate shrinks slightly due to difference in temp between mouth temp(30c) amp room temp(23c)
                                                • 10 Biocompatibility -
                                                • No chemical or allergic reaction associated with alginate
                                                • 11 Shelf life -
                                                • Alginate impressions have shorter shelf life Strong temp amp moisture contamination are two factor which effect the self life of alginate
                                                  • MANIPULATION OF ALGINATE
                                                    • PREPARING THE MIX
                                                    • A measured powder is shifted into pre measured water that has been placed in a clean rubber bowl Care should be taken to avoid whipping air into the mix A vigorous figure 8 motion is best with the mix being swiped or stropped against the side of the mixing rubber bowl with intermittent rotation ie180 degree of the spatula to press out air bubbles The mixing time is 45sec -1 min
                                                    • A variety of mechanical devices are also available for mixing impression material There benefits are convenience speed amp elimination of human error
                                                    • MAKING THE IMPRESSION
                                                    • Before setting the impression the material should have developed sufficient body so that it doesnrsquot flow out of the try A perforated tray is generally used If plastic try or metal rim lock try is selected a thin layer of adhesive should be applied amp allowed to dry before mixing and loading the try The thickness of the alginate between the tray amp tissue should be at least 3mm
                                                    • ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES
                                                    • Advantages
                                                    • 1 Cannot be electroplated
                                                    • 2 Distortion occurs easily
                                                    • 3 Poor dimensional stability (poured within 15 min)
                                                    • 4 Poor tear strength
                                                    • AGAR ndash REVERSIBLE HYDROCOLLOIDS
                                                    • When agar hydrocolloids heated they liquefy or go into the sol state amp on cooling they return to the gel state Because this process can be repeated a gel of this type is described as Reversible hydrocolloid The preparation of the agar hydrocolloids for clinical use requires care full control amp yields accurate impression It has been largely replaced by alginate hydrocolloids amp rubber impression materials
                                                      • COMPOSITION
                                                        • Borates - 02 ndash 05 Its works as retarder
                                                        • water - 855 It is reaction medium
                                                        • Agar- 13-17 It is main active constituent of reversible hydrocolloid impression material
                                                        • Sulfates - 1 ndash 2 Accelerators
                                                        • Fillers - 05 -1 Diatomaceous earth silica wax rubber etc used as filler
                                                        • Bactericide - Thymol amp glycerin are used
                                                        • Color amp flavor
                                                          • GELATION PROCESS
                                                            • The setting of the reversible hydrocolloid is called gelation The reaction can be expressed a sol- gel reaction The physical changes from to gel does not return to the sol at the same temp at which it solidified The gel must be heated at the liquefaction temp ie 70 - 100c to form sol Sol transform into a gel at 37-50c the exact gelation temp depended on several factor including the molecular wt the purity of the material amp the ratio of agar to other ingredients
                                                            • The gelation is critical If the temp is high the heat from sol may injury to the soft tissue or if the surface of the sol transforms to a gel as soon as the sol may injure the oral tissues a high surface stress may develop If the gelation temp is too far below the oral temp it will be difficulty or even impossible to chill the material sufficiently to obtain a firm gel to adjacent to the oral tissue The temp lag between the gelation amp liquefaction temp of the gel makes it possible to use as a dental impression material
                                                              • PROPERTIES
                                                                • Gelation temperature -
                                                                • After tempering the sol should be homogenous and should set to a gel between 37 ndash 500c when cooled
                                                                • Viscoelastic properties -
                                                                • It demonstrates the necessity of deforming the impression rapidly when it removed from the mouth which reduces the amount of the permanent deformation The elastic recovery of the hydrocolloid is never complete amp it does not return entirely to its original dimension after deformation The amount of permanent deformation in clinical is negligible provided that -
                                                                • a) The material has adequately gelled
                                                                • b) The impression has been removed rapidly
                                                                • c) The under cuts present in the cavity preparation are minimal
                                                                • Permanent deformation -
                                                                • The ADA specification requires that the permanent deformation should be less than 15 after the material compressed 10 for 30sec This impression material readily meets this requirement with the value of about 1
                                                                • Distortion during gelation -
                                                                • If the material is held rigidly to the tray then the impression material shrinks toward the center of its mass Rapid cooling may cause a concentration of stress near the tray where gelation first takes place
                                                                • Flexibility -
                                                                • The ADA specification requirement for flexibility allows a range of 4-14 amp most agar materials meet this requirement
                                                                • Strength -
                                                                • The compressive strength of Agar impression material is 8000gmcm2
                                                                • The tear strength of Agar is 7000gmcm2
                                                                • Flow -
                                                                • Agar is sufficiently fluid to allow detailed reproduction of hard amp soft tissue
                                                                • Compatibility with gypsum -
                                                                • Not all the agar impression materials are equally compatible with all gypsum products The impression should be washed of saliva amp any trace of blood which retarded the setting of gypsum
                                                                  • Manipulation of agar impression
                                                                    • The use of agar hydrocolloid involves special equipment called conditioning unit for agar The hydrocolloid is usually supplied In two forms syringe and tray materials The only difference between the materials is the color and the greater fluidity of the syringe material
                                                                      • Impression tray
                                                                        • It is rim locked trays with water circulating device This types of trays should allow a space of 3mm occlusally and laterally and extend distally to cover all the teeth After the tray has been properly positioned water is circulated at 13 degrees through the tray until gelation occurs
                                                                          • Preparation of material
                                                                            • Proper equipment of liquefying and storing the agar impression material is essential
                                                                            • At first reverse the hydrocolloid gel to the sol stage Boiling water is a convenient way of liquefying the material The material must be held at this temperature for a minimum of 10mins Propylene glycol can be added to the water to obtain 100 degrees After it has been liquefied the material must be stored in the tray The material can be stored for several days Usually there are three compartments in the conditioning unit making it possible to liquefy store and temper the material
                                                                              • Conditioning and tempering
                                                                                • Because 55 degree is the maximum tolerable temperature the storage temperature of 65 degrees would be too hot for the oral tissues especially given the bulk of the tray material Therefore the material that is used to fill the tray must be cooled and tempered Eliminating the effect of imbibition is the purpose of placing the gauze pad over the tempering tray materials When the tray material is placed into the tempering bath the gauze is removed and the contaminating surface layer of material clings to the gauze and is removed as well
                                                                                  • Making the impression
                                                                                    • The syringe material is taken directly from the storage compartment and applied to the prepared cavities It is first applied to the base of the preparation and then the reminder of the tooth is covered By the time the cavity preparation and adjoining teeth have been covered the tray material has been properly tempered and is now ready to be placed immediately in the mouth to form the bulk of impression Gelation is accelerated by circulating cool water approximately 18 ndash 21 degrees through the tray for 3 ndash 5 minutes
                                                                                      • Disinfection of hydrocolloid impression
                                                                                        • As the hydrocolloid impression material must be poured within short time after removal from the mouth The disinfection procedure should be relatively rapid to prevent the dimensional change Most manufacturers recommended a specific disinfectant The agent may be iodophor bleach or gluteraldehyde The distortion is minimal if the recommended immersion time is followed and if the impression is poured properly The irreversible hydrocolloid may be disinfected by 10 minute immersion inor spraying with the antimicrobial agent such as NaOCl and glutaraldehyde without sufficient dimensional change The current protocol for disinfecting hydrocolloid impression is to use household bleach iodophor and synthetic phenols as disinfectants After the immersion it is thoroughly rinsed The disinfectant is sprayed liberally o the exposed surface The immersion should not be submerged or soaked in the disinfectant solution
                                                                                          • ADVANTAGES amp DISADVANTAGES
                                                                                          • TYPES OF FAILURES
                                                                                            • 1 Distortion- due to
                                                                                            • Delayed pouring of impression
                                                                                            • Movement of tray during setting
                                                                                            • Removal from mouth too early
                                                                                            • 2 Grainy impression- due to
                                                                                            • Inadequate mixing
                                                                                            • Prolonged mixing
                                                                                            • Less water in mix
                                                                                            • 3 Tearing - due to
                                                                                            • Inadequate bulk
                                                                                            • Moisture contamination
                                                                                            • Removal from mouth too early
                                                                                            • Prolonged mixing
                                                                                            • 4 Bubbles- due to
                                                                                            • Early gelation preventing flow
                                                                                            • Air incorporated during mixing
                                                                                            • 5 Irregular voids- due to
                                                                                            • Excess moisture ampdebris on
                                                                                              • 1 Anusavice ldquoSkinners science of dental materialsrdquo Tenth Edition